MEP + Specialty Systems Design Standards (FOUR SEASONS)

FOUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
PART TWO - MEP + SPECIALTY SYSTEMS
/ ARCHITECTURAL/ MECHANICAL/ELECTICAL/
ARCHITEKTONISCH / AR- FURNITURE/FIXTURES/EQUIP-
CHITELTONICO / x MENT/ ARCHITECTURAL/
/ ARQUITECT ARCHITECTURAL/ MECHANI-
NICO / ARSITEKTURAL / CAL/ELECTICAL/ FURNI-
/ARCHITECTURAL TURE/FIXTURES/EQUIPMENT/
INFORMATION TECHNOL-
MECHANICAL/ ELECTICAL /
OGY/ ARCHITECTURAL/
AL/ FURNITURE/FIXTURES/EQUIP-
ARCHITECTURAL/ MECHANI-
MENT/ INFORMATION TECH-
CAL/ELECTICAL/ FURNITURE/
NOLOGY/ ARCHITECTURAL/
FIXTURES/EQUIPMENT/ ARCHI-
ARCHITECTURAL/ MECHANI-
TECTURAL/ ARCHITECTURAL/
CAL/ELECTICAL/ FURNITURE/
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY/
MECHANICAL/ELECTICAL/
TECTURAL/ ARCHITECTURAL/ FURNITURE/FIXTURES/EQUIP-
/ INFORMA- MENT/ ARCHITECTURAL/
TION TECHNOLOGY/ FURNI- ARCHITECTURAL/ MECHANI-
TURE/FIXTURES/EQUIPMENT/ CAL/ELECTICAL/ FURNITURE/
ARCHITECTURAL/ ARCHITEC- FIXTURES/EQUIPMENT/ ARCHI-
TURAL/ MECHANICAL/ELEC- TECTURAL/ ARCHITECTURAL/
TICAL/ FURNITURE/FIXTURES/ MECHANICAL/ELECTICAL/
EQUIPMENT/ ARCHITECTURAL/ FURNITURE/FIXTURES/EQUIP-
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY/ MENT/ ARCHITECTURAL/
ARCHITECTURAL/ MECHANI- INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY/
CAL/ELECTICAL/ FURNITURE/ MECHANICAL/ELECTICAL/
FIXTURES/EQUIPMENT/ ARCHI- FURNITURE/FIXTURES/EQUIP-
TECTURAL/ ARCHITECTURAL/ MENT/ ARCHITECTURAL/ ME-
MECHANICAL/ELECTICAL/ CHANICAL/ELECTICAL/ FUR-
FURNITURE/FIXTURES/EQUIP- NITURE/FIXTURES/EQUIPMENT/
2007 MENT/ ARCHITECTURAL/ AR-

CHITECTURAL/ MECHANICAL/
ELECTICAL/ARCHITECTURAL/
TECTURAL/ ARCHITECTURAL/
MECHANICAL/ELECTICAL/
ARCHITECTURAL / FIXTURES/ ARCHITECTURAL/ ARCHITEC-
EQUIPMENT/ ARCHITECTURAL/ TURAL / FIXTURES/EQUIPMENT/
ARCHITECTURAL/ MECHANI- ARCHITECTURAL/ ARCHITEC-
CAL/ELECTICAL/ARCHITEC- TURAL/ MECHANICAL/ELECTI-
TURAL/ ARCHITECTURAL FUR- CAL/ARCHITECTURAL/ ARCHI-
FOUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
STATEMENT OF CONFIDENTIALITY
The contents of the Four Seasons Design Standards (FS Stan-

dards) and all discussions related to the FS Standards are confiden-
tial to Four Seasons Hotels Limited (Four Seasons) (such informa-
tion is referred to as Confidential Information) and this Confidential
Information is the property of Four Seasons. The Confidential Infor-
mation may be disclosed only to your employees, advisors, lenders,
agents and representatives (collectively, Representatives) directly
involved in discussions relating to the FS Standards and only on a
need-to-know basis, provided that such persons are also specifically
directed by you to treat this information as confidential. Disclosure of
the Confidential Information to any other persons is strictly prohibited.
All Confidential Information and any other written material containing
or reflecting any information in the Confidential Information (whether
prepared by Four Seasons or any of its representatives or by you
or any of your representatives or otherwise) and any copies thereof
shall be returned to Four Seasons upon request. These obligations
do not apply to information that is in the public domain nor to infor-
mation that is required to be disclosed by law or by any court order
2007
requiring such disclosure. If you do not agree with these obligations,
immediately return the FS Standards to Four Seasons.
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS - MEP
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Design + Construction Phases ............................................... 2
3 Analysis of Design Alternatives .............................................. 5
4 Consultant Responsibilities ....................................................... 7
5 Additional Project Requirements .......................................... 8
B MECHANICAL DESIGN CRITERIA

1 General Design ................................................................................ 1
2 Criteria .................................................................................................... 1
3 Mechanical Systems ..................................................................... 5
C HEATING SYSTEMS
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Heating Plant Equipment ........................................................... 3
D COOLING SYSTEMS
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Heating Plant Equipment ........................................................... 2
F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
E HEATING + COOLING SPECIALTIES
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Equipment ............................................................................................ 1
HEATING, VENTILATION
F + AIR CONDITIONING
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Guestrooms + Suites .................................................................... 1
3 Public Spaces ................................................................................... 3
4 Equipment ........................................................................................... 4
5 Ductwork Systems ......................................................................... 6
G INSULATION, SUPPORT + ISOLATION

1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Insulation .............................................................................................. 1
3 Support + Isolation ........................................................................ 4
F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
H FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Smoke + Fire Venting ................................................................... 2
3 Wet Protection Systems .............................................................. 2
4 Special Protection Systems ...................................................... 4
I ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 System + Equipment ..................................................................... 1
3 Grounding/Earthing ....................................................................... 6
4 Testing .................................................................................................... 6
5 Training + Commissioning ........................................................ 6
J EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION

1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Equipment ............................................................................................ 3
3 Manufacturer/Installer Qualification .................................... 7
4 Training + Commissioning ......................................................... 8
5 Warranty ................................................................................................ 8
F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
K LIGHTING + DIMMING
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Dimming System ............................................................................ 6
3 Stage Lighting + Dimming .......................................................... 7
SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL + LIGHTING

L PROVISIONS
1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 1
2 Guestroom Floors ............................................................................ 1
3 Club Floor Lounge ......................................................................... 4
4 Restaurants ........................................................................................ 4
5 Bars + Lounges ............................................................................... 5
6 Meeting + Banquet Facilities ................................................... 5
7 Retail .................................................................................................... 6
8 Main Lobby + Reception Lobby ............................................. 7
9 Washrooms ....................................................................................... 7
10 Hotel Entrance + Porte Cochere ........................................... 8
11 Spa + Fitness Area ........................................................................ 8
12 Swimming Pool, Whirlpool + Plunge Pools ................... 9
13 Tennis Requirements .................................................................... 9
F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
14 Group Outdoor Activity Area .................................................... 10
15 Wedding Gardens .......................................................................... 10
16 Parking .................................................................................................... 10
17 Offices (General) ............................................................................. 11
18 Coffee/Mail Room ........................................................................... 11
19 Telephone Operators Room ..................................................... 11
20 Cashiers Office ............................................................................... 12
21 Staff Safe Deposit Box Room ................................................. 12
22 Security Office .................................................................................. 12
23 Room Service Cashiers Office .............................................. 12
24 Reservations ...................................................................................... 12
25 Staff Facilities .................................................................................... 13
26 Housekeeping + Laundry ........................................................... 14
27 Maintenance Area/Engineering .............................................. 14
28 Loading Dock .................................................................................... 15
29 Piers/Docks ........................................................................................ 16
30 Electrical Transportation Vehicles ........................................ 16
31 Switch Receptacle Finishes ..................................................... 16
F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
M LIGHTNING
SYSTEMS
PROTECTION
1 Design + Construction .............................................................. 1

2 Training + Commissioning ....................................................... 3
3 Warranty + Preventative Maintenance ........................... 4
N FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Equipment + Devices ................................................................... 3
3 Security System Interface ........................................................ 9
4 Wiring .................................................................................................... 10
5 Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications ................................. 10
6 Spare Parts/Tools ........................................................................... 11
7 Training + Commissioning ........................................................ 12
8 Warranty + Preventative Maintenance ............................. 13
F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BUILDING AUTOMATION +
O ENERGY MANAGEMENT
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Control Systems ............................................................................. 1
3 Functional Principles .................................................................... 2
4 Additional Requirements .............................................................. 3
5 Controls Equipment ......................................................................... 4
P PLUMBING
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Plumbing Systems .......................................................................... 1
3 Special Requirements .................................................................. 3
4 Plumbing Equipment ..................................................................... 4
6 Piping Materials ............................................................................... 7
7 Plumbing Fixtures + Trim ........................................................... 8
F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TESTING, COMMISSIONING
Q + BALANCING
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Testing .................................................................................................... 1
3 Balancing .............................................................................................. 3
4 Completion .......................................................................................... 5
STRUCTURED CABLING -
R VOICE + DATA
1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 1
2 Industry Standards ........................................................................ 1
3 Network Design Criteria + Overall System Topology 2
4 Technology Rooms ......................................................................... 4
5 Installation Practices + Performance Criteria .............. 5
Cable Standards + Terminations - Horizontal
6 Cabling ....................................................................................................
6
Cable Standards + Terminations - Riser Cabling -

7 Copper ....................................................................................................
7
Cable Standards + Terminations - Table 1: Riser

8 Cabling - Fibre ..................................................................................
7
Cable Standards + Terminations - Patching at

9 Closets ....................................................................................................
8
10 Cable Standards + Terminations - Cables ..................... 9

F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Jack Types - Administration, Public Space, Back of

11 House ....................................................................................................
11
12 Jack Types - Guestrooms ......................................................... 12

13 Jack Types - Meeting Rooms + Ballrooms .................... 13
14 Routing - Meeting Room Cabling ......................................... 15
15 Wireless Voice + Data Services ............................................ 18
16 Voice + Data Incoming Services ........................................... 18
17 Uninterrupted Power + Dedicated Power ....................... 19
18 Warranties + Quality Assurance ............................................ 20
19 Documentation ................................................................................. 21
20 Testing .................................................................................................... 21
Voice + Data Administration Wiring Locations -
21 General ....................................................................................................
22
Typical Voice/Data Requirements by Functional

22 Area - Table 2 .....................................................................................
24
Point of Sale (POS) Requirements by Functional

23 Area - Table 3 .....................................................................................
25
Voice + Data Requirements for Guestrooms:

24 Table 4 ....................................................................................................
26
25 Locations with Special Cabling Requirements ........... 28

26 Index Tables .
F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION
S SYSTEM
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Scope of MATV System ............................................................... 1
3 Coordination of Other Entertainment Systems ........... 2
4 Cabling (All Entertainment TV Systems) ......................... 2
5 Signal Outlet Locations .............................................................. 4
6 Incoming Services .......................................................................... 4
7 MATV Head End + Network Components ..................... 7
8 Television Sets + Related Equipment ............................... 10
9 IP Television ....................................................................................... 10
T AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

1 Introduction ....................................................................................... 1
2 General Requirements ............................................................... 1
3 Introduction - Systems + Equipment Requirements 3
Central AV Control Room - Systems + Equipment
4 Requirements .................................................................................
3
5 Audio - Systems + Equipment Requirements .............. 3

6 Video - Systems + Equipment Requirements ........... 8
F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Local Built-In Sources - Systems + Equipment
7 Requirements ..................................................................................
11
8 Control - Systems + Equipment Requirements 12

Connectivity - Niche Components - Systems +
9 Equipment Requirements .........................................................
15
Miscellaneous - Systems + Equipment

10 Requirements ...................................................................................
17
11 Portable - Systems + Equipment Requirements 18

12 Introduction - AV Considerations by Property Area 20
13 Audio Visual Control Room - AV Considerations 21
14 Meeting Spaces - AV Considerations .............................. 21
15 Food + Beverage Outlets - AV Considerations ......... 24
16 Public Areas - AV Considerations ....................................... 26
17 Back of House - AV Considerations .................................. 28
18 Recreation - AV Considerations ........................................... 29
19 Spa - AV Considerations ........................................................... 31
20 Miscellaneous Areas - AV Considerations ................... 32
21 DIgital Signage ................................................................................ 33
22 Training, Installation + Maintenance ................................. 33
Index Tables - AV Systems: Quantity, Type +
23 Location ...............................................................................................
34
F OUR SEASONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
U SECURITY SYSTEMS
1 General Design Concept ........................................................... 1
2 Closed Circuit Television ............................................................. 1
3 Door Monitoring System ............................................................. 6
4 VIP + Help Assistance System ............................................... 8
5 Electronic Door Locking System ........................................... 9
6 Automated Key Control System ............................................ 11
7 Photo ID System .............................................................................. 12
PORTABLE RADIOS
V + PAGING EQUIPMENT
1 General Requirements .................................................................... 1
2 Portable Radios ................................................................................. 1
3 Base Station/Repeater for Portable Radios ................... 2
4 Pagers .................................................................................................... 2
5 Paging Base Stations ..................................................................... 3
6 Programming ......................................................................................... 3
7 Installation, Training + Licensing .............................................. 3
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A GENERAL DESIGN REQUIRMENTS
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
b) Drawing Requirements
c) Additional Requirements
2 Design + Construction Phase .............................................. 2

a) Schematic Design Phase
b) Design Development Phase
c) Contract Document Phase
d) Construction Phase
e) Construction Close-out
3 Analysis of Design Alternative ............................................ 5

a) Engineering Analysis + Modelling
b) Green Building Measures
c) Value Engineering
4 Consultant Responsibilities .................................................. 7

a) FSHR Design Standards
b) Examination of Site
c) Quality Control
d) Coordination with Design Team
5 Additional Project Requirements ..................................... 8

a) Testing + Balancing
b) Commissioning
c) Operator Training
d) Warranties
e) Service Contracts
f) Serviceability of Equipment
g) Spare Parts + Tools
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) This section contains FSHR design requirements for the mechanical, electrical and plumbing
systems. It has been developed to provide the Consultant Team with the minimum requirements
to design building systems that are to support FSHRs ability to provide five star luxury quality
of service.
ii) The design requirements contained herein, although intended for the Engineer, affect the work
of the other members of the Consultant Team. These requirements are to be reviewed by other
Consultants and, where the requirements of mechanical, electrical or plumbing services affect
their work, they are to make suitable provisions to accommodate the Engineer. The Engineer is
to coordinate these requirements with other Consultants to ensure that the project is designed
consistent with this Standard.
iii) The Standard is not intended to restrict the imagination or creativity of the Engineer or Consultant
Team. It has been developed in allow FSHR to maintain consistency and superlative quality of
the engineering infrastructure of properties worldwide. This Section contains general design
requirements of engineered systems applicable to the other sections that follow.
b) Drawing Requirements
i) The Engineering Consultant is to provide coordinated drawings and specifications (contract
documents). The drawings are to be produced using AutoCAD (current version) and must be
submitted on a common drawing sheet size using international symbols. The specifications are
to be prepared and submitted in Microsoft Word format.
ii) The contract documents are to be coordinated with other disciplines as an integral part of the
design process. The Engineering Consultant is responsible for ensuring that contract documents
have been coordinated with other members of the Consultant Team.
iii) During the course of the design process, the Engineering Consultant are to prepare three (3)
submissions for review by the Architect, Ownership Team and FSHR. These review documents are
to include drawings, specifications, design narratives, engineering reports, and correspondence
from the Engineer recommending specific action based on the engineering analysis performed
by the Engineering Consultant.
c) Additional Requirements
i) During design and construction, the Engineering Consultants are to stay abreast of code changes
that may occur and would be required to be incorporated into the work. Any code or standard
changes that may impact the project is to be reported by the Engineering Consultant to FSHR
in writing.
ii) FSHR recognizes that some projects may be executed as Design-Build. Frequently the original
Engineering Consultant is contracted to perform the Design Development and issue schematics
and basic project specifications or design intent documents. In these instances, the Engineering
Consultant is to clearly indicate in the specifications that the FSHR Design Standards are to
form a part of the design and construction requirements. Where the Contractor has design
development responsibility they too is to be required to adhere to the design standard.
iii) In the event that the original Engineering Consultant is replaced during the design process,
the new Engineering Consultant is to be bound by design concepts already approved by
MEP 1 / 15
2007 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
FSHR. Similar scenarios can occur on projects constructed outside of North America where the
original design Consultants are replaced or supplemented by the use of a local design group.
Consultants of record are bound to the same design requirements and are to adhere to FSHR
Design Standards.
2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION PHASE
a) Schematic Design Phase

i) In the initial schematic design phase, the Engineering Consultant is to prepare a design brief
(narrative description of systems) documenting the intent of the engineered building systems
that are to be part of the building, facility and property. The narrative is to clearly indicate design
conditions, applicable codes and standards, and scope of systems, materials and equipment
that are to be part of the project. The design brief is to demonstrate the Engineering Consultants
familiarity with the FSHR Standard, and clearly indicate any design constraint which might
prevent the design from conforming to FSHR standards.
ii) The Engineering Consultant is to submit the design brief to FSHR for review and comment prior
to the start of the Design Development phase. The mechanical and plumbing design documents
are to incorporate process flow diagrams for major systems, including HVAC, plumbing and
fire protection. The electrical design documents are to include single line drawings of electrical
systems. The Engineering Consultants are to submit the following for review:
Design brief (narrative description of systems) identifying components of the HVAC,
Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Systems intended to be incorporated into
the building services design. Alternative design approaches are to be proposed in the
schematic design;
Proposed schematic design block diagrams studies showing proposed locations of
equipment and space allocations;
Completed FSHR design standard questionnaire;
Analysis of a cost estimate of the engineering work, prepared by the Owners cost
consultant.
b) Design Development Phase

i) Once the design narrative and design checklist are reviewed and approved by FSHR, the
Engineering Consultants are not to depart from the design brief without having changes reviewed
and approved by FSHR. The Engineering Consultant is to advise FSHR in writing of subsequent
changes to the project that would necessitate deviation from the approved design checklist
including the justification for the change along with the supporting documentation.
ii) The documents of the design development phase are to establish the size, type and scope of
the engineered systems. For this purpose, the following are to be submitted for review:
Major mechanical and electrical room layouts showing equipment location, access and
required clearances.
Floor plans indicating single line air distribution ductwork and main piping distribution
including shaft locations and grille register and diffuser locations . Include major system
MEP 2 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
schematic diagrams for air, water and steam distribution systems.
Floor plans identifying locations of electrical equipment and devices. Include detailed
single line risers of electrical systems.
Design of typical guestroom layout indicating terminal air conditioning unit location, grille
register and diffuser locations, thermostat, (primary air source), fixtures, piping and riser
shaft locations, electrical device locations (switches, pre-conditioned outdoor air supply
location(s) receptacles, outlets) and luminaire locations.
A brochure with manufacturers cuts for plumbing fixtures and trim.
Outline specification for equipment and materials.
Analysis of a revised cost estimate of the engineering work, prepared by the Owners cost
consultant.
Prior to the completion of the Design Development Phase, the Engineering Consultant
is to complete the FSHR Systems Design Checklist and submit to FSHR for review.
The purpose of this checklist is to provide FSHR with written confirmation that the
requirements of the design standards are understood and is to be implemented on the
project. The questionnaire also provides the basis for discussion for preliminary meetings
between FSHR and the Engineering Consultant at the start of the design phase. This
communication and enhanced review is expected to result in fewer changes and revisions
to the final construction documents.
c) Contract Document Phase

i) The contract documents are to be produced to identify the specifics of the mechanical, electrical,
plumbing and fire protection systems design in detail.
ii) During the contract document (CD) phase of the design process, FSHR reserves the right to
update the design requirements and to advise the consultant of these revised requirements.
FSHR will seek to minimize changes that might result but, given the extended period of time that
may elapse between schematic design and bidding, FSHR may elect to request changes that
may significantly impact the quality of service or guest experience.
iii) Prior to the completion of the design phase, the Engineering Consultants are to issue to the
Ownership Team a list of operating permits and licenses required for the mechanical, HVAC,
electrical, plumbing, fire protection and telecommunication systems for coordination with
FSHR.
iv) At least 60 days prior to issuing the contract documents for tender, the Engineering Consultants
are to issue a complete set of specifications and drawings for FSHR review.
v) The following deliverables are required (as a minimum).
Detailed drawings, plans and specifications of engineered systems (including materials,
methods, control, and intended modes of operation) in sufficient detail to allow a contractor,
familiar with luxury hotel construction practices, to prepare an estimate of construction
cost. Floor plans are to be drawn to a minimum scale of 1/8 = 1-0 (1:100) and equipment
room spaces to a minimum scale of = 1-0 (1:50).
A revised cost estimate of the engineering work prepared by the Owners cost consultant
Calculations and documentation of engineered work required to substantiate permitting
requirements for local authorities having jurisdiction.
MEP 3 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
d) Construction Phase
i) Throughout the construction phase, responsibility for adhering to the design brief intent and
specifications remains with the Engineering Consultant. FSHR will assist the Consultant wherever
possible in reviewing and issuing written comments on the Contractors execution of the Work.
During the construction phase, the Engineering Consultant is to carefully review shop drawings
and submittals issued for approval by the Contractor. The Engineering Consultant is not to
approve substitution of products or materials that are used by or in view of the guest unless
specifically approved in writing by FSHR. The Engineering Consultant may forward proposed
substitutions of acceptable products and manufacturers to FSHR for review provided that the
proposed products are equal to or exceed those specified and there is technical merit for the
proposed substitutions if accepted by FSHR.
ii) The Consultant is to diligently monitor the execution of the work and provide regular written
reports on the progress of construction in the form of written instruction, non-conformance
reports, punch lists etc. issued by the Consultant to either the Project Manager or the Contractor.
These written reports are to be copied and issued by the Consultant to FSHR.
iii) The Consultant is to keep an up to date record of all non-conformance reports (NCR). A written
summary of all NCRs or punch lists is to be issued monthly by the Consultant to FSHR. The
Consultant is to diligently require that non-conforming work be rectified by issuing appropriate
written notice to the Project Manager, Contractor and FSHR. The Consultant must not wait for a
Request for Inspection to issue comments and NCRs. The respective MEP Consultant is not
to allow work to progress beyond the point where the correction of deficient or non-conforming
work will have a significant time or cost impact to the project.
iv) The Engineering Consultant is to confirm with FSHR which submittals are to be sent to FSHR for
comment and approval. Generally equipment systems or devices that are in view of the guest or
will significantly impact hotel operations are to be reviewed and approved by FSHR.
v) During the construction phase the Consultant is to ensure and monitor that the Contractor
properly operates and maintains systems in a safe manner that conforms to the manufacturers
requirements, industry norms and requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.
vi) During the construction phase, the Consultant is to coordinate the requirements for permits,
licenses and approvals of systems with the Project Manager, the Owners, the Contractor, FSHR
and the authorities having jurisdiction. Permit licenses and approvals are be in place at the time
of practical completion. Permit required for occupancy by FSHR are to be in place prior to FSHR
occupancy of the property for pre-opening activities.
e) Construction Close-out
i) The Consultant is to incorporate into the on-going and final punch list and comments from FSHR
on non-conforming or deficient work.
ii) The Consultant is to consult with FSHR prior to accepting any work in guestrooms or public
areas as complete. FSHR will actively participate in the acceptance process.
iii) The Consultant is not to accept any work until commissioning is complete and specific systems
have been reviewed, tested and commissioned by the independent testing agency as specified
elsewhere in the Standards.
iv) The Consultant is to coordinate with the interior designer acceptance of the location and
installation of guestroom and public area devices and fixtures.
v) Once pre-opening occupancy of the property occurs, the Contractor is to be required to provide an
on-site engineer to operate the property infrastructure until such as time the system is complete
MEP 4 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
and accepted by FSHR. The operating engineer is to be on site 24-hours once occupancy of the
building occurs. Include for these conditions in the project specifications.
vi) The Consultant is to review and confirm the work of the independent testing agency Pumps are
to be tested to check the impeller trim and operating characteristics. The following data is to be
recorded and submitted to the Engineer for review:
vii) Flow at operating conditions where flow venturi or orifices are installed in the system.
viii) Shut off pressure required to check impeller trim.
ix) Discharge pressure at operating conditions.
x) Suction pressure at operating conditions.
xi) Motor amperage and voltage on each phase at operating conditions.
xii) Demonstrate operating controls and safety devices on domestic water pumping systems.
xiii) The Contractor is to prove the capacity and performance of each piece of equipment by field
tests as specified herein in various Sections. All equipment and instruments required for tests
as well as additional thermometer wells or gauge connections is to be installed at no additional
cost to the Owner. A qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer is to be present
at the test. These test requirements specifically include the water chilling units, cooling tower,
and pumps. The Engineer may witness tests, if he so desires. The Contractor is to notify the
Engineer, in writing, at least two (2) weeks prior to the day of the test.
3 ANALYSIS OF DESIGN ALTERNATIVE
a) Engineering Analysis and Modelling

i) At various stages in the design process, alternative approaches may be identified to augment,
replace or simplify a particular building component or system. When these alternatives are
identified and FSHR directs, the Engineering Consultant is to perform an analysis of the cost
and impact on the project of the application of the design alternative.
ii) Computer modelling is to be used to establish building load profiles and to assist in modelling
system performance for evaluating the merits of alternative systems.
iii) Alternative systems are to be reviewed, life-cycle cost analysis performed and the Consultant is
to make written recommendation to Ownership and FSHR.
iv) Green Building Measures: In an effort to reduce operating cost, reduce energy use and conserve
water, green building measures are to be implemented where engineering analysis supports the
business case for implementation.
b) Green Building Measures

Typically green building measures or alternate design concepts that may be considered are:
i) Refrigeration plant: electrical driven compressors in lieu of absorption - steam operated or direct
fired;
ii) Heating plant: high pressure boilers in lieu of low pressure boilers;
iii) Guestroom air-conditioning systems: 4-pipe fan coil in lieu of 2-pipe with electric heat;
iv) Energy source: district heating (or cooling), electricity, natural gas, fuel oil;
MEP 5 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
v) Utility rate (based on distribution voltage, transformer ownership, etc.) available for the project.
vi) Water supply and drainage systems, materials and installation labour costs;
vii) Fire and smoke protection systems: North American code requirements in lieu of minimum
requirements of local authority having jurisdiction (often mandated by insurance underwriter
requirement);
viii) Selection of window glass characteristics and window glass areas to minimize impact on heating
and cooling loads;
ix) Locations for mechanical equipment rooms;
x) Steam distribution pressure (high in lieu of low-pressure);
xi) Application of solar energy;
xii) Installation of additional plant provisions to permit free cooling using condenser water (water-
side) in lieu of using refrigeration plant cooling;
xiii) Sizing of outdoor air ductwork and exterior louvres to permit the use of outside air (air-side) for
free cooling in lieu of using refrigeration plant cooling;
xiv) Preheating boiler feed water by using economizer in boiler breaching;
xv) Enthalpy control of air handling systems;
xvi) Air-to-air heat recovery units, e.g.: guestroom/laundry/kitchen exhaust air heat recovery;
xvii) Pre-engineered kitchen make up air system;
xviii) Use of energy efficient motors;
xix) Demand reset of discharge air temperature in air handling units with multiple reheat zones;
xx) Chiller optimization (chilled water reset and condenser water reset);
xxi) Energy Management System (EMS);
xxii) Power factor correction capacitors, if power factor is lower than 0.9;
xxiii) Installation of Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) on chillers, cooling towers, large air handling
units and exhaust fans;
xxiv) Cogeneration, either partially or 100%, use reclaimed heat for heating purposes if required,
domestic hot water, laundry hot water, pool heating etc.
xxv) Use of the last rinse cycle water for first wash cycle;
xxvi) Reclaimed water for irrigation from sewage treatment plant for irrigation;
xxvii) Micro switches on balcony doors to switch off the fan coil in the guestrooms in hot humid
climates;
xxviii) Reclaim condenser heat for centrifugal chillers and reciprocating chillers for preheating of
domestic hot water or heating hot water;
xxix) Use of fluorescent luminaire electronic ballasts;
xxx) Use of energy saving lamps, ie. T-8 or T-12 fluorescent lamps;
xxxi) Use of motion detectors in back of house storage rooms or other back of house storage rooms
or other back of house areas with intermittent use;
xxxii) Use of occupancy sensors to turn off lighting in rooms that are not occupied regularly;
xxxiii) Use of LED type exit signs.
MEP 6 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
c) Value Engineering
i) FSHR is supportive of a Value Engineering (VE) when the process weighs the initial cost savings
with the long-term implications of the decision. FSHR will actively participate in the VE process
where each item considered is presented with a properly completed value engineering analysis.
(FSHR does not support a VE process where decision making is limited to approval or rejection
of shopping list of single line narrative descriptions of VE measures).
ii) Value engineering analysis is a process of evaluating a design or construction alternative that
offers a more cost-effective method of obtaining the same result. In evaluating an alternative
suggested by the value engineering process, the Consultant team, together with the Owner and
FSHR, make an informed technical decision based on cost and risk.
iii) The acceptance of VE measures is normally the result of the cooperative effort of both
Consultant and Construction Teams. The Construction Team (the proponent of the VE measure)
is responsible for characterizing the particulars of the change and identifying the savings
offered by the measures acceptance. The Consultant Team is responsible for assessing the
risk associated with accepting a the measure, including the potential for harmful effects on
the quality, comfort, and safety of the guest experience and/or detrimental effect on the labor,
material and energy costs required to operate the facility.
iv) The Engineering Consultant may be asked to provide a detailed value engineering analysis of
certain measures (and to evaluate proposed measures using a 5, 10 and 20 year time line).
The Engineering Consultant is to make recommendations to Ownership and FSHR about the
acceptance of certain measures based on an analysis of supporting materials provided by the
proponent of the measure. By following such a process, value engineering can bring significant
benefit to the project design rather than being strictly a cost cutting mechanism that leads to
uninformed decisions with long term operating cost implications and a compromised guest
experience.
4 CONSULTANT RESPONSIBILITIES
a) FSHR Design Standards

i) The Engineer is to be familiar with the requirements of this Standard and to investigate
applicable codes and standards and the prescriptions, amendments and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction. The Engineer is to incorporate the most stringent requirement in
the design.
b) Examination of Site
i) Consultant is to carefully examine the site conditions that may affect their Work. The Consultant
is to be familiar with the local conditions, project phasing and sequencing, and the requirements
of construction technologies that are the work of other consultants that may affect the design
and installation of mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire protection systems.
c) Quality Control
i) Consultants are to introduce quality control measures into the design and document production
process to meet the requirements of the Standards.
ii) The quality control procedures are to be followed through the project and be maintained through
the provisions of adequate resources and assignment of trained senior personnel to verify and
MEP 7 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
regularly evaluate the design procedures and development of the project concepts translation
onto design documents and execution in construction.
d) Coordination with Design Team

i) It is mandatory that a proper coordination of engineering service, their integration into the building,
their routing and impact on other services be considered and coordinated during design. The
Engineering Consultant must describe, as part of the design brief, how the coordination effort is
to be conducted.
ii) The location of horizontal conduits, raceways, pipes and ducts above or at the ceiling of the
floors they are serving are arranged such that the maximum ceiling height is maintained. In
areas where such work is exposed the exposed work is to be neatly grouped.
iii) The Consultants is to identify the proper sequencing of the work for the Contractor.
iv) On-budget and on-schedule delivery of the project is dependant on the successful coordination
of the mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire protection services with the work of other
consultants. It is imperative that the engineering consultant conduct coordination meetings with
other (architect, interior designer, structural and civil engineering consultants).
v) The coordination of engineering services with the other consultants on the project is mandatory,
and must be completed before conclusion of the design phase.
5 ADDITIONAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
a) Testing and Balancing

i) Air-side and water-side mechanical systems are to be fully tested, calibrated and balanced by
an independent testing and balancing agency.
ii) The electrical distribution system and fire alarm system is to be fully tested and verified by an
independent testing and verification company.
iii) As a minimum, systems and equipment are to be tested and verified to be in proper working
order by the installing contractors and manufacturers of the equipment, prior to being turned
over to Ownership and FSHR.
b) Commissioning
i) The commissioning work is to achieve, verify and document the performance of building systems
in order to meet the design intent and FSHR Design Standard and operational requirements of
the building. This process is to assure FSHR that procedures for the design, start up, testing,
verification and balancing of the systems have been implemented. This is to also include training
of FSHR personnel to enable them to operate and maintain the systems.
ii) The Testing and Commissioning is to be carried out by the MEP Subcontractor (SC) and an
Independent Commissioning Agency (ICA).
iii) Testing and Commissioning is not to begin until installation systems have been completed.
iv) Scope of Work: The Testing and Commissioning is to be carried out by the Mechanical,
Electrical, Plumbing and Fire Protection Subcontractor (SC), their vendors, and an Independent
Commissioning Agency (ICA). This work is specified by the Engineering Consultant (EC).
MEP 8 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX for
SC Vendor ICA EC
COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Testing and Inspections during construction SC
Pipe tests and inspections SC
Duct leakage tests SC
Provide technical documents for the systems to ICA
Preparatory Meeting for Testing and Commissioning SC ICA
Submit Method SC ICA
Testing and Inspections during construction SC
Duct leakage tests SC
Provide technical documents for the systems to ICA SC ICA
Submit Method Statement for Testing and Commissioning SC ICA
Check completeness of installation against specification and drawings ICA EC
Provide testing and commissioning equipment ICA
Equipment Operation:
Initial Start-Ups
Fans SC
AHU SC
FCU SC
Chillers SC Vendor
Cooling Tower SC Vendor
Circulation Pumps SC Vendor
Full load capacity test
Check equipment operation and set operational values SC Vendor
Witness and verify ICA
Air Balance:
Balance and set split dampers, volume control dampers SC ICA
Water Balance:
Flushing, chemical cleaning SC
Test water quality for chilled and condenser water SC ICA
Final water balance and set balancing values SC ICA
BMS and Temperature Control Systems:
Megger testing of cables SC
Dry checks for equipment connections SC
Test equipment with automatic operation and set value SC
Final Testing and Commission of the HVAC Systems:
Witness eight (8) hours operational test SC ICA
Witness sequence of pertains in case of fire SC ICA
Submit Testing and Commissioning report SC ICA
Plumbing Systems
Testing and Inspections during Construction:
Pipe hydraulic tests and inspections SC
Provide technical documents for the systems to ICA SC
MEP 9 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
SC Vendor ICA EC
Check completeness of installation against specification and drawings ICA EC
Equipment Operation:
Initial Start-ups:
Water Heaters SC Vendor
Full load capacity test for ltg
Hot Water Circulation Pumps SC Vendor
Cold Water Pumps SC Vendor
Drainage Pumps SC Vendor
Check equipment operation and set operational value SC Vendor
Witness and Verify ICA
Plumbing Water Balance:
Flushing of piping SC
Final water balances and pressure checking SC ICA
BMS System:
Dry checks for equipment connections SC
Check equipment operation and set operational values SC ICA
Final Testing and Commissioning:
Witness eight (8) hour operational test SC ICA
Submit Testing and Commissioning Report ICA
Fire Sprinkler and Standpipe Fighting
Testing and Inspections during Construction: SC
Preparatory Meeting for Testing and Commissioning ICA
Check completeness of installation against specification and drawings SC ICA EC
Final Testing and Commissioning: ICA
Commission Fire Fighting stations SC ICA
Commission Sprinkler Systems SC ICA
Witness Sequence of Operations SC ICA
Systems including Fire Pump ICA
Building Management (BMS) and Metering Systems
Testing and inspection during Construction: SC
Control panels inspections SC
MEP 10 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
SC Vendor ICA EC
Check Completeness of installation against and drawings SC EC
Final Testing and Commissioning:
Final inspection of DDC controls, measuring SC ICA
Devices, equipment wiring connections, MCC panels ICA
Check the BMS and metering software SC ICA
Set final operation test values SC ICA
Witness eight (8) hour operational test SC ICA
c) Operator Training
i) A written description of the method of operation of the mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire
protection systems, (with special attention being given to HVAC instrumentation and controls,
Building Management System operation, and intended sequences of operation for major plant
components), is to be prepared, for the education of and for use by FSHR Engineering staff.
ii) Educational seminars are be provided for the Hotel Engineering Staff and the Hotel Information
Technology and Telecommunications staff by the appropriate contractors and their system
manufacturer, distributor or supplier. These seminars are to be conducted on property before
substantial completion of the mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire protection systems. Major
subcontractors and manufacturers, distributors and suppliers are to attend to explain the method
of operation and required maintenance of all aspects of the installation. The seminars for each
system are to be not less than eight (8) hours in duration.
iii) The Engineering Consultants are to visit the property six months after completion and prepare
an assessment and a report of the quality of operation and maintenance being carried out by
the FSHR Engineering staff.
iv) Additional specific requirements for seminars and training are described in individual sections
of the Standard.
v) Provide three (3) set of operating and maintenance manuals for each system and major piece
of equipment. Provide at least one (1) set of operating and maintenance manuals in electronic
form.
d) Warranties
i) Refer to General Requirements Warranties and Service Contracts as individual sections for
additional warranty requirements of specific equipment and systems.
ii) The Contractor is to submit, in the name of the Owner, a written warranty for a period of one (1)
year from date of issue of a Certificate of Substantial Performance of the work.
iii) The warranty is to include for repair and/or replacement of any defects that appear in the
mechanical and electrical work at no additional expense to the Owner. Furthermore, the warranty
is to cover costs incurred in making the defective work good, including repair or replacement of
building finishes, other materials, or damage to other equipment caused by such defects, or by
subsequent replacement and repairs.
iv) Major pieces of equipment are to be provided with full parts and labour warranties greater
than one year, with the number of years to be dependent on the geographical location of the
MEP 11 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
property.
v) The equipment for which warranties are to be reviewed with the FSHR includes:
air handling units
air compressors
boilers
chillers
cooling towers
condensing units
pumps
motors
fans
diesel generator sets and accessories
network cabling system
fluorescent luminaire electronic ballasts
main power transformers
power factory correction equipment
e) Service Contracts
i) The mechanical and electrical contractors are to include in the bid price service contracts covering
the refrigeration plant, including chillers, chilled water and condenser pumps and cooling tower,
the automatic temperature control system and the water treatment system. Service contracts
are to be on a year round basis and include parts and labour.
ii) Refer to General Requirements Warranties and Service Contracts for specific service contracts
as well as the individual Sections for any additional requirements for service contracts.
iii) Contracts are to be based on an anticipated availability of service personnel on a 24 hour 7 day
per week basis.
f) Serviceability of Equipment
i) All equipment is to be located with adequate space for service, as recommended by the
equipment supplier and per applicable code requirements. Equipment maintenance and service
clearances are to be respected to allow for withdrawing boiler tubes, air handling unit coils, air
circuit breakers, etc.
ii) Provide adequate permanent lighting, duplex outlets for service, etc.
iii) Equipment to include pipework layouts, valves, drains, unions, flanges, etc. to permit replacement
and servicing without disturbing other equipment or systems.
iv) Pipework systems is to be valved to permit repairs without closing down entire systems. Risers
is to be valved to permit each riser to be repaired individually and valves are to be located so
that access is not required through a public area e.g. guestroom corridor.
MEP 12 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
g) Spare Parts and Tools
The following spare parts and tools are to be provided under the general contract (from the appropriate
sub-contractors):
i) Pumps
A one year supply of manufacturers recommended parts, including:
a repair kit for each type of pump installed.
for each three pumps of the same size a spare impeller assembly.
a set of bearings for each pump.
a coupling rubber for each pump.
a mechanical seal for each pump or packing material if a mechanical seal is not used.
ii) Electric Motors
A set of bearings for each motor.
iii) Motor Starters
A contractor for every five starters of the same type or a contractor for each individual
starter, the same for relays fuses and heaters.
iv) Boilers
A one year supply of manufacturers recommended parts.
A complete set of spare heating elements for each boiler.
For gas fired boilers, a repair kit for every burner.
A repair kit for every safety device.
5% repair kits for all steam traps installed.
v) Chillers
One year supply of manufacturers recommended parts.
A full supply of refrigerant for each chiller.
A one-year supply of manufacturers recommended parts for each starter panel.
vi) Refrigeration
One spare compressor for every five compressors of the same type and size.
One spare refrigeration control for every five compressor of the same type.
Five spare 30 lbs canisters of coolant for each type in use.
One fan motor for evaporator for every five motors in use of the same type.
One DX valve for every five valves in use of the same type and size.
A repair kit for every type and size of compressor.
A refrigerant dryer of every type.
One side glass of every type.
MEP 13 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
vii) Sewer Treatment Plant
A spare pump for every three pumps of the same size.
A repair kit for every pump and compressor.
A one-year supply of manufacturer recommended spare parts.
viii) V Belts
Five spare V belts of all types used.
ix) Laundry and Valet
A one year supply of manufacturer recommended spare parts for each piece of laundry
and valet equipment, including steam boiler or oil heater and compressor.
x) Guestrooms
1% spare of electrical outlets, light switches and ceiling fans.
2% spare of hand wash basins, toilet seats, soap dishes, shower enclosure, faucets,
shower mixing valves, shower heads, etc.
1% spare (minimum quantity 12) of each type of fan coil and thermostat.
xi) Public Areas
2% spare of urinals, toilets and seats.
xii) Back of House Area

2% spare of urinals, toilets and seats.
xiii) Luminaires
Supply one spare luminaire for every 50 installed, but not less than three of each type.
Supply one spare ballast for every 50 installed, but not less than three of each type.
Supply one spare transformer for every 50 installed, but no less than three of each type.
Supply one spare bulb of each type for every 25 installed, but no less than 30 of each
type.
Supply spare diffusers, lenses, globes and reflectors for each type of luminaire, of quantity
of 10 of each type.
xiv) Receptacle and Switches
1% supply of each type.
xv) Diesel Generator Set
A one-year supply of manufacturer recommended spare parts for the diesel engine and
generator.
A one-year supply of oil and air filters.
A one-year supply of lubrication oil.
A one-year supply of manufacturer recommended spare parts for the control panel
including indicating lamps, switches, etc.
MEP 14 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS A
xvi) Major Equipment
Standard spare parts and tools as per manufacturers recommendations.
xvii) Metering
Provide meters (electrical, BTU, water, gas) for areas such as tenant, residential, etc.
Metering system is to be in accordance with requirements of local utility providing metering
requirements.
MEP 15 / 15
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
B MECHANICAL DESIGN CRITERIA
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
b) Applicable Codes + Standards
2 Design Criteria ................................................................................. 1

a) Outdoor Design Criteria
b) Interior Design Conditions
c) Humid Climate Design
d) Dry Climate Design
e) Building Pressurization
3 Mechanical Systems .................................................................... 5

a) General Guidelines
b) Guestroom HVAC Systems
c) Building HVAC Systems
d) Mechanical Plant Selection
e) Special HVAC Requirements
f) Duct + Piping Sizing
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS B
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) All areas within the hotel, (with the possible exception of specific mechanical rooms and storage
rooms) are to be air conditioned year round.
ii) In the development of plans and specifications, the Engineering Consultant is reminded
that Contractors and construction personnel at the project job site may not be familiar with
procedures, equipment and plan interpretation for installation of systems typically required in a
modern building and specifically a luxury hotel. Sufficient detail is to be included in the drawings
and specifications to compensate for this lack of familiarity on the part of job personnel.
iii) The Engineering Consultant is to provide FSHR with equipment schedule sheets (which, along
with other equipment data, contain the ampere load of each electric motor), and ductwork
drawings showing the specified air quantities for each supply and return register.
b) Applicable Codes and Standards

i) The design engineer is to review this standard, local codes and requirements of local authority
having jurisdiction and to incorporate in the design the most stringent criteria.
ii) The mechanical systems are to be designed in accordance with the latest editions of the following
codes and standards:
ASHRAE Handbooks
ASHRAE Standard 62, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Energy Code for Building Except Low Rise Residential
Buildings
ASHRAE Standard 55, Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy
NFPA Fire Codes
SMACNA Technical Manuals for Duct Construction
SMACNA/ASHRAE Seismic Restraint Guidelines for Mechanical Systems
International, Uniform, Standard or applicable Building Codes
Applicable local codes and supplemental requirements of authorities and utility providers
2 DESIGN CRITERIA
a) Outdoor Design Criteria

i) FSHR properties are to be provided with year round cooling and both summer cooling and
winter heating, unless local climate conditions dictate otherwise and FSHR approves.
ii) The outdoor air design dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures for summer and winter are to meet
or exceed the greater of the ASHRAE fundamentals handbook or representative local climatic
data.
iii) A careful analysis of outdoor summer and winter design temperatures is to be made based on
available climatological data, published by Engineering Societies and leading manufacturers
MEP 1/9
2007 MECHANICAL DESIGN CRITERIA
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS B
of air conditioning equipment. Indoor minimum ventilation requirements are to be based on
ASHRAE 62 (latest edition). ASHRAE 55 (latest edition) is to be consulted to ensure that human
comfort level is maintained. Under no circumstances is the indoor summer condition to exceed
75F dry bulb and indoor winter conditions drop below 68F dry bulb. Depending on outdoor
design conditions winter indoor temperature may be elevated to 75F. Relative Humidity is to
be kept at 50% in summer and is not to drop below 30% in winter. In cold climates care is to be
taken to avoid condensation on windows.
b) Interior Design Conditions

i) The interior design temperatures, humidity and noise criteria figures are specified in Table 1.
ii) Where both heating and cooling is required, it is to be provided in every room to ensure the
internal design temperatures stated are maintained. This includes but is not limited to suites,
corridors, public spaces, back of house, laundry, kitchen, etc. Where either heating or cooling is
required, it is to be provided throughout the hotel in every room as required.
iii) The occupancy rates used to establish minimum acceptable indoor air quality are to be based
on ASHRAE 62 (latest edition). Furniture layouts are not be used to establish occupancy.
iv) In properties with large open public spaces, ceiling fans are to be installed in lobbies, circulation
spaces, food and beverage areas.
COOLING SEASON HEATING SEASON

TABLE 1 HEATING, NOISE
VENTILATING AND AIR Maximum Relative Minimum Relative CRITERIA
CONDITIONING DESIGN Temperature Humidity Temperature Humidity
CRITERIA
F 2F C 1C %RH 5% F 2F C 1C %RH 5% DB
GUESTROOM FLOORS
Guestroom, Guest Suite 75 24.0 50 72 21.0 35 30/35
Guest Bathrooms 75 24.0 - 75 24.0 35 30/35
Corridor 76 24.5 50 70 21.0 35 35
Club Lounge 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 35 35
Linen Storage 75 24.0 50 68 20.0 35 40
Service Area 78 25.5 55 68 20.0 30 40
Ice Machine Room 78 25.5 55 68 20.0 30 40
Mini-bar Storage 75 24.0 50 65 18.5 35 40
PUBLIC AREAS
Main Entry Foyer 76 24.5 - 65 18.5 - 45
Circulation Spaces 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 30 35
Main Lobby 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 35 35
Reception Lobby 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 35 30
Library/Livingroom 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 35 30
Safety Deposit Room 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 30 30
Telephone/ATM cubicles 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 30 30
Public Toilets 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 30 35
Restaurants 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 35 35
MEP 2/9
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS B
CRITERIA
F 2F C 1C %RH 5% F 2F C 1C %RH 5% DB
Private Dining 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 35 30
Bars and Lounges 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 35 35
Coat Storage 76 24.5 50 72 22.0 30 40
Retail Shops 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 30 35
Ballrooms/Banquet Rooms 72 22.0 50 72 22.0 35 30
Pre-Function 72 22.0 50 72 22.0 35 30
Meeting Rooms 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 35 30
Business Centre 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 30 35
SPA FITNESS/GOLF CLUBHOUSE
Reception 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 30 35
Circulation 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 35 30
Juice Bar 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 30 35
Lounge 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 30 35
Changing Rooms 78 25.5 50 72 22.0 - 35
Toilets/Showers 76 24.5 60 72 22.0 35 40
Sauna/Steam Rest Area 75 24.0 50 74 23.0 - 35
Relaxation Lounge 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 35 30
Treatment Rooms 75 24.0 50 70 21.0 35 30
Exercise Room 76 24.5 50 70 21.0 - 45
Aerobics Studio 76 24.5 50 70 21.0 30 35
Indoor Pool 80 26.5 50 80 26.5 - 45
Public Elevator Shafts 78 25.5 55 68 20.0 30 40
BACK OF HOUSE
Luggage Storage 78 25.5 60 68 20.0 30 45
Offices 75 24.0 50 70 21.0 30 30
Computer Room 72 22.0 50 70 21.0 35 35-40
Telephone Equip. Room 78 25.5 50 78 25.5 - 40
Radio & TV Equipment 75 24.0 - 70 21.0 - 40
Office Store Rooms 76 24.5 50 70 21.0 30 40
Kitchen/Pantries 78 25.5 60 65 18.5 - 45
Garde Manager 68 20.0 - 65 18.5 - 45
Bakery/Finishing 68 20.0 - 80 26.5 - 45
Chocolate Shop 65 18.5 50 65 18.5 30 40
Butcher Shop 65 18.5 - 65 18.5 - -
Beverage Store 65 18.5 - 65 18.5 - -
MEP 3/9
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS B
CRITERIA
F 2F C 1C %RH 5% F 2F C 1C %RH 5% DB
Dry Goods Stores 78 25.5 50 65 18.5 30 45
Wine (red) Stores 57 14.0 75 53 11.5 70 -
Beverage Stores 68 20.0 - 65 18.5 - -
General & Bulk Stores 78 25.5 - 65 18.5 - -
Loading Dock 80 26.5 60 65 18.5 30 45
Garbage Holding 55 12.5 60 55 12.5 30 45
Laundry 78 25.5 - 65 18.5 - 45
Valet 78 25.5 - 65 18.5 - 45
Housekeeping 78 25.5 50 70 21.0 30 40
Flower Work Room 70 21.0 55 65 18.5 30 40
Employee Locker & Shower Area 76 24.5 - 70 21.0 - 40
Employee Dining 76 24.5 50 70 21.0 30 35
Maintenance Workshops 76 24.5 - 65 18.5 - 40
Engineer Control Room 75 24.0 50 72 22.0 30 35
Circulation Corridor 76 24.5 50 70 21.0 30 40
General Storerooms 78 25.5 55 65 18.5 30 45
Mechanical Plant 86 30.0 - 65 18.5 - -
Equipment Rooms 86 30.0 - 65 18.5 - -
Elevator Machine Room 86 30.0 - 65 18.5 - 45-50
Exit Stairs 80 26.5 55 55 12.5 - -
Notes:
1. Values are for fan coil unit running on low (NC30) and medium (NC35) speeds.
2. Note special requirements for red wine storage, beverage storage, chocolate room and butcher shop.
c) Humid Climate Design

i) Mechanical systems are to be designed to control humidity levels. If not carefully designed the
following problems can occur:
Mold, mildew and fungi on wallboard, behind wall coverings and on other building
surfaces;
Peeling, blistering, flaking, and bleeding of paint from exterior and interior surfaces;
Weakened and collapsed suspended ceilings, rusted metal, and other property damage
from interior condensation;
Insulating losses due to water absorption;
Odor problems.
d) Dry Climate Design

i) Mechanical systems are to be designed to control indoor humidity levels and design
temperatures.
MEP 4/9
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS B
ii) Particular attention is to be given to the inclusion of integrated humidification systems, to ensure
appropriate humidification during extreme dry periods, such as high altitude ski resorts during
winter.
e) Building Pressurization
i) Maintain conditioned space under positive pressure with respect to the outdoors.
ii) Ensure that there is no air infiltration through exterior wall cavities as a result of unexpected local
pressure differentials created by exhaust fans, incomplete building envelope or other failure of
building or facility integrity.
iii) Makeup air for toilet room and other exhaust systems is to be continuously conditioned outdoor
air, and is not to be provided by unconditioned outdoor air infiltrating building envelope or natural
ventilation.
iv) Grilles or louvres are to be located so as to mechanically ventilate occupied space.
v) When located in unconditioned spaces, insulate and install a vapor barrier on small branch
piping, duct work, and other potentially cold surfaces that may come in contact with warm moist
air.
3 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
a) General Guidelines
i) The 99.6% design in the ASHRAE fundamentals handbook or local weather data (the most
stringent) applies for the winter outdoor design dry bulb temperature.
ii) Design to ASHRAE Standard 55 conform to criteria of RH no higher than 60%.
iii) In dry climates, humidification is to be provided to ensure relative humidity is maintained within
acceptable levels.
iv) Count exterior water vapor migration into interior as part of latent cooling load, if it is
significant.
v) In cold climates, areas with exterior exposures are to be provided with heating. In areas
where pipework is located outdoors and has the potential of freezing, electric tracing is to be
provided.
vi) Whenever latent heat gain is substantial i.e. sensible heat factor is less than 0.65 compute
supply air volume from both latent and sensible heat gain, and use the larger.
vii) Overhead radiant heating outside main entrance doors is to be provided in cold climates. A
thermostat and a time clock with manual override is to control heaters.
viii) Determine minimum cooling loads to establish air conditioning systems ability to provide comfort
and humidity under these conditions.
ix) In climates with heavy snowfall electric snow melting is to be incorporated in the sidewalk.
x) Consider both latent heat gain and dehumidification performance of air conditioning system as
part of energy analysis computer program, if it appears to be significant.
xi) Provide for continuous dehumidification of outside air and supply through air conditioning
units.
xii) If supply air quantity is increased beyond that for cooling load, ensure that proper dehumidification
is provided.
MEP 5/9
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS B
xiii) During part load condition, provide proper dehumidification for all systems with 100% outside
air.
xiv) The cooling load for health club exercise rooms are to be calculated based on a fully occupied
room with users performing a vigorous workout, and all equipment in operation.
b) Guestroom HVAC Systems

i) When sizing guestroom HVAC units, the designer is to consider both sensible and latent cooling
loads. The designer is to also consider heat losses through the building structure, i.e. losses
through walls, roof, floor and glass infiltration through openable windows is to be accounted for.
This is to ensure that each hotel suite fan coil unit has sufficient heating capacity. Sensible cooling
loads include solar gain through window, heat conduction through construction materials, and
intrinsic heat gain from lights, appliances and people. Latent cooling loads are from activities
such as cooking, bathing and cleaning, air leaks, open doors, and water vapor. Air conditioners
generally have a sensible cooling output of 56% - 75% and a latent output of 25% - 35%.
ii) There are overlaps between indoor air temperature and humidity ranges for human comfort
and those for mold growth. Generally, 75F (23.8C) with 40% - 60% RH are recommended for
human comfort in the summer. However, it is often difficult to keep humidity levels below 60%
RH in the summer unless the HVAC system is carefully designed. Mold and mildew thrive when
temperatures are high and relative humidity is above 70%. Mold and mildew growth is greatly
retarded when space humidity is maintained below 62% RH.
iii) Proper sizing of the guestroom HVAC unit is crucial to dehumidification of the space, ensuring
comfort for the occupant of the space and avoiding mold and mildew problems. The fan coil
unit only removes water from the air and reduces humidity when in operation. If over-sized,
the air conditioning unit runs for only short duration, and what little water is removed from the
air is re-evaporates from the coil back into the space. If the air conditioning is shut-off during
unoccupied periods, moisture build up occurs in the guestroom and recovery to comfortable
conditions requires even longer long run times.
iv) For good moisture removal, the cooling coil temperature is to be well below the dew point
temperature of the guestroom air, which typically is 20-25F (11-14F) below the room air
temperature.
v) The guestroom fan coil is typically controlled by a three-position (on, off and three speed)
thermostat, which modulates a control valve and operates to satisfy the sensible cooling loads.
(during operation fan is not cycle.) The fan coil unit is to be sized at medium speed for daytime
operation and low speed for nighttime operation (high speed is to be provided for quick cool
down periods). In sizing the fan coil unit, caution is to be taken to avoid oversizing. If the fan coil
unit is oversized, the unit cycles frequently and proper dehumidification does not occur. During
start up, the sensible heat reduction is the greatest, but dehumidification is the least. Therefore,
unless properly sized, a fan coil unit can leave an excess latent load resulting in uncomfortably
high humidity or sufficient humidity to support mold growth.
vi) The amount of latent cooling load removed is dependent upon run time, the latent cooling
capacity, the evaporator air temperature and relative humidity. Therefore, a slightly undersized
fan coil unit runs more often and provides better space dehumidification. Although a slightly
undersized fan coil unit might not always be capable of lowering the air temperature to design
expectations, it usually keeps a guestroom comfortable by removing moisture and lowering
the relative humidity of the air. By removing moisture, it also reduces the opportunity for mold
growth.
MEP 6/9
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS B
vii) The chilled and hot water distribution system serving the guestroom fan coil units is to be
designed with a reverse return piping arrangement, providing equal pressure drop in the various
piping distribution loops, and minimizing the potential for noise problems at the automatic control
valve and simplifying the control of the heating and cooling water systems.
viii) Make-up air for bathroom exhaust is to be supplied within the guestroom.
c) Building HVAC Systems

i) The application of the air conditioning equipment is largely influenced by the temperature
and humidity control required and the heating/cooling load usage profiles. Where possible air
handling units are to be located relatively close to the areas they serve and not positioned over
public areas. Air handling units are to have adequate maintenance access for servicing.
ii) If an area has a relatively constant or uniform varying profile, it would most effectively be served
from a single zone unit. Such areas in a hotel would be: restaurant; ballroom; and pre-function.
iii) Areas where the heating/cooling loads vary independently and as a function of time and a
constant airflow is desired, a multi-zone system would effectively suit this application. Ideally the
multi-zone unit functions as many independent single zone units. Such areas in a hotel would
be: ballrooms; and pre-function.
iv) Areas, which have varying usage profile and require individual temperature, control, would best
be suited with a variable air volume system. Such areas in a hotel would be: lobby; offices;
meeting rooms; fitness centre; and staff areas (back-of-house).
v) The variable air volume system offers a number of advantageous features such as individual
room temperature control, economical, low first cost. It is therefore favourable to use a variable
volume system where possible.
vi) Coordinate architectural and mechanical design throughout the HVAC design process.
vii) Consider subdivision of tropical humid climates into island and inland, where less rigorous
precautions are required. Also, consider division of design into air-conditioned and not air
conditioned buildings.
viii) Air condition toilet rooms, corridors, stairways, and storage rooms, subject to the following
expectations:
Include cooling loads from toilet rooms, closets, and similar spaces among the cooling
loads for conditioned space.
Non air conditioned stairways, both interior and exterior, require free air circulation. Interior
stairways require, in addition, insulated, exterior-type walls separating the stairway from
conditioned spaces.
Provide air conditioning for storage rooms.
Toilet rooms in public spaces are to be air-conditioned in addition to being exhausted to
ensure that the temperature within the toilet areas is maintained.
Public washrooms are to include an exhaust grille for each full height toilet stall and waste
fixture.
In cold climates, toilet rooms and washrooms that are located on exterior walls are to be
provided with heating.
ix) Whenever practicable, locate air conditioning equipment indoors. Rooftop installation of air
handling equipment is to be avoided whenever possible.
MEP 7/9
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS B
x) Locate chilled-water piping in accessible locations to permit convenient, economical investigation
and replacement of insulation.
xi) Design mechanical room floors and equipment pads to drain condensate dripping from air
conditioning equipment and make provision for drain pan overflows.
xii) Provide adequate air driers for pneumatic control systems.
xiii) Select chillers with adequate capacity to provide the required chilled water temperature when
operating at outdoor design wet bulb conditions.
xiv) Install a ducted, all air HVAC system with reheat for hot humid climates.
xv) Provide spot air conditioning at the front desk, concierge desk, group registration and any area
where staff are working.
d) Mechanical Plant Selection

i) Year round solar effect and internal load variations are to be considered in the arrangement
of air conditioning systems. Subdivision of the air conditioning plant into various systems is to
be based on hours of occupancy for the conditioned areas, sensible heat ratios and control of
odors. Guest rooms are to be designed for individual room control.
ii) Do not specify fan-coil units to serve any public space with the exception of guestrooms and
suites. Fan-coil units, by themselves, can handle either temperature or humidity, but not both.
iii) Design a ducted, all-air HVAC system with reheat in humid climates. Provide increased floor-to-
floor height over normal limits when needed to accommodate ducts in ceiling space.
iv) Specify multiple refrigeration units (i.e. multiple compressors) for buildings with year-round
cooling loads. Require special care and attention of field installation of central HVAC systems.
They require more care during installation, but once operating can tolerate less maintenance
than single units. They are also far less vulnerable to equipment failure.
v) Design chiller plant with multiple chillers, so that the smallest chiller is not required to short cycle
or use hot-gas bypass during light load conditions.
vi) In buildings with high latent cooling loads or highly variable sensible cooling loads and/or long
hours of operation at light sensible cooling loads, provide reheat to maintain humidity control.
When reheat is required, it is often economical to use some form of heat recovery - i.e. reclamation
of condenser heat or heat exchangers.
vii) When the designer anticipates approximately 1,000 or more annual cooling hours at a cooling
load less than the minimum efficient capacity of the smallest chiller, provide a secondary or
auxiliary chiller for use during those light-load hours.
viii) When local climate conditions warrant, provide air side free cooling (economizer cycle).
ix) Design for lowest practicable chilled-water temperature difference, consistent with economical
piping and pumping cost.
x) Use coils with low sensible heat ratio, and/or multiple coils or circuits.
xi) Design chilled water piping systems with minimum hydraulic complexity and with balancing
capability. The chilled water piping systems is to be designed such that in the event that one
pump fails, the remaining pumps are to be capable of delivering the same quantity of chilled
water, as if one chiller had failed.
MEP 8/9
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS B
xii) Provide a bypass piping arrangement on the winterized cooling tower (if applicable) to permit
continued operation during the winter.
xiii) In climates where the (outdoor) temperature is below freezing and cooling tower is used, a pan
heater is to be provided to avoid freezing.
e) Special HVAC Requirements

i) Kitchen cooling system: Refrigerators, freezers and cold rooms are to have an independent
cooling system, with provisions in place to ensure that when facility power is lost, the heat
rejection (condenser water circuit circulating pumps and cooling towers) portion of the refrigeration
system is also on emergency power.
ii) Garage Ventilation: If the parking area is situated below grade mechanical ventilation is to be
provided. The exhaust fans are to be controlled by CO/NOx detectors or continuously used
depending on local regulations.
iii) Indoor Swimming Pool: Provide dedicated air handling equipment with based on careful analysis
of the dehumidification requirements. Underestimation can result in undersized equipment,
excessive humidity levels, guest discomfort, moisture damage to finishes and mold growth.
Overestimation can result in the selection of oversized equipment that will be susceptible to
failure because of excessive cycling.
f) Duct and Piping Sizing

i) Ductwork sizing: Size all medium and low pressure ductwork for airspeeds not exceeding 1400
ft/min at 0.08/100 ft.
ii) Chilled water and heating piping is to be sized based upon a pressure drop of 3-1/2 ft. of
water/100 ft. (0.34 kPa of water/m) of piping and a maximum fluid velocity of 7 fps (2.1 m/s).
iii) The minimum pipe size for heating and cooling piping is to be 3/4-in (19 mm). The minimum pipe
size for heating when down-feeding is to be 1-in (25 mm).
iv) Steam condensate piping is to be sized based upon 96-99 % of the piping volume assumed to
be flash steam. Condensate flow rates are to be limited to a pressure drop of 0.057 kPa/m (1/4
psi/ 100 ft.) of piping and maximum velocity of 7000 fpm (35.6 m/s).
MEP 9/9
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
C HEATING SYSTEMS
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
b) Boiler Sizing Requirements
c) Hot Water (Heating) System
d) Steam System
2 Heating Plant Equipment ......................................................... 3

a) Boilers
b) Heating Water Pumps
c) Heat Exchangers
d) Heating Coils
e) Steam Coils
f) Electric Heating Coils
g) Booster Heating Coils
h) Radiators
i) Unit Heaters
j) Boiler Flues
k) Pressure Reducing Stations
l) Steam Humidifiers
m) Steam + Hot Water Piping
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS C
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) This section describes the requirements of the heating system. The system is to include multiple
boilers, pumps, chemical treatment etc. The boiler plant and the sizing requirements along with
the necessary components required are discussed. A description of the distribution components
and an outline of the type of equipment to be used follows.
ii) Fuel selection: The consultant is to investigate: types of fuel available and cost; dependability of
fuel supply; daily and seasonal variations of load; availability and quality of manufacturers local
service organization; whether or not licensed operators are required. (The design of a physical
plant that does not require a licensed operator is always preferred).
b) Boiler Sizing Requirements

i) Boilers are not to be sized to meet merely the anticipated peak load condition, but to be selected
to provide sufficient excess capacity to permit one unit to be removed from service for cleaning
and maintenance without seriously affecting the operations of the hotel.
ii) The supply water temperature of hot water boilers is not to exceed 200F (93C) and the return
water temperature must not be more than 20F (11C) below the supply water temperature.
iii) City Hotels: Minimum boiler selection is to be two units each sized to provide approximately
two-thirds of the peak heating load.
iv) Remote Resort Hotels: In remote resort areas, where service, maintenance and/or spare parts
availability are limited, the minimum selection is to be three units each sized for fifty percent of
the peak heating load.
v) Steam Boilers for Laundry: Provide multiple steam boilers such that on the loss of one boiler, the
remaining boiler(s) is to continue to provide 100% of the required laundry steam load.
vi) Laundry and kitchen supply water temperatures and demand is to be confirmed with laundry
and kitchen consultants.
vii) The domestic hot water system is to include multiple domestic hot water tanks and immersion
type heat exchangers with adequate storage and recovery to accommodate the domestic hot
water requirements. Domestic hot water supply temperatures are typically:
Public Spaces 120F (49C)
Guestrooms 120F (49C)
Kitchen 140F (60C)
Laundry 160F (72C)
c) Hot Water (Heating) System

i) The pumping system for heating water is to consist of pressure independent primary and
secondary loops with common piping. The primary loop is to circulate water through the boilers
and maintain constant flow. The secondary loop is to be allowed to vary in flow based on the
heating water demand. The piping distribution system is to be reverse return.
ii) The primary pumping system is to consist of one (1) pump per boiler. The various secondary
loops is to consist of two (2) secondary pumps each operating in parallel such that if one pump
were to fail the remaining pump is to deliver a minimum of 70% of full flow. Each boiler is to be
served with 2 dedicated (primary) circulating pumps.
MEP 1/8
2007 HEATING SYSTEMS
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS C
iii) A separate secondary loop is to be provided for the scheduled temperature perimeter heating
loop (where provided).
iv) Balancing and isolation valves are to be provided at each piece of mechanical equipment.
v) Piping is to be provided with adequate supports, expansion compensation and air venting.
vi) Valves are to be of type and construction to suit the service. Circuit setters are to be provided
to permit balancing of hydronic systems. Valves used for throttling (including circuit setters) are
to be globe type.
vii) Piping located outside or in unheated areas and containing water is to be electrically traced for
freeze protection (in freezing climates).
d) Steam System
i) Steam is required for various hotel purposes as follows or as identified by the kitchen or laundry
equipment consultant or manufacturer:
Laundry equipment 75 125 psi
Valet equipment 75 125 psi
Kitchen + dishwashing equipment 30 psi / 12 psi min.
Hot water heaters 5 10 psi
Reheat for humidity control 5 10 psi
Direct heating and air tempering 5 10 psi
ii) When press-free linen is available, the requirement for 125 psi (861 kPa) steam for laundry
equipment is not necessary, two possible plant configurations are to be considered: (i) a low
pressure boiler @ 30 psi (207 kPa) for kitchen and heating requirements; (ii) no steam boiler,
with alternate methods such as hot water boilers, to provide space heating, water heating, etc.
iii) In either case, the valet shop is to be provided with a package type boiler of approximately
10 boiler horsepower at 80 psi (551 kPa). The Kitchen and Laundry Consultants is to provide
details for steam and heating requirements for laundry and kitchen equipment.
iv) In the case where steam is required for laundry and/or kitchen equipment the steam pressures
required for this equipment must be obtained from the laundry/kitchen consultant.
v) If steam is purchased and either condensate is dumped down the drain or pumped back to the
manufacturer, an economizer is to be installed for the purpose of pre-heating the domestic hot
water, thereby extracting latent heat from the condensate. The temperature of the condensate,
before allowing to run to the drain, is not to exceed 80F (27C).
vi) If thermal-oil boilers are considered for steam production for the laundry and thermal-oil for the
flatwork ironer, careful consideration is to be given to the design of the boiler room for adequate
space, make up air, cooling and exhaust. Air compressor and refrigerated air-dryers are NOT to
be installed in this room.
vii) Pipe work is to be insulated as indicated in the Insulation section in such a way that the ambient
temperature in this room is not higher than 85F (29C).
viii) Spirax Hills condensate sight check valves are to be installed downstream of traps on steam.
MEP 2/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS C
coils, heat exchangers, calorifiers and end of line points in steam systems.
2 HEATING PLANT EQUIPMENT
a) Boilers
i) The following main components are described for the purpose of establishing the quality of
the components expected. The Engineering Consultant is responsible for specifying a working
system that is to meet the design criteria and functional program for the facility. Boilers are to be
constructed and hydrostatically tested in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, inspected by Regulatory Personnel and stamped for the working pressure.
ii) Boilers are preferred to be shop assembled and tested packaged Scotch Marine four (4) pass
horizontal fire tube type with burner, forced draft fan, gas and/or oil piping trains, burner controls,
boiler trim and refractory and jacket. Acceptable manufacturers include Cleaver Brooks Model
CB or equivalent.
iii) Boilers may be shop assembled and tested packaged commercial water tube type with burner,
forced draft fan, gas and oil piping trains, burner, controls, boiler trim, refractory and jacket.
Acceptable manufacturers include Cleaver Brooks FLX, Bryan Flexitube, or equivalent.
iv) Boilers may be shop assembled and tested low pressure, cast iron, sectional type with
linkage-less modulating power burner, forced draft fan, gas and or oil piping train, controls,
boiler trim, refractory and jacket. Acceptable manufacturers include Weil-McLain, H.B. Smith or
equivalent.
v) Boilers are to be provided with all safeties such as low water cut off, pressure relief valves sized
to suit the installed capacity of the system per ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. Boilers
to be provided with thermometer and pressure gauges.
vi) Provide the services of the Manufacturers factory trained service representative to check the
installation, start the boilers, calibrate controls and train the Operators in the proper operation
and maintenance of the equipment.
vii) Provide lead/lag sequence control of the boiler plant from the Building Automation System.
b) Heating Water Pumps

i) Heating water circulating pumps are to be in line or base mounted type, to suit the application.
Pumps are to be bronze fitted centrifugal pumps, each non overloading under all operating
conditions. Pump impellers are to not exceed eighty five percent (85%) of the largest impeller
available for the selected pump. Pumps are is to be split coupled when the motor is greater than
5 HP (7.46 kW).
ii) Heating water pumps may be base-mounted end suction, horizontal or vertical inline (split or
close coupled), depending on service and application.
iii) Base mounted pumps with end suction, horizontal and top discharge is to be factory mounted on
a steel base plate, aligned, connected to a motor by means of a flexible coupling with guard, and
include: a heavy duty radially split gasketted cast iron volute designed pump with servicing and
removal of the rotating assembly without disturbing pipe connections, and plugged tappings for
gauge and drain; a balanced bronze impeller secured to a carbon steel shaft with stainless steel
shaft sleeve; ball type, heavy duty, lifetime lubricated, sealed bearings with back pull out design
bearing frame with water tight self lubricating mechanical seals and a high efficiency motor;
MEP 3/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS C
iv) Vertical in line pumps, split coupled and single stage are to be radially split, gasketted cast iron
casing with equally sized suction and discharge flanged connections, tappings for gauge, drain
and flush line connections, and a cast iron motor mount bracket with dynamically balanced
bronze impeller secured to a Type 316 stainless steel shaft connected to the motor by means of
a high tensile aluminum split type spacer coupling with guard designed to permit servicing of the
mechanical seal without disturbing the pump, motor, or electrical wiring; and a high efficiency
motor; multiple spring, flushed, outside type, balanced mechanical seals; for 7 1/2 HP and larger
pumps, a 50 micron cartridge filter and sight flow indicator factory installed in the flush line.
v) Vertical in line pumps close coupled and single stage are to be radially split, gasketted cast
iron casing with equally sized suction and discharge flanged connections, and tappings for
gauge, drain and flush line connections with balanced bronze impeller with bronze shaft sleeve,
secured to the motor shaft; high efficiency motors; single spring, flushed, inside type, unbalanced
mechanical seal, serviceable without breaking pipe connections.
vi) Horizontal in line pumps are to have cast iron casing with flanged in line pipe connections; alloy
steel shaft with integral thrust collar and copper shaft sleeve, and oil lubricated bronze sleeve
bearings; balanced corrosion resistant steel, cast bronze, or stamped brass impeller; motor
connected to the pump by means of with guard; mechanical seal.
vii) Pumps are to have water-tight mechanical seals selected by the pump manufacturer to suit the
temperature, pressure, and the chemical properties of the fluid being pumped.
viii) Acceptable pump manufacturers are S.A. Armstrong Ltd., A.S. Leitch Co. Ltd., ITT Bell & Gossett,
Taco, or equivalent.
ix) Pumps are to be selected for a design pressure at least equal to 1 times their working pressure.
Materials are to be non-corrosive, such as cast iron casings, bronze impellers, stainless steel
shafts or shaft sleeves.
x) Pumps must be selected for quiet operation; it is particularly important that pump noise and
vibration is not transmitted to the building structure.
xi) Pump suction guides with a cast iron body, stainless steel strainer screen, removable fine mesh
start up strainer screen, steel guide vanes, and cast iron body control valve assemblies, each
acting as a check valve, balancing valve, and shut off valve.
xii) There is to be at least one circulating pump per boiler.
xiii) Install pumps on concrete inertia blocks, which are spring-isolated. Use vibration isolators in
associated pipe work.
c) Heat Exchangers
i) Steam to water or water to water heat exchangers are to be of the shell and tube type. Shells
are to be of rolled steel or steel pipe; tubes are to be seamless drawn copper. Shells is to be
arranged in bundles suitable for easy removal as a unit, or of individual tubes. Exchangers
with fluid temperatures above 200F is to generally have U-tube bundles. Exchangers at lower
temperatures are to be designed to take up expansion by bowing of tubes.
ii) Exchangers are is to be equipped with suitable inlet and outlet connections, drains, vents and
relief connections. They are to be designed for the pressures and temperatures to which they
are subjected.
iii) Cast iron or welded steel frame or cradle is to be provided for the mounting of the exchangers
on structural steel frames or concrete piers.
MEP 4/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS C
d) Heating Coils
i) ARI rated and certified coils each factory proof and leak tested with:
Continuous fins with full fin collars, permanently bonded to copper tubes which are in turn
expanded into cast iron headers or brazed to steel or copper pipe headers.
Galvanized steel channel casings with fins recessed into the channels to minimize air by
pass, and 3/8 (97 mm) diameter holes on 3 (76 mm) centres in top and bottom channels
for mounting.
Generally fins are is to be aluminum.
Fins for glycol solution preheat coils and/or one hundred percent (100%) fresh air
heating coils installed upstream of air filters is to be solder coated copper. Acceptable
manufacturers include Trane Inc., Aerofin Corp., and Engineered Air, or equivalent.
e) Steam Coils
i) Preheating, tempering and reheating coils are to be provided. All coils are to be of the steam
distributing type-within-a-tube construction. Coils are to be provided with outlet for complete
drainage of condensation from the coils with heated return headers. Each bank of heating
surface is to have separate valved steam and return connections. Preheat coils are to have a
minimum of two steam traps where outdoor temperatures fall below freezing.
ii) Each selection of preheat coils are to be individually controlled. One or more sections in the
reheating ducts may be controlled by a common thermostatic valve, but each section is to have
an individual combination float and thermostatic trap.
f) Electric Heating Coils

i) Electric Heating Coils are to be finned-tubular heating element. Coils are to have resistance
wire centered in copper plated steel tubes. Electric coil is to be circuited for individual element
control.
ii) Coils for coastal locations are to be constructed of copper tubes and copper fins.
iii) To keep the pressure drop across the heating coil to a reasonable level, the maximum frontal
velocity across the heating coil is to be maintained at less than 700 fpm (3.56 m/s).
g) Booster Heating Coils

i) Factory tested, ARI rated and certified, multi pass booster heating coils each complete with
copper tubes, aluminum fins, and flange type galvanized steel casings with pre-punched holes
for duct connection.
ii) Acceptable manufacturers include Trane Canada Inc., Aerofin Corp. (Canada) Ltd., and
Engineered Air, or equivalent.
h) Radiators
i) Radiation units are is to be all carbon steel construction, ISO 3147 350 rated and complete with
end mounted headers, provided with all necessary inlet, outlet, venting, and draining connections
and baffles; intended for working pressure of 56 psi (380 kPa) and test pressure of 75 psi (515
kPa) with continuous mounting strip welded to the backside of the radiator.
MEP 5/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS C
ii) Provide grooved end pieces, filters and inside and outside corners to conceal all necessary
piping. Units are to be provided with factory painted wall brackets and hold off screws for
mounting. Units are to cleaned, etched and primed and finished with baked on enamel.
iii) Acceptable manufacturers are Runtal and Hudevad (Engineered Air).
i) Unit Heaters
i) Propeller type unit heaters are permitted in mechanical rooms, loading docks and storage rooms,
and are to include: an adjustable louvre cone diffuser with steel blades held in set position by
spring steel clips; high efficiency, factory balanced propeller type fan with aluminum blades,
direct connected to a motor. Coil with copper tubes, aluminum fins, and steel supply and return
pipe connections.
ii) Concealed cabinet unit heater of the centrifugal blower type are to be used for entrance heaters
and are to be surface mounted, recessed or semi-recessed type with casings of 16 ga (1.6 mm)
steel finished with factory applied baked primer with internal glass fibre insulation, integral air
outlet and inlet grilles, removable access panels allowing service of fans, coils, isolating valves
and controls, with hot water coils constructed from seamless copper tubing, silver brazed to
steel headers with evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubing and leak tested
to 150 psi (1000 kPa) with air under water; statically and dynamically balanced, double width
centrifugal fans with sleeve bearings, direct connected to resiliently mounted three speed single
phase motor; speed controller and single phase motor starting switch factory wired to motor
and mounted inside cabinet behind access door; removable 1-in (25 mm) fibrous glass media
replaceable filters and supplied with line voltage thermostat for remote mounting.
iii) Acceptable manufacturers include Trane Inc., Engineered Air, Dunham Bush, Sterling, Rittling
or equivalent.
j) Boiler Flues
i) Boiler flues / chimneys are to be carefully coordinated and located immediately adjacent to
the boiler installation to minimize length of breaching. Chimney are to be sized for appropriate
temperatures and velocities based on fuel used, firing equipment, and available draft.
ii) Breechings and chimneys may be constructed from catalogued factory manufactured products
with double wall construction of 304 stainless steel and shell with mineral wool between liner
and shell, or an engineered custom fabricated product, or an all-fuels chimney; with appropriate
ratings for clearances to combustibles for force draft or natural draft applications. Acceptable
manufacturers include Van-Packer, Selkirk Metalbestos, Environ or equivalent.
iii) The flues from each boiler are to have a thermometer for temperature monitoring.
k) Pressure Reducing Stations

i) Pressure reducing stations are to be provided wherever high pressure steam must be reduced
to a lower pressure. Reducing stations are to consist of a large and a small valve and a bypass.
The large valve is to be sized from 67% to 100% of total capacity; the small valve from 33% to
25%.
ii) Valves are to be self-contained or air pressure operated and designed for the highest inlet
working pressure. All materials, particularly discs and seats must be of non-corrosive, long
wearing materials. Smaller valves generally are to have all bronze bodies while large valves
may have cast iron bodies, bronze trim.
MEP 6/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS C
iii) Pressure reducing stations are to be equipped with inlet strainers, gauges and alarms and
bypass.
iv) Where PRV stations are air operated, the pilot line is to be at least 25 feet from the station to
prevent the valve from surging.
l) Steam Humidifiers
i) Locate steam humidifiers within air handling units immediately downstream of the heating coil.
Where central air handling unit serves multiple areas with varying humidification requirements,
humidifiers may be mounted remotely, in ductwork consisting of watertight aluminum construction
with sloped bottom and drain connection. Do not install humidifiers in vertical (or pitched)
ductwork.
ii) Steam humidifiers, when provided, are to include an steam generator, piping, a distribution
manifold installed across width of duct or plenum, and a system of controls and safeties.
iii) Acceptable manufacturers include Armstrong, Dri-Steem, Spirax Sarco, Nortec, or equivalent.
iv) Provide multiple humidifier spray outlets arranged in a grid (array) as required to provide
complete absorption of the steam in the air stream without wetting downstream surfaces. Design
humidifier array for complete absorption within a maximum of 3 ft. (1m) at the least favorable air
conditions for temperature and velocity.
v) Controls and Safeties: Each humidifier is to be provided with: an air flow sensor to confirm
air flow and shut-off humidifier on no air / low conditions; a high limit humidistat to override
the controlling humidistat and maintain maximum 90% RH in ductwork or air handler casing;
temperature switch to prevent injection of liquid condensate during cold start.
vi) Steam injection humidifiers with normally closed modulating steam control valve, centrifugal
type steam/water separator, factory installed valve actuator, single or multiple steam jacketed
duct distribution manifolds across width of duct or plenum, steam separator, and steam trap
assemblies.
vii) The steam generator is to be of the dedicated steam boiler, self contained electric or gas fired
or steam to steam type. The choice of steam generator used is to be the most economic, based
on analysis of the quantity of humidification steam required, location of the humidifiers in the
facility, available energy sources to produce steam and impact energy source has on building
services.
Dedicated Steam Boiler: A central plant, low pressure steam boiler as described in the
section entitled Heating Systems are to be utilized. The boiler are to be suitable for once
through steam service and need not be equipped for dual fuel firing. This option allows for
remote steam generation.
Self-Contained Gas Fired Steam Generator: A self-contained steam generator comprised
of a natural gas or propane heated pan humidifier, remotely mounted nearby point of use.
This type of steam generator requires additional consideration including provision of a
fuel supply to unit, venting of combustion gases and provision of combustion air. Design
and installation are to comply with the requirements of local codes including those of the
authority having jurisdiction.
MEP 7/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS C
Self-Contained Electric Steam Generator: A self- contained steam generator comprised
of cleanable steam cylinder(s) with internal electrode type heating elements, remotely
mounted near point of use. Steam cylinder(s) may be of the disposable type if approved
by FSHR. Factors to be considered in determining the use of disposable steam cylinders
include type of facility (remote vs urban) and availability of replacement cylinders on local
market.
Steam to Steam Generator: A self contained, pan type steam generator using a plant
steam to steam heater.
m) Steam and Hot Water Piping

i) The following table provides guide specifications for steam and hot water piping:
MEP 8/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
D COOLING SYSTEMS
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
b) System Selection
2 Cooling Plant Equipment ......................................................... 2

a) Refrigeration Plant
b) Cooling Towers
c) Chilled + Condenser Water Pumps
d) Cooling Coils
e) Chilled + Condenser Water Piping
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS D
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) This section describes the requirements for the cooling system. The system will include a central
cooling plant, pumps, chemical treatment etc. The cooling plant and the sizing requirements
along with the necessary components required will be discussed. This will be followed by a
description components and an outline of the type of equipment to be used.
ii) Air conditioning installations are to be of the central plant type, supplying chilled water to the air
handling plant. Refrigerant is to be environmentally friendly, i.e. R-134a.
iii) A central refrigeration plant in a luxury hotel is anticipated to provide cooling on a 24 hour a
day basis - and also possibly on a year round basis. Equipment is to be selected with multiple
units with sufficient spare capacity to maintain guest comfort during periods of location typical
weather conditions and full occupancy in the event that one unit has to be taken out of service.
b) System Selection
i) The Engineering Consultant is to evaluate all applicable options for cooling system plant design,
including air-cooled chillers, water-cooled chillers, seawater cooling, air- and water-side free
cooling, etc. and identify the most cost effective solution based on realistic estimates of first
cost and operating cost. Computer modelling is to be used to establish building load profiles
and to assist in modelling system performance for evaluating the merits of alternative systems.
Alternative systems are to be reviewed, life-cycle cost analysis performed and the Consultant is
to make recommendation to Ownership and FSHR.
ii) Do not specify fan-coil units in buildings requiring year-round cooling. Fan-coil units, by
themselves, can handle either temperature or humidity, but not both.
iii) Consider a ducted, all-air HVAC system with reheat in hot humid climates. Provide increased
floor-to-floor height over normal limits when needed to accommodate ducts in ceiling space.
iv) Specify multiple refrigeration units (i.e. multiple compressors) for buildings with year-round
cooling loads. Require special care and attention to field installation of central HVAC systems.
They require more care during installation, but once operating can tolerate less maintenance
than stand-alone DX units. They are also far less vulnerable to equipment failure
v) With many hours of operation at light cooling loads, use multiple chillers, so that the smallest
chiller is not required to short cycle or use hot-gas bypass
vi) In buildings with high latent cooling loads or highly variable sensible cooling loads and/or long
hours of operation at light sensible cooling loads, provide reheat to maintain humidity control.
When reheat is required, it is often economical to use some form of heat recovery - i.e. reclamation
of condenser heat or heat exchangers.
vii) When the designer anticipates approximately 1,000 or more annual cooling hours at a cooling
load less than the minimum efficient capacity of the smallest chiller, provide a secondary or
auxiliary chiller for use during those light-load hours.
viii) Whenever local climate conditions warrant, specify economizers (air side free cooling).
ix) Design for lowest practicable chilled-water temperature difference, consistent with economical
piping and pumping costs.
x) Use coils with low sensible heat ratio, and/or multiple coils or circuits.
MEP 1/4
2007 COOLING SYSTEMS
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS D
xi) Design chilled water piping systems with minimum hydraulic complexity and with self balancing
capability. The chilled water piping systems must be designed such that in the event that one
pump fails, the remaining pumps will be capable of delivering the same quantity of chilled water,
as if one chiller had failed. Where cooling may be required year round provide a bypass piping
arrangement on the winterized cooling tower to allow operation during the winter.
2 COOLING PLANT EQUIPMENT

a) Refrigeration Plant
i) The consultant is to investigate: local climatic condition and anticipated guest discomfort
expected in the event of equipment breakdown; availability, reliability of supply and cost of water;
chemical and physical properties of available water; availability, quality and cost of electric energy
supply; availability of skilled maintenance help; type of equipment with which local maintenance
help is familiar, or is capable of becoming familiar; availability of manufacturers local service
organizations; and availability of replacement parts.
ii) For smaller hotels reciprocating compressor units, may present the most economical solution,
while for medium sized and large hotels centrifugal, absorption, or screw type refrigeration
machines are expected.
iii) In the selection of competitive types and makes of refrigeration equipment, dependability and
ease of maintenance must be carefully weighed. In addition, the ability of the manufacturer
to provide maintenance of the equipment locally is to be a major factor in the selection of the
equipment. The manufacturer is to include a five year service contract (parts and maintenance)
as a part of the original bid.
iv) If chilled water is required throughout the year, hydronic water free cooling (where applicable),
using a winterized cooling tower is to be evaluated. A dedicated pumping system must also be
provided for hotel suite fan coil units, air handling units or any equipment, which requires year
round cooling.
v) Refrigerant leak detectors and a leak evacuation/exhaust system must be provided for the chiller
room in the event that refrigerant leaks are detected.
b) Cooling Towers
i) Careful consideration must be given to the availability of condenser water. Whenever possible,
the design must be based on chemical analysis of samples taken from the actual water source
at various times of the year, since its composition and degree of corrosiveness may vary
seasonally.
ii) Cooling towers are to be installed with additional condenser water capacity for kitchen refrigeration
where climatological conditions allow.
iii) If cooling towers are used in the condenser system, make provisions for continuous blow-down
of the system. Provide water treatment for open condenser water system.
iv) For tropical application and salt environments, the cooling towers are to be constructed of
corrosion resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester and all other components, including nuts and
bolts, are to be stainless steel.
v) Materials which may come in contact with the condenser water are to be selected to withstand
corrosive including biocides
MEP 2/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS D
vi) Provide condenser water filtration to remove solids and prevent accumulation of sludge in tower
basins.
vii) Cooling towers are to be located so that the noise generated by motor operation or air flow
from discharge will not be objectionable to the occupants of the hotel. The preferred location for
the cooling tower is on the highest roof level, remote from the chimneys. Consider the use of
variable speed drive on tower fans, discharge silencers and oversized cells to minimize acoustic
impact. Coordinate visual screening of tower with Architect.
viii) In freezing climates, cooling towers are to be winterized. Provide a bypass on the condenser
water circuit to the tower from the chillers. Provide basin heaters and consider indoor condenser
water storage where condenser water loops volumes are small.
ix) Establish temperature of water leaving cooling tower at 7F or so above ambient design wet-bulb
temperature, or base it on a life-cycle cost comparison of the increased cooling tower fan energy
used to achieve a higher compressor efficiency. In humid climates with long operating hours at
high ambient wet-bulb temperatures, cooling tower fans can consume substantial quantities of
energy. Evaluating energy efficiency of cooling towers in hot humid climates.
x) Compare on a life cycle cost basis the merits of draw-through (induced draft) vs. blow-through
(forced draft) cooling towers.
xi) Select the number of cooling tower cells to be equal to or greater than the number of chillers.
c) Chilled and Condenser Water Pumps

i) Circulating pumps are to be of the split coupled vertical in-line, motor driven type. Large pumps
are to be of the horizontally split case, double suction type (where available). Smaller pumps
may be vertically split case, end suction type. Pumps are to be carefully selected for proper
delivery rate and discharge head. The driving motor are to be selected not to overload under
any possible operating condition of the pump. Pumps are to be provided with shut off valves
and strainers in the suction side and check valves and throttling valves on the discharge side. If
pumps are designed to run year round a stand-by pump is to be provided.
ii) Pumps are to be selected for a design pressure at least equal to 1 times their working pressure.
Materials are to be non-corrosive, such as cast iron casings, bronze impellers, stainless steel
shafts or shaft sleeves. Pumps must be selected for quiet operation; it is particularly important
that pump noise and vibration is not transmitted to the building structure.
iii) Chilled water and condenser water pumps are to have factory mechanical seals installed.
iv) There is to be a minimum of one chilled water pump and one condenser water pump for each
chiller. They are to be piped and valved to a common header to allow use of pumps with any
chiller or cooling tower.
v) Provide primary/secondary pumping arrangements to achieve improved energy efficiency over
constant volume pumping, provide VFDs on secondary pumps and two-way control valves on
coils at air handling units.
vi) Install pumps on concrete inertia blocks which are spring-isolated. Use vibration isolators in
associated pipework.
MEP 3/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS D
d) Cooling Coils
i) Coils are to be of the continuous tube type with helical fins. Coils are to be constructed of 3/4
O.D. seamless copper tubing and copper fins for cooling, copper or aluminum fins, whichever is
standard for unit manufacturer for coils. Coils are to be tested for 300 psig and be provided with
positive methods of draining and venting.
ii) Direct Expansion Cooling Coil - Coils are to be 5/8 O.D. copper tubes spaced on 1 centres.
Fins are to be copper bonded to the tubes by hydraulic expansion of tubes. Tested at 300 psig
pneumatic pressure.
iii) Cooling coils are to be sized such that a maximum frontal velocity of 500 fpm is maintained
across the coil. This face velocity is to be further reduced in hot humid climates to prevent
condensate carry over from the cooling coils.
iv) Coils for coastal locations are to be constructed of copper tubes and copper fins.
e) Chilled and Condenser Water Piping

i) The following table provides guide specifications for chilled and condenser water piping:
SERVICE MATERIAL TYPE WEIGHT
Fan Coil Drain P.V.C. Semi-Rigid Grade 1

Fan Coil Drain Riser Cast Iron M.J.
Pipe Fittings
SERVICE SIZE MATERIAL TYPE WEIGHT
Chilled Water To 4 inch C.I. Screwed 125 lbs.
To 4 inch C.I. Screwed 250 lbs.
Tall bldgs.
5 inch & up Steel Welded Standard
Secondary Water To 4 inch C.I. Screwed 125 lbs.
To 4 inch C.I. or Screwed 125 lbs.
Tall bldgs. Copper Sweat Standard

Condenser Water To 4 inch C.I. Screwed 125 lbs.
To 4 inch C.I. Screwed 250 lbs.
Tall bldgs.
MEP 4/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
E HEATING + COOLING SPECIALTIES
1 General ...................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
2 Equipment ........................................................................................... 1
a) Control Valves
b) Valves + Strainers
c) Valve Identification
d) Expansion Tanks
e) Expansion Joints + Loops
f) Piping Welding
g) Cleaning + Testing of Piping
h) Water Treatment
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS E
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) This section describes equipment, piping, and components that are common to both heating
and cooling systems are involved in the treatment, distribution, and control of water, steam and
condensate.
ii) Additional details of the heating and cooling systems are to be found in the appropriate section
of the Standard. This material is presented here to avoid duplication.
2 EQUIPMENT
a) Control Valves
i) Controls valves are to be supplied by the Controls Contractor as outlined in the Building
Automation and Controls Systems Standards.
ii) Generally control valves are to be sized for a 3 to 5 psi (20 to 34 kPa) pressure drop and suit
the equipment under control.
b) Valves and Strainers

i) Valves in mechanical rooms or in fan rooms which are more than 6 0 above floor are to be
provided with chain operated sheaves and chains.
ii) Drain cocks with threaded ends for hose connection are to be provided for any low points in the
supply and return mains.
iii) Cast iron body valves are to have self-packing renewable bronze seat rings and bronze
spindles.
iv) Valves are to be provided on the project with temperature and pressure ratings, material
composition, and manufacturers testing procedures conforming to latest specifications from
Manufacturers Standardization Society of Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS) and ASTM A216
Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High
Temperature Service, or British Standards Institution (BSI) Kitemarks, or supplied by manufacturer
operating with ISO 9001 certification.
v) All valves for throttling service, in pump discharges, chiller and condenser outlets, etc. are to be
of the Globe type. Lubricated plug cocks may be used in place of globe valves. Plugs must be
tapered in shape. Plug cocks over 4 inch size must have geared operators.
vi) Check valves in horizontal position are to be 15 swing checks; valves in vertical position are to
be balance check valves of the low pressure drop type as made by Smolensky or Hager.
vii) Provide all necessary manual or automatic vent valves for chilled water and condenser water
systems.
viii) Inverted ball float traps are to be used for venting chilled and condenser water mains at all
high points and wherever else required. Traps are to be Kieley and Mueller No. 730, or as
approved.
ix) Install strainers in horizontal or down flow lines with clearance for removal of basket. Provide
line size strainers on:
inlet side of water meters;
MEP 1/4
2007 HEATING + COOLING SPECIALTIES
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS E
inlet side of control valves (except at reheat coils with piping connections NPS or less,
radiation, or radiant panels);
inlet side of pressure reducing valves;
suction side of water circulating pumps.
c) Valve Identification
i) Valve tag schedules and valve charts for each piping system, consisting of schematic drawings
of piping layouts, along with a valve list, showing and identifying each valve by number, service,
and location and describing its function.
ii) Upon completion of the work, mount two copies of each chart, sealed to rigid backboard with
clear lacquer, placed under glass and framed, on the wall where directed by the Operators
Director of Engineering. Two additional unmounted copies are to be delivered to the Director of
Engineering.
iii) Provide every valve on job, except where located in fire hose cabinets, on radiation, unit heaters,
fixture stops or within site of equipment or apparatus they control, with a numbered tag showing
valve type and size, attached to valve stem or wheel handle with non ferrous chain or S-hook.
Tags to be 1-in (25 mm) diameter brass with stamped numbers and letters filled with black
enamel.
iv) Tags are to correspond with the valve schedule and record drawings. In back of house areas,
where ceilings are installed and the valve tag is not visible, a self adhered tag with the valve
number is to be installed on the wall, directly under the ceiling. For public area ceiling valves,
these tags are to be installed in the service corridor, leading to this public space.
d) Expansion Tanks
i) Closed type expansion tanks are preferred of welded construction conforming to ASME Section
VIII for unfired Pressure Vessels, manufactured from ASTM A516 pressure vessel carbon steel
plate with dished ends, code rated for 125 psi (860 kPa) test pressure with ASME stamp and
certification. hot dip galvanized after fabrication for water service and black steel for glycol
service primed on outside only, with expansion pipe connection at bottom; make-up connection
at bottom; NPS 1 drain connection at bottom; vent connection at top; Schraeder valve connection
for compressed air at top; one (1) or more level gauge glass sets with bronze shut off cocks,
drain cock, and glass guards; an inspection tapping or manhole depending on tank size; relief
valve connection near bottom; prime coat painted welded steel support saddles for horizontal
tank; and a minimum of three (3) flanged steel support legs for vertical tank. Acceptable
manufacturers include Clemmer, John Wood, ITT Bell & Gossett, Drummond Welding & Steel
Works, ASI - gilfab.
ii) Diaphragm type expansion tanks are also acceptable: cylindrical, pressurized type with bladder/
diaphragm sealed in elastomer suitable for 240F (115C) operating temperature, welded
construction conforming to ASME Section VIII for Unfired Pressure Vessels, manufactured from
ASTM A516 pressure vessel carbon steel plate with dished ends, primed on outside, code rated
for 125 psi (860 kPa) working pressure with ASME stamp and certification, Schraeder tank valve
for compressed air located above diaphragm, base mounted for vertical installation. Acceptable
manufacturers are to be Amtrol Extrol, Taco CBX, ITT Bell & Gossett.
MEP 2/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS E
e) Expansion Joints and Loops
i) Expansion joints are to be of hydraulically formed, packless, stainless steel bellows type, self-
equalizing, fully enclosed, with flanged connections. Joints are to have the required transverse,
temperature rating, and pressure rating. At least one set of guides is to be furnished and installed
on either side of each expansion joint.
ii) Where space conditions permit, expansion loops are to be used in place of expansion joints.
f) Piping Welding
i) Where so specified or directed, welded joints, outlets and flanges are to be used. Welded joints
may also be provided elsewhere at the Contractors option, except on piping smaller than 2,
or at points where it may be explicitly specified or directed to leave flanged joints in order to
facilitate future changes.
ii) All welded joints (except pipe welded end-to-end) are to be made by use of forged one-piece
welding flanges, caps, nozzles, elbows, branch outlets and tees, of Tube-Turn, Taylor-Forge,
Ladish, Grinnell or other approved make. Cut samples are to be submitted for approval if
directed. All such fittings, etc. is to be of a type which maintains full wall-thickness at all points,
sample radius and fillets, and proper bevels or shoulders at ends. Weld-o-Lets may be used
where standard fittings of required sizes are not available and elsewhere as approved. All job
welding is to be done by the electric arc welding process in accordance with the following:
Joints to have 45 degree bevel type, pipe mill-bevelled or machine-bevelled.
Scale and oxide removed with hammer, chisel or file and bevel left smooth and clean.
Pipe lengths lined up straight with abutting pipe ends concentric.
Both conductors from the welding machine are to be extended to locations at which
welding work is being done. The leads from welding machine to location of welding work
is to be held together with tape or other approved means so as to prevent induced current
in structural steel, in piping or in other metals within the building. The ground lead is to be
connected to length of pipe with through joints in pipe, structural steel of building or steel
pipe supports. Isolation between hangers, clamps of copper piping.
Weld metal thoroughly fused with base metal at all sections. Welds are to be of sound
metal, free from laps, slag inclusion or other defects.
All welders are to be qualified and approved for such work.
Wherever welded piping connection to equipment, valves, or other units need maintenance,
servicing, or require possible removal, the connecting joint is to be flanged. Pressure
rating of the pipe flanges is to match the pressure rating of the flanges on the equipment
to which the pipe connects.
g) Cleaning and Testing of Piping

i) During construction, the Contractor is to properly cap all lines, so as to prevent the entrance of
sand, dirt, etc. Each system of piping is to be blown through after completion (for the purpose of
removing dirt, grit, sand, etc. from coils and piping), for as long a time as required to thoroughly
clean the apparatus.
MEP 3/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS E
ii) All piping, etc. is to be tested to hydrostatic pressure at least 12 times the maximum operating
pressure (but not less than 100 psi) for a sufficient long time to detect all leaks and defects,
and after testing is to be made tight in an approved manner. If necessary, piping is to be taken
down and reassembled, as no makeshift method of temporarily repairing leaks, etc. will be
permitted.
iii) After testing, all systems are to be chemically cleaned by the specialist company providing
water treatment on the project. After cleaning, the pipework is to be rinsed multiple times until
the system is neutral.
iv) Before sections of the hotel (such as guestroom fan coil, air handling units etc.) are tuned over
to the Operator, the General Contractor turns is to provide the Architect and Owner with written
certification that the piping system has been cleaned, signed by the Chemical company.
v) If these certification has not been received, the system will not be taken over by FSHR for
operation.
h) Water Treatment
i) Water treatment systems are to be furnished and installed. Water treatment equipment,
chemicals and service for boiler feed water open (cooling tower) condenser water and closed
water systems are to be furnished by a specialist water treatment company with an established
reputation. Acceptable providers include: Drew Chemical Co., Nalco, Dearborn, Betz or approved
alternate.
ii) The mechanical contractor is to provide through the water treatment company, a chemical
cleaning operation to the interior of the systems to remove and dissolve foreign substances and
treat the water systems during the testing period from the time the water is introduced into the
system (but after initial filling, flushing and draining) and up to acceptance of the system.
iii) Water treatment is to consist of automatic feeding device to feed chemical solution into the
piping systems to minimize corrosion, reduce build up of slime or other contaminants. Automatic
blow down is to occur at the cooling tower level, if towers are installed higher than the chillers,
in order to prevent hammer lock.
iv) All equipment installed for water treatment, including tanks and piping is to become the property
of the Owner.
v) Install test connections, upstream in closed loop systems such as chilled water, condenser
water system, etc., and provide a test report twice annually.
vi) The water treatment company is to include one year service as part of the contract. This is to
include, but not be limited to, the following:
Deliver and maintain water treatment chemicals for one year.
Collect and analyze samples of the treated water on a monthly basis and recommend
adjustment of the chemical feed to suit.
Inspect and maintain chemical feeding devices for a period of one year.
Training of all designated staff in chemical analysis and treatment.
The one year of service is to begin at the date of substantial completion.
Install test connections, upstream in closed loop systems such as chilled water, condenser
water system, etc., and provide test reports twice annually.
MEP 4/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HEATING, VENTILATION +
F AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
1 General ...................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
2 Guestrooms + Suites .................................................................. 1

a) Corridors + Stairways
b) Guestrooms
c) Guest Suites
d) Room/Suite Fan Coil Unit
e) Room/Suite Fan Coil Unit Control
f) Room/Suite Thermostat
3 Public Spaces ................................................................................... 4

a) System Types
b) Back of House
c) Laundry
d) Kitchen
e) Indoor Pools
4 Equipment ........................................................................................... 6
a) Grilles, Registers, Diffusers
b) Ductwork
c) Dampers + Access
d) Acoustic Treatment
e) Air Handling Units
f) Fan Sections
g) Coil Sections
h) Air Filters
i) Motor, Starters + Electric Motors
5 Ductwork Systems .......................................................................... 11

a) Design Guidelines
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) This section describes requirements of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC)
systems. The systems will normally include air moving devices (fans), heat transfer devices
(heating and cooling coils), air distribution systems (ductwork) and sound attenuating devices.
ii) FSHR require that, when both heating and cooling systems are installed, irrespective of the
season or time of the year, the guest be able to adjust the room thermostat to provide heating
or cooling. Guestroom heating or cooling is to be available year round.
iii) Guestroom, suite and corridor make-up air units (primary air) to serve the guest suites are to
be provided to ensure that the air supplied to the guest suites is properly dehumidified and
reheated to minimum 72F (22C).
2 GUESTROOMS AND SUITES
a) Corridors and Stairways

i) Air-condition enclosed corridors having direct access to guestrooms and storage rooms adjacent
to guestrooms. Ventilate stairways adjacent to guestrooms (unless they are not to be used by
guests). Guestroom corridors are to be air-conditioned with dedicated primary air systems.
ii) In warm humid climates, provide reheat with temperature and humidity controls at guestroom
corridor HVAC units with humidistat set at 45% RH and thermostat set at 76F (24.5C) in
summer. In other climates, provide temperature controls at guestroom corridor HVAC units with
thermostat set at 75F (23.8C).
iii) Do not use ceiling plenums for corridor air distribution.
b) Guestrooms
i) Calculate the designed sensible and latent cooling loads of guestrooms and slightly undersize
the fan coil units accordingly. Sizing is to be based upon 1% ASHRAE, 1 person occupancy per
king room, 2 person occupancy per double/double room for city hotels and 2 person occupancy
per king room and 4 person occupancy per double room for resorts, 1,400 watt which includes
TVs, lights and power loads, etc., drapery sheers closed, no outside air infiltration, and 74F
(23.3C) desired room cooling temperature.
ii) Guestroom air conditioning units are to be of the horizontal fan coil type. Vertical fan coil units
are not permitted. Fan coil units are to be double coil four-pipe providing both cooling and
heating, or two pipe cooling with electric heat where specifically approved by FSHR.
iii) Fan coil units are to be provided with a three speed and off control and the capacity of the units
are to be selected at medium fan speed for cooling and low fan speed for heating.
iv) Guestroom fan coil units selections are to be made to achieve a sound level rating of NC 30 at
low fan speed and NC 35 at medium fan speed. In order to ensure that the noise criteria are
maintained within the suites, provide factory installed acoustic lining on the discharge ductwork
from guestroom fan coil unit.
MEP 1 / 14
2007 HEATING, VENTILATING + AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
v) Guest room fan coil units are typically located over the entry vestibule with a return grill located
in the ceiling and a supply grill in the face of the vestibule soffit. Coordinate fan coil access door,
grille, register and diffuser locations and installation details, with the interior designer.
vi) The fan coil unit is to be combined with a 100% outdoor air system that provides preconditioned
(heated or cooled and humidified or dehumidified outdoor) ventilation air to the ceiling space
where the fan coil unit is located. (In hot humid climates, the outdoor make-up air unit is cooling
and dehumidifying. In cold dry climates, the same unit is heating and humidifying).
vii) In warm humid climates provide (i) a switch on the exterior balcony door to shut down guestroom
fan coil unit, (ii) on/off control of toilet exhaust fan when fan system is not centralized, and (iii) a
guestroom humidistat with on/off cycling of fan coil unit to control humidity. (Where guestroom
exhaust fans are centralized, provide speed control on centralized exhaust fan to shutdown or
limit speed during midday and night time hours. Full speed operation is to be limited to 6-9 a.m.
and 5-8 p.m.)
viii) In climates with a severe winter season additional heating units are to be located on the outside
wall under the windows to avoid cold drafts in this area.
ix) Provide access to the fan coil unit for maintenance purposes by means of a hinged (or lift out)
access panel approximately 18 x 30. Access is required to the control valves, fan motors and
fan scrolls. It is not necessary that the access panel be sized to permit the fan coil unit casing or
coils to be removed. Access to the fan coil unit valve assembly is to be in easy reach from the
removable access panel.
x) Ensure that grilles with two-way deflectors are installed on discharge grilles from fan coils to
prevent conditioned air from blowing directly onto furniture, walls or beds.
xi) Locate guestroom exhaust registers close to places where moisture is generated - for example,
at shower locations in bathrooms. Typical guestroom bathrooms are to have two ceiling exhaust
grilles; one over the shower and one over the WC, both connected to the same sheet metal
exhaust system. Provide aluminum ductwork to connect the shower exhaust grille to the exhaust
system.
xii) Consider toilet rooms and closets as part of the conditioned space. Provide them with louvered
doors or supply conditioned air.
xiii) Design toilet room exhaust fans to maintain negative pressure with respect to adjacent rooms,
and positive pressure with respect to outside air. This means that less air is to be exhausted
from toilet rooms than is supplied to the entire space that includes the toilet rooms.
c) Guest Suites
i) Suites with a floor area of less than 700 ft (65m) are to be air conditioned in the same manner
as the guestroom.
ii) In large hotel suites which have living room and dining areas (typically two bedroom suites
and presidential suites), ensure that the fan coil units are capable of handling the ventilation
requirements for one person/15 sq. ft. at medium speed and /20 sq. ft. at high speed.
iii) These rooms are used for catered social functions such as stand up cocktail parties (where
the density of people makes the space an assembly occupancy per ASHRAE 62.1). When
fan coil units cannot provide sufficient capacity to condition the required outdoor air, provide
dedicated air handling units. In this circumstance, retain fan coil units to serve bedroom/sleeping
occupancies.
MEP 2 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
d) Rooms/Suite Fan Coil Unit
i) The fan coil unit is to be designed with a three-speed motor and sized so that the unit will
provide the required night heating or cooling output when the motor is running on slow speed.
The unit sound level is not to exceed NC 30 when running at slow speed or NC 35 at medium
speed and valves, coils and thermostats are to be silent in operation. Fan coil unit motor is
to run continuously at the selected speed and not cycle off when the desired temperature is
achieved.
ii) Drain pans are to be provided and so designed that valves and controls are over the pan. They
are to be coated with a suitable material to prevent condensation and corrosion. Pans are
to be pitched to the drain. Drain pans are to have piped drain connections, secondary drain
connections, tell-tale drains or drain pan cut-out switches as required by local authority having
jurisdiction.
iii) Grilles to be factory finished to color specified by interior designer. Ductwork behind grilles to be
painted matt black.
iv) Minimum coil construction 200 psi working pressure, 3/8 O.D. copper tubes, .016 wall,
aluminium fins. Coil connections 5/8 O.D. flare with manual vent. Fan wheels forward curved,
aluminium or steel blades, galvanized steel housing. Motor, three speed U.L. approved 115
volt single phase, split capacitor with energy efficient motors - no magnetic hum, and overload
protection. Coil condensate pan insulated and pitched to 7/8 O.D. connection. Unit chassis
20 gauge galvanized steel, sound and thermally insulated. Filter is 1 thick, throw away type
fiberglass.
e) Room/Suite Fan Coil Unit Control

i) The thermostat will normally be located in the guestroom bedroom area approximately 60
above finished floor level. Thermostats locations are to be carefully coordinated with the interior
designer.
ii) Fan coil units are to be controlled by the room thermostat that modulates/cycles control valves
on cooling or heating coils or electric heat.
iii) Controls are to be silent in operation, and where electric heating elements are used, the primary
electrical contactor is to be of the silent, mercury type or equivalent.
iv) MANDATORY: When the room is sold/rented, the fan is to run continuously at the selected
default speed and is not to cycle on and off with temperature. When a guest occupies the room,
the thermostat is not to override the setpoint or fan speed or fan status selected by the guest.
v) MANDATORY (WARM HUMID CLIMATES ONLY): When the exterior balcony door switch
indicates that the door has been held open for a (programmable) two minutes, shut-down the
fan coil unit serving the room, until the exterior door is closed.
vi) MANDATORY (WARM HUMID CLIMATES ONLY): Provide thermostat with an integral humidistat
and with on/off cycling of fan coil unit to control humidity.
vii) OPTIONAL: When the room is unsold, the thermostat may, in addition to resetting the control
deadband (to allow room temperatures to depart from those maintained when the room is
occupied), cycle the fan or change fan speeds to bring room under temperature or humidity
control, to conserve energy. These additional modes of operation are only to be provided where
the wired connection to the room thermostat has also been provided, and the hotel management
system is able to report the sold/unsold status of the room to the thermostat.
MEP 3 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
viii) OPTIONAL: Additional control functions of the thermostat (lighting control, mini bar monitoring,
smoke detection annunciation, room status annunciation) are not required.
ix) Do not provide motion sensors, guestroom corridor door switches, or other devices to locally
sense room occupancy without FSHR approval.
f) Room/Suite Thermostat
Provide an INCOMM e4 Smart Digital Thermostat Model e527 or equal approved by FSHR, that:
i) has an auto-off illuminated LCD display of room temperature and setpoint in degrees F or
degrees C with a faceplate mounted touch button to toggle (F / C) display;
ii) permits the guest to set desired room temperature setpoint by means of two clearly labelled
faceplate mounted up and down touch buttons;
iii) permits the guest to select one of three fan speeds or turn fan on or off by means of a faceplate
mounted touch button;
iv) permits the operator to set a (programmable) deadband and limits such that heating setpoint
cannot be set over (programmable) 75F (24C) and cooling cannot be set below (programmable)
68F (20C).
v) is without manufacturers logo, labelling or marking.
3 PUBLIC SPACES
a) System Types
i) Variable air volume (VAV) type systems and constant air volume (CAV) systems are to both to
be provided.
ii) Constant air volume (CAV) type systems are to be provided to serve lobbies, reception, circulation
areas, ballrooms and pre-function areas.
iii) Fan coil units are not permitted in public areas.
iv) Meeting rooms, ballrooms, pre-function spaces and places of assembly are to be designed to
meet occupancy requirements of ASHRAE 62. Meeting rooms with a floor area of 700 ft (65m)
or larger are, for the purposes of this standard, to be considered assembly occupancies per
ASHRAE 62.
b) Back of House
i) The following are specific space requirements:
Ballroom* CAV for each zone, Multi zone or VAV
Restaurant CAV, unless with multiple exposure or VAV
Lobby CAV or VAV
Meeting Rooms VAV
Spa VAV with reheat coil + individual treatment room thermostats
Admin Offices VAV
MEP 4 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
Retail Areas VAV or fan coil units with (CAV) outdoor air supply system.
* Note: Ballroom dividers are not to be penetrated by ducts or any other service.
ii) Computer rooms, television demarcation rooms, and telephone switch rooms are to be provided
with independent systems with room-specific temperature and humidity controls, with back-up
provisions to permit continued cooling in the event of loss of normal power.
c) Laundry
i) FSHR laundries are designed by Laundry Service specialists. Outdoor air and exhaust systems
are to be provided by the mechanical designer to compliment the requirements of the laundry
service specialist.
ii) The laundry will have a dedicated make-up air system to ensure that the temperature within the
laundry area maintains the design conditions.
iii) The laundry may occasionally operate at partial load, therefore, barometric dampers are typically
utilized on the exhaust system.
iv) The dryers, located within the laundry, are to be provided with independent lint filters prior to
connecting to the laundry exhaust system. The lint filters are to be located as close to the source
of lint as possible.
v) The dryers are to have independent unconditioned air supply.
vi) The laundry exhaust system are to terminate up-blast at high levels away from any air intakes.
vii) The dryer exhaust duct are to be stainless steel for first 25 feet and aluminium for the
remainder.
d) Kitchen
i) Kitchens are designed by specialty food service consultant. Outdoor air and exhaust systems
are to be provided by the mechanical designer in accordance with the requirements of the food
service specialist.
ii) Kitchen areas are to be maintained under a negative pressure to ensure there is no odor
migration to adjacent spaces.
iii) Refrigerators, freezers and cold rooms are to have an independent chilled water or condenser
water cooling system.
iv) Ice machines, both in the kitchens and serving the guest floors, are to be water-cooled.
v) Dishwashers are to have a separate exhaust system from the kitchen exhaust of stainless steel
construction.
vi) The kitchen exhaust system is to be designed to terminate at high level away from air intakes.
vii) The kitchen make-up system is to be provided with cooling to maintain kitchen design conditions.
FSHR kitchens are typically air conditioned.
e) Indoor Pools
i) Swimming Pools and Whirl Pools are generally designed by Specialist Consultants. Air
conditioning, ventilating and exhaust systems are to be provided by the mechanical designer to
maintain satisfactory indoor conditions and to compliment the requirements of the specialists.
MEP 5 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
ii) Swimming Pool HVAC: A dedicated system with dehumidification is to be provided for the
swimming pool. Humidity control is required to maintain comfort conditions. The AHU is to be
designed to use up to 100% outdoor air for cooling and/or dehumidification. On a winter cycle,
when outdoor temperature and humidity are below pool design conditions, the amount of outdoor
air is to be controlled by a humidistat to maintain the desired humidity levels. On summer cycle,
when outdoor temperature and humidity are above pool design conditions, minimum outdoor
air is used, preferably with an enthalpy controller. The pool areas are to be kept under negative
pressure of 0.1 inches of water. Close attention is to be given to latest chlorine and moisture
levels.
iii) Pool area HVAC units are to be dehumidifying reheat type with 24-hour exhaust for operation.
Pool area air temperature control is to be set 2F (1.1C) above pool water temperature with
humidity control to be set at 60% RH.
iv) The supply and return ductwork for the pool area is to be of aluminium construction.
4 EQUIPMENT
a) Grilles, Registers and Diffusers

i) Grills, registers and diffusers are to be: product of one manufacturer where same model or type
identification is used; standard catalogue products selected to meet capacity, throw, and noise
level; prime coated, stamped or cold rolled steel material with mitred corners and exposed joints
welded and ground smooth; extruded satin finish, clear anodized aluminum material with mitred
corners and mechanical fasteners; Frames with full perimeter gaskets, plaster stops where set
into plaster or gypsum board, and concealed fasteners. No exposed fasteners of any kind will
be accepted in front of house spaces.
ii) Supply registers are to be double deflection style with face bars vertical and rear bars horizontal,
perimeter border with gasket, opposed blade dampers (OPD) with concealed manual operator,
of steel or aluminum material.
iii) Return and exhaust grilles are to be single deflection type, with horizontal face bars, 20
maximum turn up, with perimeter border with gasket, opposed blade damper with concealed
operator of steel or aluminum material.
iv) Diffusers are to be circular or square multiple cone or perforated face type, with adjustable
pattern control of steel or aluminum material.
v) Linear grilles are to be aluminum bar core type with margin as indicated, pattern adjustment,
plaster frames, sealing strips, end caps, mitred corners and alignment key strips for multiple
sections.
vi) Ceiling diffusers are to be round or square with internal dampers, stabilizing grids and adjustable
cones: or where dictated by architectural and interior design considerations they may be of the
linear type. They are to be face accessible, with damper adjustments out of public view.
vii) Registers and diffusers are to be furnished with a factory finish to color specified by interior
designer.
viii) Where condensation is identified as a problem, supply and return grilles are to be wood.
ix) Grilles in swimming pool areas are to be aluminium.
x) The inside of supply and return ducts and plenums are to be painted mat black for any portion
visible through the grille.
MEP 6 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
xi) In public spaces, diffuser locations are to be coordinated with the interior designer.
xii) Supply air diffusers within guestrooms are to be positioned and throw direction adjusted such
that the supply air stream is away from the bed.
b) Ductwork
i) Ducts are to generally be constructed of galvanized iron sheet metal unless specifically noted
otherwise in these standards. The recommendations of SMACNA may be used as a guide
for sizing of ductwork, minimum gauges, bracing and construction details, although in some
instances, particularly for large ducts near equipment and for high pressure ductwork, special
bracing may be required to prevent so-called breathing of ductwork. Special methods of sealing
with approved adhesives are to be employed for high-pressure work wherever space conditions
permit.
ii) Elbows for conventional ductwork are to have approved radii or aerodynamically correct turning
vanes. Elbows and other fittings for high-pressure ductwork are to be of welded construction.
Fittings are to be constructed for minimum pressure drop and noise generation at the selected
air velocity. Hangers for ducts up to 36 inches in width are to be galvanized iron straps fastened
to angle bracing or standing seams. Hangers for ducts over 36 inches are to be angle iron or
rods.
iii) Kitchen exhaust ductwork are to be designed and installed in accordance with the requirements
of NFPA 96. Ductwork are to be minimum 16 gauge black iron either welded or flanged and
sealed. It are to be provided with clean-outs at each bend, every 10 feet horizontally and every
20 feet vertically. Kitchen exhaust ductwork to have fireproof insulation for entire length. See
Insulation section of Standards.
iv) Ducts from dishwashers, laundry flat work ironer are to be stainless steel for a distance of at least
25 feet from the dishwasher, soldered or welded and arranged for proper moisture elimination.
Horizontal ducts to and from dishwasher are to pitch toward the machine at one inch per 10 feet.
The exhaust fan is to be installed as close as possible to the end of the ductwork, at the opposite
end of the dishwasher. The remainder of these ducts to be aluminium.
v) Ductwork for swimming pool supply air systems are to be aluminium. A plenum system is not to
be used in the pool area. Exhaust ductwork are to be stainless steel.
vi) Laundry dryer exhaust ductwork are to be welded stainless steel for first 25 feet with watertight
joints for sections where condensation can occur. The remainder are to be welded aluminium
and the interior are to be smooth and free from any intrusion such as sheet metal screws.
vii) Where local authorities permit the use of ceiling spaces as return air plenums, the return ductwork
is to be extended so that the most remote return air grille is no more than 30 ft (10m) away from
open ended ductwork.
c) Dampers and Access

i) A substantially constructed manual volume damper of the butterfly or multiple blade type
(maximum blade width, 8 inches) are to be provided in every branch of every conventional duct
system. Each damper are to be equipped with locking quadrant.
ii) Automatic main dampers of louver pattern are to be installed in air inlet ducts, discharge ducts
from exhaust fans, etc. These dampers are to be provided by the manufacturer of the thermostatic
control system.
MEP 7 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
iii) Fire dampers are to be installed in ducts piercing shaft walls. Dampers are to be UL listed,
constructed of gauge steel plate mounted to turn freely in steel plate frame inserted in duct,
proportioned and weighted to close at once if released from link and provided with spring
catches to hold closed until manually reset. Dampers and frames are to have suitable eyes
and standard fusible links, normally holding them open but releasing upon contact. Provide
conveniently located access doors, of ample size for resetting the dampers.
iv) Dampers are to be provided with some exterior device, which will visibly show the position of
the damper.
v) Concealed (access or position not visible) fire damper locations are to be marked with a red
self-adhesive sign with the wording Fire Damper.
i) Acoustic duct lining are to be provided in accordance with the Section entitled INSULATION.
ii) Engineered sound absorbers are to be used in high-pressure systems in central locations near
fan discharge and at local attenuation devices.
iii) All air system are to be carefully designed to maintain a noise level within the conditioned spaces
compatible with the type of occupancy of the rooms and in compliance with this standard.
e) Air Handling Units

i) Air handling units are to be commercial grade, modular type cabinet fan assemblies.
ii) Unit casings are to be 2 thick, insulated, double wall, galvanized steel construction. Outer skin
are to be minimum 16 ga. Inner liner are to be perforated except for fan, humidifier and cooling
coil sections which are to be solid.
iii) Access doors are to be flush mounted to cabinetry, with gasket, latch and handle assembly,
provided at the following locations: (i) Fan; (ii) Economizer; (iii) Blender; (iv) Filter; (v) upstream
and downstream of heating and cooling coils.
iv) Drain pans are to be type 304 stainless steel with cross break and pitch to drain connection.
Provide drain pans under cooling coil and humidification section.
v) Fan Sections are to be complete with fan in accordance Section entitled Fans.
vi) Coil Sections are to be complete with coils in accordance Section entitled Coils.
vii) Humidification Section: provide 60 (1500 mm) long humidification sections. Sections are to be
complete with access door and a full-length stainless steel drain pan.
viii) Steam humidifiers are to be as specified in Section entitled HEATING SYSTEMS.
ix) Mixing Section and Economizer Section: provide mixing and/or economizer sections with factory
mounted low leak hollow core airfoil blade intake, exhaust and return air dampers. Dampers
are to be constructed of galvanized steel in galvanized frame. Provide fully gasketted intake,
exhaust and return air dampers. Provide continuous vinyl seals between damper blades. Provide
stainless steel end seals along end of dampers. Provide linkages. Damper leakage rate are to be
less than two tenths of one percent leakage at 2 (50 mm) static pressure differential. Leakage
rate are to be tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Drain requirement to overcome
negative pressure in AHU.
x) Multi-Zone Section: Provide multi-zone dampers for use with 2 deck system. Casing are to be of
galvanized steel blades with vinyl bulb edging. Provide low leak dampers with bronze end and
side seals, locked in position to common shaft with rotation angles of 90*, requiring one actuator
8 / 14
MEP
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
per zone. Damper rods rotate in nylon bushings.
xi) Access Sections: Access sections are to be 24 (600 mm) deep. Provide access doors of
galvanized steel flush mounted, with gasket, latch and handle assembly.
xii) Diffuser Section: to be mounted on leaving side of supply fan section providing uniform air
distribution across downstream components. Perforated diffuser plate are to be secured over
blast area of fan to disperse airflow.
xiii) Air Blender Section: Provide air blender for proper air mixing and diffusion of the outside and
return airstreams. Provide proper spacing in the direction of airflow as recommended by the
blender manufacturer.
f) Fan Sections
i) Centrifugal fans are to be rated in accordance with AMCA procedure, and are to bear the AMCA
seal. Fans are to be Class I, II, or III as recommended by AMCA based on both operating
pressures and maximum tip speed.
ii) Fan blades are to be of the air foil type and sized for non-overloading power characteristic. In
the areas where a significant energy savings is not justified the use of backward inclined blades
are permissible. Wheels are to be both statically and dynamically balanced after assembly, and
accurately aligned before shipment. The Contractor are to check for alignment and correct any
misalignment occurring during shipment. Blades are to be continuously welded to hub plate and
inlet rim.
iii) Shafts are to be of Solid A.I.S.I. C-1040 or 1045 hot rolled steel, accurately turned, ground and
polished.
iv) Fan housing are to be airtight construction with the side sheets fastened to the scroll sheets
either by a lock seam or by continuous welding. Bolts, screws, or rivets will not be acceptable.
Fan outlet are to have a rolled, sloping type cut off to minimize air pulsation at the discharge
and to provide a more uniform discharge velocity. On double width fans, a double sloping Vee
type cut off are to be provided. Fan outlet cone are to be of one piece construction, spun and
contoured to smoothly match the inlet rim of the fan wheel inlet, and discharge duct collars are
to be drilled or punched at regular intervals to facilitate connection of ductwork.
v) Bearings are to be precision anti-friction, pillow block, either ball or roller type, and are to be
selected based on an average minimum life of 60,000 full load hours. Extended oilers are to be
provided where bearings are inaccessible due to fan arrangement or ductwork. Bearings are to
be self-aligning and prevent leakage of oil or grease.
vi) Fan parts are to be given a bonding coat before painting. After the cleaning and surface
conditioning process, but before final assembly, parts are to be spray painted with one coat
of grey primer finisher. A second coat of the same paint are to be applied to the exterior and
accessible interior surfaces after the fan is assembled. Shafts are to be shipped with a rust
preventative coating.
vii) Inlet screens are required for DWDI fans, constructed for easy removal, of 2 wire mesh. Where
inlet bearings are used, screens are to be mounted inside these bearings. Each air-handling unit
are to be equipped with a return fan to allow for free cooling and appropriate pressurization.
MEP 9 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
viii) Where fan scroll is 19 or more in width, an access door are to be provided. The door are to be
of the pan type set in a raised frame so that the inner surface is flush with the scroll. The door
and frame are to be arranged for insulation where required. The door are to be secured to the
frame by hand grip bolts, and are to be provided with lift handles. Providing the local climate
warrants air handling units are to be equipped with economizers, this will utilize free cooling
during shoulder periods.
ix) Fans are to be selected for quiet operation. Fans are to be driven with V-belt drive. Sheaves
are to be adjustable ratio type, of steel and of approved make; they are to be sized to give the
required fan speed with the motor sheave at about the middle of its range of adjustment with
10% possible variation. There are to be at least two belts, capable of carrying the entire load
with one belt broken. Furnish and install belt guards of perforated metal for sheaves and belts.
x) Wherever applicable, the use of 2 speed motors is to be considered.
xi) Vibration isolators are to be provided.
xii) Axial flow fans and in-line centrifugal fans are to be used with caution and only for operations
where noise level is of secondary importance and for systems with low static pressure.
xiii) Provide access to coils from connection side of unit for service and cleaning. Enclose coil
headers and return bends fully within unit casing. Fabricate coil connections, vents and drains
to extend beyond unit casing including grommets for an airtight unit casing. Coils are to be
removable through side panels and/or top panels of unit without removal and disassembly of
entire section.
g) Coil Sections
i) Provide stainless steel drain pan located underneath and extending downstream of coil and
intermediate drain pans.
ii) Maximum fin height of cooling coil are to be 45 (1125 mm). Coil sections exceeding 45 (1125
mm) are to have intermediate drain pans.
iii) Cooling coils are to have a fin spacing no greater than 9 fins per inch.
iv) Coil performance data are to be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410 where
applicable.
v) Construction: (i) Tubes: Copper; (ii) Fins: Aluminium mechanically bonded to tubes; (iii) Headers:
Seamless copper with vent and drain connections; Casing: 16 gauge, galvanized steel channels
with 16-gauge center and end supports.
vi) Water cooling and heating coils are to be circuit-drainable with a vent connection at the highest
point and a drain connection at the lowest point. Coil headers are to be copper with steel male
pipe connections.
h) Air Filters
i) Selection of filters is to be based on air quality requirements.
ii) For central air conditioning systems, high efficiency filters, high capacity filters (minimum 85%
efficient) with pre-filters (minimum 30% efficient) are to be selected.
iii) For ventilation systems, serving utility areas, throw away type filters (minimum 30% efficient)
are applicable.
iv) Filters used in conjunction with the fan coil units are to be of the throw away type, one inch thick
and of uniform and standard size to fit the frames. 10 / 14
MEP
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
v) Where throw away or replaceable type filters are used one set of spare filters are to be provided,
these to be in addition to a new filter being installed on acceptance of each unit.
vi) Filters are to be easily accessible for replacement.
vii) Magnehelic differential air pressure gauges are to be installed across filter banks on air handling
units to monitor condition of filters.
viii) Filter manufacturer is to be or the equivalent of American Air Filter.
i) Motor, Starters and Electric Motors

i) All electrical motors driving heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment are to be furnished
and installed by the Mechanical Contractor and are to be wired by the Electrical Contractor. All
motors are to be of proper power and speed to suit the specified makes of equipment. Power are
to be adequate not only for the specified point of performance of a piece of equipment but for a
reasonable deviation from this point. Motor driving equipment with limited load characteristics
(such as backward curved blade centrifugal fans) are to be sized for that limit load.
ii) Motor control centres are to be provided to suite the application
iii) Motor controllers subject to automatic control are to be of the automatic type with relays,
interlocks, push buttons, switches, pilot lights, overload and low voltage protection, etc. Only
controllers for small motors not subject to automatic control may be of the manual type, but they
also are to have overload protection. Controllers for large motors (size depending on current
characteristics, limitations of electrical system and starting torque of driven equipment) are to
be of the reduced voltage type.
iv) Electric motors are to conform to EEMAC Standard MG1, applicable IEEE Standards and the
requirements of the Authority.
v) Generally motors less than HP size are to be single phase, 115 volt, 60 cycle, A.C. condenser
type and motors HP size and larger are to be 3-phase, 60 cycle, 1750 RPM, EEMAC design
A, B or C for normal or high starting torque as required by the application.
vi) Details of electrical requirements are to be in accordance with electrical Standards.
vii) Motors are to be of quiet operating type guaranteed to fulfil the specified requirements without
producing any sound audible outside of machine rooms. Motors installed are to be products of
a single manufacturer.
viii) Motors and accessories are to comply with NEMA standards and are to include a service
factor.
ix) Electric drive motors are to be energy efficient and of high efficiency.
5 DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
a) Design Guidelines
i) Maintain absolute minimum total system static pressure in view of the fact that control for sound
power level increases as 20 log 10 of static pressure.
ii) In areas where the usage profile is varying or the system serves multiple exposures a VAV
system with individual control is to be considered.
MEP 11 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
iii) Maintain absolute minimum duct velocities commensurate with economic and space
limitations:
Main Duct
Area Velocities (fpm)
Hotel Bedroom 1000
Boardrooms 1200
Meeting Rooms, Ballroom 800
General Offices 1000
Restaurants 1500
iv) The generation of noise at duct fittings on low velocity (under 2000 fpm) systems is usually of no
consequence. Doubling of these velocities increases the sound power level (SPL) of fittings by
approximately 15 db. In high velocity systems, available information from duct manufacturers
indicates fitting can become a significant noise source. Therefore, these system designs are to
avoid components such as mitred elbows, conventional and acoustical turning vanes, bullhead
tees, balancing dampers, splitters, and in stream fire dampers.
v) Select the proper central fan on the basis of the manufacturers certified SPL ratings at full-load
and at part-load conditions if subjected to variable speed. If manufacturers ratings are not
available, ASHRAE has a table that can be used to determine a rough estimate of sound power
levels for the most popular types of fans used today.
vi) From an energy standpoint, the final selection of fan type is to be based on brake horsepower
(bhp) consumption through all phases of part-loading, rather than on the SPL ratings. However,
the designer is to evaluate the effect of any acoustic penalty.
vii) Be aware of the acoustical effect of the selected air volume modulating device at the central fan.
Although variable-speed drives are the most costly, they also are the most energy-efficient at
part-loading conditions and contribute nothing to the system noise level, if designed to modulate
fan speed within the manufacturers performance limitations. On the other hand, a variable inlet
vane increases system sound levels in low-frequency bands.
viii) Provide inlet and outlet fan duct connections, in accordance with Sheet Metal and Air
Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) recommendations and accepted
industry practice, to maintain a minimum effect on system static pressures, system sound levels
and the manufacturers fan curve.
ix) As stated by ASHRAE, Variations from accepted (duct connection) application arrangements
can severely degrade both the aerodynamic and acoustic performance of any fan type and
invalidate manufacturers ratings or other performance predictions.
x) Designers are to be familiar with system effect factors (static pressure losses) established
through research studies, published by fan manufacturers and readily available from the Air
Moving and Conditioning Association Inc. (AMCA Publication 201 Fans and Systems).
xi) Size the air distribution ductwork on the basis of the Static Regain Method (SRM). This will
assure a relatively stable entering static pressure at each VAV regulator as well as reductions in
central fan horsepower, system sound levels, balancing costs and operating costs.
xii) Initial installation costs are higher than in a system sized on the basis of the Equal Friction
Method, due to an approximate increase of 10% to 15% in the amount of sheet metal used.
Primary air ducts are virtually the same size for either method, but the branches and run outs
are larger with the SRM method.
MEP 12 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
xiii) However, a potential 5% to 10% reduction in fan horsepower, along with improved system
acoustical performance at the fan. VAV regulators and terminal diffusers, demands that the SRM
sizing procedure be given every consideration.
xiv) Although the calculations are more laborious, software programs are available to expedite the
design without an undue penalty on the designers time.
xv) Select pressure-independent low-pressure VAV regulators to serve each occupied space, and
limit the supply duct connection to either galvanized metal or to a maximum of five feet of
bonded aluminium flex with no more than a 45 degree bend.
xvi) Volume regulation requires automatic restriction of normal air passage, which increases air
velocity through the passage and noise in the occupied space. Most outlet silencing equipment
carries with it a static pressure penalty.
xvii) The pressure-independent requirement is mandatory, as there is no known system concept
(including Static Regain) capable of ensuring a constant entering static pressure to regulators
on a VAV system under all operating conditions. Limiting flexible connections to five feet
would eliminate the current practice of installing flex in a variety of contortions, and also would
eliminate the need for increasing system static pressures to overcome the resulting pressure
drops. Aluminium flex construction is self-supporting and estimates the drooping and sagging
that contributes to further pressure drops.
xviii) Avoid installation of balancing dampers as an integral part of the diffuser. If there are multiple
areas served by one VAV regulator, install balancing dampers in the branch run outs to the
diffusers as far from the outlet as physically possible.
xix) Strive for the best possible air approach configuration to the outlet in order to achieve uniform
face velocities. Poor approach conditions create high velocities across a portion of diffuser
vanes and can increase sound levels to as much as 10 to 20 dB above the manufacturers
catalogue ratings.
xx) Provide a minimum 1-in (25mm) acoustical lining on all low velocity supply ducts and fittings, and
also employ fiberglass with perforated inner liners on all medium and high velocity systems.
xxi) Realistically, acoustical lining reduces overall system noise levels, but its prime functions are
thermal insulation and condensation control (suggesting that acoustical lining be renamed
thermal lining.)
xxii) Sound attenuation tests on acoustical lining by various agencies and manufacturers show a
wide variation in dB reduction depending on duct lengths and duct sizes. Generally speaking,
attenuation is best in the 500 to 4,000 Hz frequency bands, and very limited in low frequency
bands. Acoustical lining does not eliminate rumble. Attenuation is high in small ducts, but
gradually deteriorates as ducts increase in size.
xxiii) If acoustics is a foreign subject, consult with those who are entirely devoted to this highly complex
phase of the HVAC industry. Expertise is available from a variety of sources, including acoustical
consultants, equipment manufacturers and often from local equipment representatives.
xxiv) Where sound levels are not within acceptable noise levels ensure appropriate silencers are
selected to provide the appropriate sound attenuation.
xxv) Ensure the VAV box locations are provided with the appropriate access for servicing, etc. and
that careful coordination with the interior designer has taken place.
MEP 13 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS F
xxvi) Select terminal ceiling diffusers or booted-plenum slots specifically designed for VAV air
distribution from the standpoint of minimum dumping action at reduced air volumes, and from
the standpoint of sound levels at the maximum cfm delivery. No sound attenuation can be
installed between the air outlet and the human ear therefore, limit diffuser sound power levels
to the following:
Band, Hz SPL
63 60
125 52
250 46
500 40
1,000 36
2,000 34
4,000 34
8,000 34
MEP 14 / 14
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
G INSULATION, SUPPORT + ISOLATION
1 General ...................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
2 Insulation ............................................................................................. 1
a) Minimum Requirements
b) Piping
c) Ductwork
e) Equipment
3 Support + Isolation ....................................................................... 4

a) Hangers, Anchors + Supports
b) Equipment Support + Vibration Isolation
c) Foundations, Hangers + Supports
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS G
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) This section describes the insulation, support and vibration isolation requirements for piping,
ductwork and equipment.
ii) Insulation systems include both the insulating and finishing materials.
2 INSULATION
a) Minimum Requirements
i) Insulation requirements are to be in accordance with the more stringent requirements of either
ASHRAE/IES standard 90.1 (latest edition) or local code requirements. Insulation thickness
and performances specified herein this section are general requirements only and are to be
confirmed by the project consultant.
ii) The insulating material thickness used for fittings and valves are to be not less than that for
adjoining straight pipe.
iii) All pipe covering of cold pipes in fan and machine rooms and wherever else exposed to view are
to be canvassed with 8 ounce canvas pasted over resin sized paper using Arabol or Benjamin
Foster adhesive. Pipe covering of hot pipes in fan and machine rooms, and wherever else
exposed to view, are to be furnished with 8 ounce factory applied canvas jacket, pasted with
Benjamin Foster 30-36. Eight (8) ounce canvas jackets are to receive one coat of Benjamin
Foster finish sizing applied in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
iv) Insulation on hot pipes are to be protected by saddles from hangers, guides, and rollers.
Insulation on cold pipes are to be protected from hangers, guides and rollers by metal shields.
Hangers are to not pierce insulation. Where fibreglass insulation is used on piping 2 and larger,
a half section of Kaylo or cork pipe covering of equal thickness are to be used at metal shields.
v) Refrigerant suction piping are to be insulated with 2 thick PF fibreglass with flameproof vapour
barrier. Fittings are to be wrapped as described for chilled water piping. If the section piping is
installed in a ceiling not serving as a return plenum, foam rubber insulation such as Armstrong
may be used, subject to local codes.
vi) All vapor barriers are to be completely sealed against moisture penetration.
vii) In kitchen and laundry areas stainless steel or aluminum jackets are to be installed over the
insulation on piping below 8 above finished floor level.
viii) All elbows, flanges, valves, etc. are to be insulated with Manville Zeston or equivalent, one piece
PVC insulated fitting covers on chilled water pipework.
b) Piping
Provide piping insulation for systems described as follows:
i) Steam (60 to 150 psig) up to 2: 2thick calcium silicate. 12#/cu.ft. density.

ii) Steam (30 to 60 psig) up to 4: 1 thick calcium silicate 12#/cu.ft. density.
iii) Steam (low pressure) up to 1: Fiberglass standard insulation, 1-
MEP iv) Steam (low pressure) larger than 1 less than 6: Fiberglass standard insulation, 2 1/6
2007 INSULATION, SUPPORT + ISOLATION
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS G
v) Steam (low pressure) 8 & larger: Fiberglass standard insulation, 3-
vi) Condensate and drip (serving systems less than 30 psig) up to 2: Fiberglass standard pipe
steam insulation, 1 thick.
vii) Pumped condensate: Fiberglass low pressure pipe insulation,
viii) Hot water piping: Manville Corp. Micro-Lock 850 or equal with factory applied all purpose flame
retardant vapor barrier jacket. Joints sealed with adhesive. Up to 4 pipe - 1 thick. 5 or larger
pipe - 2 thick.
ix) Chilled water: Fiberglass and return white dual-temperature pipe insulation, up to 4 piping - 1
thick. 5 and larger 2 thick.
x) Fresh water: Fiberglass low pressure pipe insulation, 1 thick, white fire retardant jacket
xi) Domestic water (up to 2): Fiberglass standard insulation, 1
xii) Domestic water (2 & larger): Fiberglass standard insulation, 1
xiii) Tempered water: Fiberglass standard insulation, 1
xiv) Electric heat tracing: Fiberglass standard insulation, 2
c) Ductwork
Provide ductwork insulation for systems described as follows:
i) Outside air intake ducts, return air ducts in unconditioned spaces including plenums, exhaust
ducts between automatic louver damper and discharge to atmosphere: See subparagraph
Acoustic Treatment
ii) Air plenums and fans for A/C supply systems: 1/2 thick 6 pound density fiberglass vapor seal
FF board, applied with hexagon wire and finished with 1/2 finishing cement.
iii) Air conditioning supply ducts exposed in conditioned areas: 1 thick 6 pound density fiberglass
vapor seal FF board hexagon wire and 1/2 cement finish. Except that where stiffening angles
are 1 1/2 thick and finished with 9 oz. canvas applied with Benjamin Foster 30-36 adhesive.
iv) Air conditioning supply ducts concealed in unconditioned spaces: 1 thick, pound density
fiberglass blanket with flame resistant aluminum foil face backed with kraft paper, lapped and
tied with fiberglass cord. All butt joints sealed with adhesive.
v) All other air conditioning supply ducts in conditioned spaces and in hung ceilings above
conditioned spaces: Same as above, except 3/4 thick. Final branches to and internally lined
portions of ducts need not be insulated.
vi) Pans under cooling coils and dehumidifiers: 2 thick cork board or Armaflex.
vii) Kitchen range hood exhaust ducts and fans: 2 thick calcium silicate 12 lbs./cu.ft.
viii) Laundry supply duct to be insulated regardless of whether air conditioned or not: 1 thick 3/4
pound density fiberglass blanket with flame resistant aluminum, foil face backed with draft paper,
lapped and tied with fiberglass cord. Butt joints sealed with adhesive.
ix) Boiler breeching: 3 thick Manville Corp. Thermo 12 or equivalent, wired in place.
x) Laundry exhaust and drying tumbler: 1 thick 6 pound Manville Corp., Owens Corning or
as approved density fiberglass vapor exhaust seal. Metal corner beads to be applied to the
external corners of cement finish of insulation on intakes, casings, ducts, etc. Vapor barriers to
be completely sealed.
MEP 2/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS G
i) Engineered sound absorbers are to be used in high pressure systems in central locations near
fan discharge and at local attenuation devices.
ii) Provide acoustic duct lining of at least one inch thickness in the following ducts:
iii) In the discharge and intake duct of each low pressure air handling unit for a distance of at least
15 feet and longer if needed.
iv) Acoustic linings are to be neoprene or vinyl coated fiberglass of 1-1/2 pound density, as
manufactured by Owens-Corning, or as approved. Dimensions of lined ducts shown on drawings
are the inside dimensions of the duct after the lining has been installed.
v) All air systems are to be carefully designed to maintain a noise level within the conditioned
spaces compatible with the type of occupancy of the rooms.
e) Equipment
i) Insulation which is applied to equipment having renewable heads and/or access plates such
as heat exchangers, the top sections of horizontally split case pumps and the suction side of
vertically split case pumps are to be applied in a manner which will permit easy removal and
replacement of the insulation. In general this are to be accomplished by encasing the insulation
in sheet metal boxes which are bolted together.
ii) Insulate the following equipment with blanket type fiberglass insulation (without vapor barrier
backing) of the thickness noted:
domestic hot water storage tanks 900 mm diameter and smaller 75 mm thick;
domestic hot water storage tanks larger than 900 mm diameter 88 mm thick;
heating convertors or exchangers 50 mm thick;
condensate receivers 50 mm thick;
blowdown tank 38 mm thick;
iii) Insulate the following equipment with closed cell flexible elastomeric insulation of the thickness
noted:
refrigeration machine cooler water box covers 19 mm;
refrigeration machine compressor suction housing 19 mm;
refrigeration machine cooler relief valves and float chamber 19 mm;
Expansion and flash tanks 25mm;
iv) Ensure that insulation on refrigeration machine cooler water boxes is applied in a manner that
will allow removal of covers for servicing of the cooler tube bundles.
v) Insulate the following equipment with flexible polyolefin type insulation of the thickness noted:
water meters 39 mm thick;
chilled water and domestic water pump casings 38 mm thick;
vi) Insulate the following equipment with calcium silicate type insulation of the thickness noted:
emergency power engine-generator set exhaust system silencers 75 mm thick;
MEP 3/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS G
boiler breaching and stack where inside the building 75 mm thick;
deaerating feed water heating 50 mm thick.
3 SUPPORT AND INSULATION
a) Hangers, Anchors and Supports

i) Suitable and substantial hangers and supports are to be provided for horizontal lines. Main
lines, and other large or heavy pipes are to be carried by pipe hangers supported by beams
clamps of approved design wherever possible.
ii) Where hangers cannot be supported from building steel framing, they may be supported from
concrete inserts. Inserts are to be constructed of malleable iron, and are to have space for rods
of all sizes. Inserts for pipes 3 and larger in size are to be installed with a reinforcing rod 5/8 in
diameter, run through a slot in the insert specifically provided for this purpose.
iii) Piping is to be anchored where required to localize expansion or to prevent undue strain on
piping and branches. Anchors are to be entirely separate from hangers and to be of heavy
forged or welded construction of approved design.
iv) Hangers for cold piping is to support the pipe without piercing the insulation. Insulation shields
are to be used to protect the insulation on cold pipes. Insulation protection saddles are to be
welded to insulated hot pipes at roller supports. Wherever fiberglass pipe installation is installed,
rigid insulation of equivalent thermal resistance is to be installed in lieu of the fiberglass wherever
hangers and insulation shields are installed.
v) Piping is to be installed and hung in such a manner as to preclude the interruption of service to
any other system in the case of maintenance requirements of one system.
vi) Equipment is to be piped with unions or flanges to allow for removal without cutting of pipe, this
includes steam traps, PRV stations, etc.
vii) All such piping is to be hung or supported on resilient hangers or supports. These hangers are
to be combination rubber-in-shear and spring hangers.
viii) The mechanical contractor is to guarantee that mechanical systems will not transmit objectionable
noise or vibration to any occupied parts of the building, and is to assume responsibility for any
modification to the equipment, foundations or supports, necessary to mitigate noise or vibration
concerns.
ix) Horizontal piping is to be supported in accordance with the following schedule:
Pipe Size Maximum Hanger Spacing Rod Size
1 and smaller 6 0 3/8
1 to 2 9 0 3/8
2 to 4 10 0 2
6 and larger 12 0 2
b) Equipment Support and Vibration Isolation

i) General
All equipment, piping, etc. are to be mounted on or suspended from approved foundations
and supports. The following standard are to serve as a guide.
MEP 4/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS G
All concrete foundations, pads and supports including inertia blocks (in metal pan forms)
suspended by vibration isolating devices will be furnished and installed by the General
Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor are to furnish the General Contractor shop
drawings and details. The Contractor are to furnish and set anchor bolts and vibration
isolating devices.
All structural steel and pipe supports for equipment, piping, etc. are to be furnished and
installed by the mechanical contractor.
ii) All floor-mounted equipment are to be erected on 4 high concrete pads over the complete
floor area under the equipment, unless specified to the contrary here in. Wherever hereinafter
vibration eliminating devices and/or concrete inertia blocks are specified, these items are to be
mounted upon 4 high concrete pads.
iii) Mounting of Centrifugal Refrigeration Units
The units are to be mounted on ribbed neoprene pads with or without springs as is the
standard of the manufacturer. When the installation requires that centrifugal refrigeration
units or any other heavy duty moving equipment be installed in an area adjacent or above
(such as roof mounting) guest or public areas, special consideration is to be given to the
acoustical effect. Special mounting and soundproofing of the area may be required and is
to be provided based on the studies of an acoustical engineers survey.
iv) Mounting of Centrifugal Pumps
Units are to be mounted on a reinforced concrete base having a weight equal to 12
times the weight of the pump assembly and contained water, but not less than 12 high.
Concrete base are to be supported by vibration absorbing mounts, which in turn are to be
mounted on a 4-inch high concrete pad.
Vibration absorbing mounts are to consist of combination spring and neoprene mounts.
v) Mounting of Factory Assembled Supply and Exhaust Units & Fans
Floor mounted units are to be supported by spring and rubber vibration isolation mounts
which in turn are to rest upon concrete pads.
Ceiling hung units are to be avoided wherever possible. If used, they are to conform to the
following specifications:
Ceiling hung units are to be mounted on a rigid steel channel or angle iron frame which
in turn are to be hung by means of hanger rods suspended through cup type spring and
rubber-in-shear vibration isolation supports.
Ceiling hung centrifugal fans are to be mounted on a platform consisting of 2 thick boards,
covered with 18 gauge galvanized sheet metal, securely fastened to 10 gauge metal pan
turned up 2 on all sides, which is to be hung from the structure slab above by means
of hanger rods suspended through cup type spring and neoprene (or rubber) in shear
supports.
vi) Furnish and install supports for equipment furnished under the Contract. To meet the varying
conditions in each case, these supports are to consist of pipe stands, steel angle or strap hangers,
saddles, brackets, etc., as shown or approved. Supports are to have substantial flanges, bolted
to floor construction; hangers are to be supported from the framing as described herein above.
Supports are to be properly located with reference to any supporting pads, legs, etc., of the
equipment carried, and are to be of a quantity, and so distributed as not to cause undue strain
upon the shells.
MEP 5/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS G
vii) Provide suitable brackets, pipe stands, piers, or other supports, for float traps, receivers,
tempering stacks, air filters, mixing and control dampers securely clamped to beams, columns,
or bearing walls
viii) All equipment are to be provided with such isolation equipment and mountings as is necessary
to eliminate noise and, or vibration transmission to adjacent areas.
ix) All equipment is to be approved by a specialist independent acoustic engineer and by the
manufacturer of the item being isolated.
c) Foundations, Hangers and Supports

i) Equipment, piping, and services are to be mounted on or suspended from approved foundations
and supports.
ii) Concrete foundations, pads and supports including inertia blocks (in metal pan forms) suspended
by vibration isolating devices are to be provided by the General Contractor. The Mechanical
Contractor is to furnish the General Contractor with shop drawings and details. The Contractor
is to furnish and set anchor bolts and vibration isolating devices.
iii) All structural steel and pipe supports for equipment, piping, and services is to be provided by
the mechanical contractor.
iv) All floor mounted equipment is to be erected on 4 high concrete pads over the complete
floor area under the equipment, unless specified to the contrary here in. Wherever hereinafter
vibration eliminating devices and/or concrete inertia blocks are specified, these items are to be
mounted upon 4 high concrete pads unless specified to the contrary herein.
v) Centrifugal Pumps are to be mounted on a reinforced concrete base having a weight equal
to 12 times the weight of the pump assembly and contained water, but not less than 12 high.
Concrete base is to be supported by vibration absorbing mounts which in turn is to be mounted
on a 4 inch high concrete pad.
vi) Vibration absorbing mounts are is to consist of combination spring and neoprene mounts.
vii) All water piping is to be hung or supported on resilient hangers or supports. These hangers are
to be combination rubber-in-shear and spring hangers.
viii) The mechanical contractor is to guarantee that work as installed will not result in the transmission
of objectionable noise or vibration to any occupied parts of the building, and the mechanical
contractor is to take full responsibility for any necessary modifications of equipment, or of the
foundations and supports for the same, necessary to secure this result.
MEP 6/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
H FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
1 General ...................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
b) Codes + Standards
c) Fire Extinguishers
2 Smoke + Fire Venting .................................................................. 2

a) Smoke Control System
b) Venting to Aid Fire Fighting
c) High Rise, Atria + Other Special Considerations
3 Wet Protection Systems ........................................................... 2

a) Water Supply
b) Automatic Sprinklers
c) Standpipe + Hose Systems
d) Fire Hose Cabinets
4 Special Protection Systems .................................................. 4

a) General
b) Kitchen
c) Computer Room
d) Laundry Chutes
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS H
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) It is not the intention of these guidelines to prevent the use of systems, methods or devices
of equivalent quality, strength, fire resistance, effectiveness, durability and safety to those
prescribed, providing technical data is submitted to demonstrate equivalency and the system,
method or device is approved for the intended purpose.
ii) In the application of these guidelines, the intent is for each facility and condition to be analyzed
based on the specific characteristics of the structure, its occupants and operation and that
reasonable judgement be exercised in determining the fire protection programme for a specific
facility
b) Codes and Standards

i) Building fire protection engineering requirements are to meet the minimum requirements
contained herein or the applicable Building Code, whichever is the more restrictive.
ii) The products, devices and assemblies that are subject to testing laboratory criteria installed are
to be of a type certified to the appropriate standard by a Nationally recognized testing agency
(such as UL, ULC, FM, CSA, etc.) and installed in accordance with the requirements of the
listing.
iii) Provide sprinkler systems designed in accordance with NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler
Systems, using hydraulic method for hazard classification, design densities and design areas
for the facility. Provide hydraulic calculations based on water supply test results, down-rated in
accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
iv) Provide standpipe and hose systems in accordance with NFPA 14, Standard for the Installation
of Standpipe, Private Hydrants, and Hose Systems, with header assembly, piping, supervised
valves, Fire Department Connections (Siamese connection), firehose cabinets and hoses as
either a stand alone system or combined with sprinkler system, hydraulically sized using water
supply flow test data.
v) Fire extinguishers are to be provided in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 10, Portable fire
Extinguishers.
vi) The facility is to be provided with at least one water supply designed in accordance with NFPA
13 Installation Sprinkler Systems, and NFPA 14 Standpipe and Hose Systems.
vii) Design fire protection systems for kitchen hoods to be provided by the specialist kitchen
consultant in accordance with NFPA 96: Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations, which set the minimum fire safety requirements (preventative
and operative) related to the design, installation, operation, inspection, and maintenance of all
public and private cooking operations.
c) Fire Extinguishers
i) Fire extinguishers are to be provided in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 10, Portable
fire Extinguishers. Fire extinguishers will generally be installed in cabinets together with a fire
department connection.
ii) Extinguishers are to be mounted in recessed cabinets with doors selected by Interior Designer.
MEP 1/4
2007 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS H
iii) The above units are in addition to those specified extinguishers located in fire hose cabinets
throughout back of house and public areas.
iv) A, B and C type extinguishers are to be located as follows:
20 lbs extinguishers - 2 in main kitchen

- 1 in staff cafeteria
- 1 in bake shop
- 1 in laundry
10 lbs. extinguishers - in each electrical room
- 1 in each mechanical room
- 1 in each elevator machine room
- 1 in each pantry
- 1 in doormans room
- 1 in maintenance room
5 lbs. extinguishers - 1 in rear projection room.
2 SMOKE AND FIRE VENTING
a) Smoke Control System

i) The smoke control system will conform to the requirements of the International Building Code,
NFPA and local codes as required.
b) Venting to Aid Fire Fighting

i) Venting of each floor area to be provided by operable windows. Operable guestroom windows
are acceptable.
ii) The hotel air exhaust system may be used to remove smoke from fires provided it is designed
for such a function and override controls are provided for the smoke detection system.
c) High Rise, Atria and Other Special Conditions

i) Provide ventilation, smoke venting or pressurization required or prescribed by local codes or the
authority having jurisdiction when building configuration requires.
3 WET PROTECTION SYSTEMS
a) Water Supply
i) Unless specifically prohibited by local bylaws, the standpipe and hose, and sprinkler systems
are to be from a common riser with the same Siamese connections used for both systems.
ii) Where possible, two service connections of minimum size 6 inches are to be made to two
different streets to supply the fire protection systems in the property.
iii) In seismic risk areas an outside water supply are to be provided.
iv) The volume and pressure required will be dependent upon the design and location of the property
and are to be determined by professional advice following an analysis of the project.
MEP 2/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS H
v) Where water for fire protection purposes is required to be metered, only a fire service meter
certified for the purpose by Underwriters Laboratories or Factory Mutuals are to be used.
b) Automatic Sprinklers
i) A wet pipe system of automatic sprinklers are to be installed throughout all areas of the hotel
in conformance with the requirements of NFPA 13 Latest Edition, Installation of Sprinkler
Systems, and are to be hydraulically designed.
ii) Sprinkler system flow alarms are to be zoned by floors to parallel fire alarm zones.
iii) All systems are to be equipped with a water flow alarm and supervisory signal that will transmit
an alarm directly to the Fire Department, to a central station or to a central alarm and control
facility rated as a proprietary system.
iv) Every water supply valve controlling sprinklers are to be equipped with an electrically supervised
switch for transmitting a signal to an annunciator in the event of a movement of the valve
handle.
v) Automatic sprinklers may be omitted from guestroom bathrooms not exceeding 55 sq.ft. in
area provided the bathtubs are metallic or non-combustible material, floors are ceramic tile or
equivalent, vanity tops are non-combustible, vanity bases are solid wood and wall coverings are
of ceramic tile or a material having a flame spread rating of 25 or less.
vi) Automatic sprinklers may be omitted from closets in guestrooms provided the closet is less than
24 square feet in area, has an automatic sprinkler head within 5 feet of the closet and is either
open to the room or has doors that will provide an ineffective barrier to the passage of heat and
air.
vii) Sprinkler Heads
viii) Public Areas: are to be fully recessed and concealed. Finish to match interior design.
ix) Guestrooms: are to be chrome plated semi recessed type as Reliable Model A or similar.
Sprinkler heads in wood panelling are to be oil rubbed bronze.
x) Back of House: Pendant type with chrome plated finish when located in suspended ceilings
and brass finish when fully exposed. Except office areas where they are to be chrome plated
semi-recessed type.
xi) Spares: Provide 6 sprinkler heads of each type and 2 sprinkler wrenches mounted in a cabinet
in engineers store room.
xii) A sample of each type of sprinkler head are to be submitted to FSHR for approval.
c) Standpipe and Hose Systems

i) Class 1 standpipe systems are to be installed throughout the hotel in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 14.
ii) Dry standpipe system are to not be permitted.
d) Fire Hose Cabinets

i) Metal doors without glass vision panels are to be provided in all instances permitted by Code.
ii) In walls finished with vinyl or fabric, the door to the cabinet will finish flush with the face of the
wall and the vinyl or fabric will be carried over the panel and finished with a knife cut around the
door.
MEP 3/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS H
iii) In walls finished with wood panelling or similar, the access doors are to be recessed to receive
the finish and the panelling will be carried over the door.
4 SPECIAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS

a) General
i) Special protection is required from the fire protection system to address special hazard areas.
ii) The type of system installed are to be based upon professional advice following and analysis of
the hazards involved.
b) Kitchen
i) The kitchen range hood and exhaust system for deep fat frying is a special hazard. These
systems are typically protected by water wash-down hood or hoods equipped with an Ansul dry
chemical system.
c) Computer Room
i) The main computer room is another special hazard. This system is to be protected with a pre-
action sprinkler zone, where water is not introduced into the dry sprinkler piping in the computer
room unless two cross-linked smoke detectors confirm a fire condition.
d) Laundry Chutes
i) Provide sprinkler heads and fire separations required by local codes or authority having
jurisdiction where laundry chute penetrations of multiple floors in high-rise buildings require
protection.
MEP 4/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
I ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
1 General ...................................................................................................... 1
a) General Requirements
b) Utility
c) Distribution
2 System + Equipment ...................................................................... 1

a) High Voltage Service
b) Utility Pad Mount Transformer
c) Secondary Switchboard Room
d) Low Voltage Switchboards
e) Power Factor Correcting Equipment
f) Voltage Regulation Equipment
g) Dry Type Transformers
h) Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors
i) Panelboards
j) Panelboard Feeder Demands, Capacity + Spare
Conduits
k) Disconnect Devices
l) Fuses
m) Motor Starters
n) Conduits + Cables
o) Wall Outlets
p) Point-of-Sale (POS) Equipment
q) Name Plates
3 Grounding/Earthing ..................................................................... 5
4 Testing .................................................................................................... 5
a) Requirements

F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS I
1 GENERAL
This section describes of incoming electric service and power distribution equipment. The system normally
shall be comprised of high voltage switchgear, transformers, switchboards, feeders and panelboards. The
electrical substation redundancy and electric service reliability will be discussed.
The main distribution system provided under this work shall be arranged and equipped to prevent a
total loss of power in the event of maintenance or a failure of any single piece of equipment, bus or
cable in the primary and main secondary distribution. This shall be accomplished by using at least
two transformers, secondary and/or primary tie or transfer switches, standby cable or equivalent in
order to meet this requirement.
b) Utility
Division of responsibility pertaining to electric service shall be negotiated with the local Electrical
Utility based on the best rate structure available, considering and including all costs that may be
incurred. The Owner shall be advised as to the type of service recommended together with all data
pertaining to estimate initial costs and operating costs.
c) Distribution
The distribution system shall generally consist of three voltage levels as follows:
i) High voltage utility distribution levels, such as 34 kv, 13.8 kv, etc.
ii) Low voltage distribution in building, such as 600v, 480v, 400v, 208v, etc.
iii) Extra low voltage (see other sections) distribution in building of 70v or less for systems such
as sound systems, data systems, fire alarm systems, etc.
2 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT
a) High Voltage Service

i) Typically, the high voltage service shall consist of two incoming feeders taken from the local
Electrical Utilitys power system. Both feeders shall be normally energized and a tie breaker
between the feeders is normally open. An automatic transfer shall be used in the event of a
failure of one of the feeders, whereby the tie breaker closes and the property is fed from the
other feeder.
ii) The high voltage switchgear and main power transformers shall be housed in a separate room
structure or area. The requirements will in most cases be established and designed so that
direct access can be made without entering the property building, not only for personnel of the
local Electrical Utility, but for installation and removal of the switchgear or transformers. Such
rooms shall be located as close as possible to the secondary electrical distribution room and
so arranged that ample ventilation can be easily furnished, preferably natural ventilation. The
room shall be a completely separate room structure or area and shall be provided with suitable
ventilation and drainage. The rooms shall be completely free of any air conditioning ductwork or
piping of any kind, with exception of its own ductwork for ventilation purposes.
MEP 1/6
2007 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS I
iii) The main power transformers shall be generally of the following types:
oil filled liquid type with fire rated transformer vault
silicone filled liquid type
cast resin type
iv) The normal practice shall be a double ended substation configuration where the two (2) main
transformers are interconnected on the secondary side via a tie breaker. Each transformer shall
be approximately 65% loaded such that in the event of a single transformer failure the remaining
transformer plus the emergency power generator shall feed the entire load.
v) The requirements for demand and kwh meters shall be coordinated with local electrical Utility.
Metering shall be connected to building management system to provide load profiles, enable
peak demand limiting functions and trending of energy consumption.
b) Utility Pad Mount Transformer

The utility pad mount transformer options might be available for certain projects.
Typically, two (2) pad mount transformers each sized to handle 66% of the building load will be
connected independently (i.e., no parallel operations). In the event of one (1) transformer failure or
during scheduled maintenance procedures, a portion of the loads can be manually shed and the tie
breaker will be closed to restore power to the entire switchboard.
The locations of the pad mount transformers shall be coordinated with Architect and Civil Engineer at
early stage of the project, and suit the system tie-in and utility companys requirements.
c) Secondary Switchboard Room

In most projects, this area shall contain the secondary switchboard and secondary transformers. The
room should be located as close as possible to the high voltage switchgear and Transformer Room
and to the Power Generating Plant in hotels where such an installation is required. Consideration
must also be given to its proximity to the major power load centres such as the Machinery Room,
Guest Tower, Ballrooms, etc. Care must be exercised in the location of this space and of steam and
water lines in the basement to insure against the possibility of moisture from these lines or liquids
leaking from equipment on floors above, from reaching the switchboard and transformer equipment.
i) The Switchboard Room shall be provided with suitable ventilation and drainage. Maintain
space temperature no greater than 80oF (25oC).
ii) The switchgear, main power transformers and secondary Switchboard shall have switchboard
matting for its entire length, front and back.
iii) All bussing and cabling in the power distribution system shall be copper.
d) Low Voltage Switchboards

The switchboard shall be of type with electrically operated, drawout type main air circuit breakers
and secondary distribution moulded case circuit breakers constructed in switchboard configuration.
Bussing shall be copper. A microprocessor based monitoring device shall provide complete electrical
metering of all main service breakers and feeders to chiller plant.
MEP 2/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS I
e) Power Factor Correcting Equipment
To eliminate the adverse effect of low power factor caused by motor loads, computers, luminaire
ballasts, etc., automatic power factor correction equipment shall be installed, in such a way, to increase
the power factor to the desired value of minimum 0.95.
A power factor capacitor system shall be provided that controls and automatically switches in or out
the capacity KVAR modules as required to correct power factor to set level.
Harmonics tuned capacitor bank shall be considered if the harmonic level in the system exceeds the
IEC requirements.
f) Voltage Regulation Equipment

Where local Electrical Utility company supply voltage deviation exceeds 5% of normal stated supply
voltage, regulating equipment shall be provided for the electrically sensitive electronic equipment.
This may include high voltage auto tap changing transformers in areas where the high voltage service
has sag and surges exceeding 5%.
g) Dry Type Transformers

Step-down distribution transformers where there are two levels of utilization voltages within property
buildings shall be dry type transformers with copper windings, K factor rating suitable for non-linear
loads and 2 X 2-1/2% plus/minus tapping.
h) Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors

Transient voltage surge suppression devices shall be designed into the electrical system to protect
the system and equipment from the effects of lightning surges or other transients caused by internal
or external sources such as the local utilitys grid switching use of motors, variable speed drives,
etc.
i) Panelboards
Branch circuit panelboards and distribution panelboards shall have copper bussing. Each flush
mounted branch circuit panelboard shall include two (2) spare empty 1 (25 mm) conduits extending
and terminating above the false ceiling.
j) Panelboard Feeder Demands, Capacity and Spare Conduits

i) All panelboards shall have spare circuits and respective spare feeder capacity for future growth
loads. In general, a minimum of spare or bussed spaces shall be provided as follows: branch
circuit panels - 20%; power and distribution panels - 15%; main switchboard - 10%.
ii) In general, feeders to branch panelboards shall be based on the demand requirements as
follows:
Individual branch circuit panel - 100% of full capacity*
Grouped branch circuit panels:
2 panels - 90% of full capacity (minimum)*
MEP 3/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS I
Lighting distribution boards - 80% of full capacity*
Power troughs, starter racks, etc. - 90% of full capacity*
* Full capacity indicates actual connected load plus nominal spare capacity for future.
iii) Branch panel boards in multiple on a common feeder shall have individual protective circuit
breakers in the mains.
iv) Branch circuit wiring shall be loaded to no more than approximately 70% of maximum circuit
capacity.
v) Provide at least one spare 2 (50mm) diameter empty conduit from the Main Switch Room to the
Roof Elevator Room, for future communications cabling such as satellite dishes, paging, etc.
vi) At each flush mounted branch circuit panel board install at least four empty 3/4 (20mm) conduits
extending from the panelboard and stubbing into the ceiling above.
k) Disconnect Devices
Provide suitable disconnect switches, or lockout control circuit switches at all motors located out of
sight from their controllers. Similarly provide disconnect devices for kitchen and laundry equipment.
Additionally provide a disconnect device for the computer room/switch room in the event of a fire, to
shut down all power quickly and avoid short circuits when water is present.
l) Fuses
Where fuses are used as protective devices, spares shall be provided in a number equal to 10% of
the size and type installed, or where 10% is less than 3, 3 shall be the minimum.
m) Motor Starters
Reduced voltage, multi step motor starters shall be used to reduce inrush currents as required by the
local Electrical Utility or for motors 50 H.P and greater. Local code requirements shall be followed if
they are more stringent.
Motor starters for chillers are to include voltmeters and ammeters, as well as number of starts counters
and elapsed timer.
n) Conduits and Cables

i) Power Distribution All main and distribution power feeders for North American properties shall
be run in galvanized rigid steel conduits or EMT conduits for interior runs; outside North America
(subject to local code approval and if in accordance with local practice) the main and distribution
feeders may be multicore armoured cables run in cable tray; underground distribution over large
areas shall be generally provided in PVC ducts concrete encased.
Branch Circuit Power Wiring to Devices Cables in metallic conduit, or cables in low smoke/
flame PVC conduit. Alternatively, double insulated fire retardant cabling in hollow cavity walls
or ceiling spaces only as allowed by local code requirements. Conduit and outlet boxes must
always be provided in wall cavities.
Branch circuit power wiring to devices in service rooms or flush in concrete walls Cables in
metallic conduit. PVC conduit is acceptable if buried in concrete.
MEP 4/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS I
ii) Fire Alarm Systems Cable in conduit or MICC fire rated cable as required by local code.
Power conductors for life safety systems in high-rise buildings MICC fire rated cable or cable
in conduit with fire rated 1 hour enclosure or embedded in concrete to provide 1 hour fire
protection.
iii) Include for two (2) spare, empty 2 (50mm) diameter conduits extending from main switchgear
to roof or penthouse elevator MER for future expansion of services.
iv) Refer to special system sections for additional wiring and conduit requirements.
o) Wall Outlets
The kitchen shall be wired to provide maximum branch circuit capacity for additional future appliances
and for interchanging the location of smaller appliances as desired by the Owner. It is desirable to
operate all small and portable appliances at the same voltage supplied from wall outlets. Provide a
liberal amount of spare wall outlets for maximum flexibility.
p) Point-of-Sale (POS) Equipment

POS equipment shall be fed from their own separate circuits of dedicated power panels which have
grounds connected to main building ground system.
q) Name Plates
Provide nameplates on each cabinet for power, telephone, radio, video, annunciators, motor controllers
and switches, disconnect devices, contactors, relays and remote alarms. The nameplate shall indicate
the name or function of the item. Exact nomenclature must be approved by FSHR.
3 GROUNDING/EARTHING
A complete earth/ground system shall be provided connecting electrical equipment to main earth electrode.
The design of the system shall be based on the geographical location of the property and shall comply with
local codes. Electronic and communication system equipment shall be grounded to the requirements of the
sensitive equipment based on communication industry standards.
4 TESTING
a) Requirements
In addition to the requirements defined in the General Design Requirements Section, the following
shall be performed:
i) An independent testing company shall perform a coordination study of the distribution system
with curves plotted for the protective devices of the system. The testing company shall also
prepare a coordination study for use in setting of devices. The testing company shall also test
high voltage cables and the distribution equipment.
ii) After the completion of all switchgear, bus duct, switchboard, transformers, motor control
centres transfer switches, panelboards, disconnects, etc. installations, an infrared scan shall
be performed prior to turning over to the Owner. The testing shall include provision of a
MEP 5/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS I
detailed report, including infrared photographs, description of faults and recommendations.
iii) Prior to property opening, all equipment shall be cleaned and required preventative maintenance
shall be performed.
5 TRAINING AND COMMISSIONING
A minimum of 24 hours classroom and on site training for the engineering personnel in the safe operation
and maintenance of the electrical distribution equipment shall be provided.
Include for the startup and initial commissioning of the switchgear, transformers, switchboards, transfer
switches and distribution components by the manufacturer and with such work to be performed under the
supervision of the independent testing and commissioning agency.
MEP 6/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
J EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
a) General Concept + Electric Service Reliability
b) System Description
c) Design Requirements
i) The Americas + Canada
ii) Western Europe, Africa + The Middle East
iii) Eastern Europe
iv) Asia, Australia + Pacific Regions
2 Equipment .............................................................................................. 3
a) Genset
b) Distribution System
c) Control Panel
d) Transfer Switches
e) Other Requirements
f) Connection to BMS
g) Equipment on Emergency Power
h) Battery Powered Lighting Systems
i) Generator Room
3 Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications ............................... 7

b) Equipment Supply

a) Training
b) Testing
5 Warranty .................................................................................................... 8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS J
1 GENERAL
This section describes the requirements of the emergency power system. The system shall be comprised
of the engine generator, control panel, fuel oil system and acoustic silencers.
a) General Concept and Electric Service Reliability

i) The Electrical Consultant shall design the Emergency Power Generation and Distribution
Systems in close co-ordination with the Architect, Interior Designer, Lighting Consultant and
Mechanical Consultant. The Electrical Consultant shall review and co-ordinate in the essential
system design the emergency power requirements (feeders in conduit) of all Divisions. All
design, materials and installations are to conform to local requirements, referenced codes and
FSHR Design Standards.
ii) In determining the requirements for emergency power, the Electrical Consultant shall evaluate
the power source from the local electrical Utility and prepare a qualitative analysis study on the
reliability and quality of power that is provided from the electrical Utility.
Based on this study, the requirements for emergency power can be sized for loads of only
essential systems (i.e. life safety, telecommunications, security, refrigeration, computers, etc.), if
the local electrical Utility service is deemed to be reliable and reasonably regulated. The engine
generator sets would be considered as standby power units for this application.
i) If the electrical Utilitys service is not to be considered as reliable and is poorly regulated, then
emergency power provisions of greater load capacities of the hotel would need to be considered.
The emergency power engine generators would be considered as prime power units for this
application. Generally include for the genset(s) to provide a minimum of 50% of the properties
requirements, and in extreme cases of unreliable source of power, 100% would be required.
This should include all associated loads to allow the public areas operational, in addition to the
specific loads stated later in this Section.
b) System Description
The Emergency Power and Distribution System shall consist of:
i) Engine/Generator Set(s)
ii) Batteries, Starting and Charging Systems
iii) Automatic Transfer Switch(s)
iv) Fuel Oil Storage (piping, fuel tank and day tank) and Transfer System (Mechanical Contractor)
v) Combustion Air Intake System
vi) Engine Exhaust System with muffler and exhaust stack
vii) Vibration and sound attenuation
viii) Engine Jacket Heaters
ix) Engine Cooling System
x) Instrumentation, Protection and Control Equipment, remote status and control panel
xi) Conductors, conduits, raceways, etc.
xii) Emergency Distribution Panelboards and Transformers (As Required)
MEP 1/8
2007 EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS J
xiii) Earthing/Grounding System
xiv) Low fuel to warning light at security office
xv) Other miscellaneous accessories for a complete operating system.
c) Design Requirements
The design and installation of the emergency power generation and power and distribution systems
shall conform to all local requirements and codes. These systems shall, depending upon the
geographical location of the project, conform to but not be limited to the following referenced codes.
In all instances the most stringent standards shall apply and be adhered to.
i) The Americas and Canada

NFPA 37, 99, 110 and NFPA Emergency Standby Power Systems
NFPA 70, National Electric Code
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, Current Edition
ANSI C-2 National Electric Safety Code, Current Edition
The Uniform Building Code, Current Edition
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
ASTM, ANSI, & NEMA
ISO 8528
CSA C282
ii) Western Europe. Africa & The Middle East
NFPA 37, 99, 101, 110, 111
British Standards, Current Edition
IEE Regulations, Current Edition
IEEE, Current Edition
IEC Regulations, Current Edition
UL/CE
ISO8528
iii) Eastern Europe
NFPA 37, 99, 101, 110, 111
DIN/VDE German Standard Institute, Current Edition
UL/CE
ISO 8528
iv) Asia, Australia & Pacific Regions
NFPA 37, 99, 101, 110, 111
British Standards, Current Edition
UL/CE
MEP 2/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS J
2 EQUIPMENT
a) Gensets
The genset(s) shall be new, factory assembled, radiator cooled, diesel driven electric generating
sets including all necessary controls and accessories to comprise a continuous, electric generating
plant. The rating of each engine-generator set shall be based on the total required load in conjunction
with the manufacturers recommendation for maximum running capacity. Electrical characteristics
(voltage, frequency) shall be based on local requirements and the design of the electrical distribution
system. Genset(s) shall be designed to operate at .8 power factor which can be maintained for a
minimum of 48-hours without overheating at genset rated RPM when the set is equipped with all
necessary operating accessories such as air cleaner, radiator fan, lubricating oil pump, governor, ac
current generator and all other engine driven components and accessories.
The genset(s) must meet the following requirements:
i) Speed Regulation - steady state, plus or minus 1%. Transient regulation, 5% of rated speed with
removal of full load: 10% of rate speed with full load steps and a recovery time of five seconds.
ii) Voltage Regulation steady state, plus or minus 2% of rated voltage. Transient regulation, 25%
of rated voltage with full load step and a recovery time of five seconds.
iii) The generator(s) must be capable of handling a 100% load step.
iv) The genset(s) shall:
Automatically start in the event of a commercial power failure or if commercial power
volt age falls below 90% of normal.
Automatically stop when commercial power has been restored to normal levels.
Automatically signal interconnected building system of specifically monitored points.
i) The genset(s) shall be capable of operating for extended periods at light loads and operate at
110% load for 1 hour in twelve (12) at an ambient temperature of 40oC without overheating or
other harmful effects.
ii) All moving parts shall be guarded with screens, shrouds or guards as approved by local
authorities.
b) Distribution System
The distribution system shall be designed to distribute the emergency load among switchboard(s) and
transfer switch(s), with loads grouped generally as follows:
i) Lighting and convenience power

ii) Critical Systems
iii) Life Safety Systems
iv) Mechanical Systems
v) Elevators
The system shall be arranged in such a manner so as to prevent major outages from the loss of a
single switchboard or transfer switch. Configure all switchgear and loads so as to facilitate annual
maintenance of equipment.
MEP 3/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS J
c) Control Panel
Provide an instrument control panel for each genset that will provide data on:
i) Output voltage with selector switch for L1, L2 & L3.

ii) Output amperage with selector switch for L1, L2 & L3.
iii) Frequency
iv) Potentiometers for setting and adjusting voltage and frequency
v) Runtime indicator to 9999.9 hours
vi) Programmable exerciser
vii) Tachometer
viii) Lube oil pressure
ix) Lube oil temperature
x) Coolant temperature
xi) Indicator lights for the position of each transfer switch
xii) Warning and shutdown indicators for over speed, over crank, over voltage, emergency stop, oil
pressure, high temperature and low coolant level.
xiii) Indicator lights for breaker position, red open, green closed
Additionally the instrument control panel shall be equipped with a key operated manual start off
auto start switch. Configure so that the key can only be removed in the auto position. Connect to
BMS and alarm to both BMS and locally with visual and audible indications any time the switch is
taken out of the auto start position. Provide a single large red mushroom head emergency lockout
stop button.
d) Transfer Switches
Automatic transfer switches shall be provided to support the emergency power generation and
distribution system design requirements and shall be provided to conform to local codes and
requirements. The auto transfer switches shall include integral bypass isolation switch, required time
delays to suit specific applications, test switch with TEST, AUTO, OFF and ENGINE START
positions as applicable, in phase monitor, and auxiliary contacts as required for connection to other
building systems.
e) Other Requirements
The genset(s) main breaker(s) shall be manually operated with solid state adjustable trip units, of size
coordinated and recommended by genset supplier and which shall be sized to handled 100% of the
trip setting (300% output for 10 seconds).
Label all electrical generating and distribution equipment with engraved lamacoid identification
nameplates and provide safety/warning/danger signs that conform to local code regulations and
requirements of FSHR.
Design all distribution equipment, disconnect switches etc. so that it may be locked in the off position
for maintenance. In general all equipment must be suitable for lockout and tagout as per local code
regulations and FSHR requirements.
MEP 4/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS J
f) Connection to BMS
Connect and monitor the following statuss to the BMS:
i) Generator Status
ii) Generator Fail to Start
iii) Generator Failure Shutdown
iv) Any Generator Pre-Warning/Shutdown condition
v) All transfer switch statuss
vi) Day Tank fuel oil Level High/Low
vii) Main Tank Fuel Oil High/Low
viii) Fuel oil transfer pump failure
ix) Fuel Tank Rupture
g) Equipment on Emergency Power

i) Fire alarm system including voice communication
ii) Fire pump
iii) Emergency lighting and exit signs as required by local codes. Additional lighting to the following
specific areas:
Front desk
Telephone operators room
Executive office
Work areas involving danger to occupants, i.e. kitchen, repair/maintenance shop and
laundry
Security office
Fire control room
Telecommunications and other special systems main equipment room
Engineering office
Adequate site egress lighting to local code requirements and allow safe night egress
illuminations during power failure.
iv) Provide a minimum of one fixture/lamp on the emergency circuit to provide basic lighting in each
of the following areas in a normal power outage condition:
Public restrooms
Each ballroom section and pre-function
Each meeting room
Spa/Fitness centre
v) Flood, sump and sewage pumps where applicable
vi) Automatic transfer equipment to bring all elevators to main lobby, one at a time, and to keep one
MEP elevator (firemans elevator) operating continually. 5/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS J
vii) All head-end equipment of telecommunications system and other special systems.
viii) Freezers, refrigerators and circulation pumps for refrigeration cooling.
ix) All main system equipment and related HVAC unit; i.e, computer room, security office etc.
x) All HVAC equipment if used for smoke control and stairwell and elevator shaft pressurization.
xi) Uninterrupted power supply. Local UPS (10-20 min) for telecommunication closets in guestroom
areas can be fed from normal power source.
xii) Oil heaters of chillers
xiii) Hotel alarm system
xiv) Door access control and CCTV monitoring system
xv) Other items as requested by local code.
h) Battery Powered Lighting Systems

In countries where there is a mandatory requirement for battery powered emergency lighting during
generator start-up, a system of batteries and inverters shall be provided to refeed the designated
emergency lighting and /or emergency dimmer racks. The concept of separate local battery powered
(non-maintained) emergency light fixtures in public areas is not acceptable.
i) Generator Room
i) The genset(s) shall be located away from all guest and public areas and as close to the main
switchgear and diesel oil storage facilities as possible. The genset room shall be acoustically
lined to prevent the transmission of sound to adjacent areas. Maximum sound level outside
of generator room shall be NC 60, but which must be confirmed with requirements of local
governing codes and authorities for more stringent requirements.
ii) The electrical Consultant shall ensure that all requirements for vibration isolation and control
are met including the proper design of concrete pads, foundations, frames, springs, rails, bases,
hangers etc.
iii) Fuel oil storage shall be designed to provide no less then 24-hours of continuous operation at
full load for urban hotels and no less then 48-hours at full load for resorts. In locations where
the ability to supply oil for re-fueling on a timely basis could be at risk, specify oil tanks that can
accommodate a 168 hour supply (FSHR shall make the final determination on properties that
fall into this category). Fuel oil storage tanks are to be provided with secondary containment
for leakage or tank rupture. Provide sensors for fuel oil rupture and connect to BMS. Connect
alarms for high/low level of main and day tanks to BMS. Fuel oil delivery pumps to be wired for
emergency power as well as power to all alarmable devices. Provide digital tank level meter
adjacent to main tank and provide tank level in gallons or liters. Provide fuel oil delivery pumps
as a packaged unit, with appropriate strainers, gauges, controls and lead/lag pumps. Provide
pump status to BMS.
iv) Provide a minimum of 3 feet (1m) (or more if required by local codes) of clearance around
the emergency generator, all electrical enclosures and transfer switches, fuel oil storage and
transfer equipment etc.
v) In cold climates provide heating of generator room as required to maintain space temperature
in the room no less then 70oF (21oC). Provide a room temperature sensor and connect to BMS
system for low limit alarm.
MEP 6/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS J
vi) Do not locate or run other services through or above the generator room such as plumbing,
chilled water, drainage etc.
vii) Provide fire protection as required by local codes or NFPA whichever is more stringent.
viii) Provide a system of grounding/earthing that conforms to NEC, IEE or IEC regulations and local
standards as applicable.
3 MANUFACTURER/INSTALLER QUALIFICATION
All Engine-Generator equipment including transfer switches shall be that of a manufacturer whose
products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for at least 5 years. All products shall be new,
(re-builds are not acceptable) and the latest standard products.
All proposed equipment and materials should conform to the requirements of the local power authority,
Utility or authorities having jurisdiction.
The installer shall be licensed and approved by the local authorities having jurisdiction.
b) Equipment Supply
In general, supply all equipment factory-assembled.
The manufacturer and installer shall have an office, with 24-hour phone contact for emergency service,
staffed with factory trained engineers and technicians fully capable of providing instructions, routine
maintenance and emergency call back service on all system components.
The Supplier and or installer shall have in place a support facility within 50 miles (110 km) of the site
with spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment. For resorts in remote
locations the above requirements will be waived provided that the supplier complies with 24-hour
emergency phone contact as outlined above. Additionally, the supplier must be able to provide
emergency service within 48-hours and will be required to maintain essential spare parts on site.
In addition to the requirements defined in the General Design Requirements Section, the following
additional testing shall be performed.
a) Training
Provide a minimum of 24 hours classroom and on site training for the engineering personnel in the
safe operation and maintenance of the engine-generator set(s) and related controls.
b) Testing
i) Include for the startup and initial commissioning of the engine-generator set(s) and all associated
switchgear, transfer switches and distribution components by the manufacturer and under the
supervision of the independent testing and commissioning agency.
MEP 7/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS J
ii) Perform a factory test of each engine-generator set prior to delivery to the project. The tests
shall include 4 hours of continuous operation at various loads including 1 hour at 110% loading.
Record all test results for later comparison to the on site tests. Re-conduct tests on site on
the complete installation under the supervision of the independent testing and commissioning
agency and Electrical Consultant. Provide 110% capacity resistive load banks for the on-site
commissioning of the engine generator set. Unit must pass 100% load, 4 hours operation and 1
hour test at 110% without trouble or failures.
iii) Include costs for and arrange for Owner and Electrical Consultant to witness factory tests. Include
costs for transportation, lodging, meals, etc. Testing shall be scheduled at times approved by
Owner and Electrical Consultant.
5 WARRANTY
i) Provide a full 2 years parts and labour warranty on the entire engine-generator set and all its
components and accessories.
ii) Provide a 1 year preventive maintenance agreement including all parts and labor during the
warranty period with a minimum of 2 service visits.
iii) Include for 1 preventive maintenance service visit on all transfer switches at the end of the 1
year warranty.
iv) The warranty period shall commence with opening of the property.
MEP 8/8
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
K LIGHTING + DIMMING
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
a) General
b) Concept
c) Lighting Description
i) Guest Floors
ii) Public Space
iii) Service Areas
iv) Exterior + Stairs
v) Emergency + Egress Lighting
d) Lighting Levels
i) Ballroom + Meeting Rooms
ii) Public Areas
iii) Back of House + Service Areas
iv) Mechanical, Electrical + Elevator Rooms
e) Fluorescent Lamps + Ballasts
f) General Luminaire Requirements
2 Dimming System ............................................................................ 5

a) System Description
b) Zoning Requirements
c) Other Operation Considerations
d) System Control
e) Coordination
3 Stage Lighting + Dimming ...................................................... 7

b) Coordination
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS K
1 GENERAL
This section describes the requirements of lighting and dimming. The system equipment shall be
comprised of various luminaires, lamps, ballasts and dimming controls. Recommended illumination
levels of various areas are listed.
b) Concept
Generally, the responsibility for selecting, specifying and purchasing of the luminaires are as
follows:
i) Decorative luminaires such as chandeliers and wall sconces selected and specified by the
Interior Designer and Lighting Consultant with costs for supply of such luminaires to be included
in FF&E. Assembly and installation by the Electrical Contractor.
ii) Architectural grade luminaires in interior front of house spaces, selected and specified by the
Interior Designer and or Lighting Consultant, with costs for supply and installation of such
luminaires to be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor;
iii) Luminaires in interior back of house spaces selected and specified by the Electrical Consultant,
with costs for supply and installation to be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
iv) Exterior luminaires will be selected and specified by the Lighting Consultant, with cost for supply
and installation to be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor.
Each luminaire shall be specified to be provided with lamps, ballasts, supports, etc. as required for a
full installation.
Certain luminaires for lighting art and artifacts may need to have the exact lamp requirements
determined at time of adjustment on site. For these applications contractor to supply a specified
lamp kit to the lighting designer to allow for final selection of lamps. Requirements of lamp kit to be
provided by Lighting Consultant.
Alternate design using energy efficient lighting shall be reviewed on a project-by-project basis.
c) Lighting Description
The following lighting requirements or equivalent may be required:
i) Guest Floors
Recessed or surface mounted lights provided for guestroom, bath, foyer, closet, service foyer
closets and stairs. Accent lighting provided for artwork or other guestroom accessories. In
showers, luminaires shall be suitable for wet locations with provisions to prevent any penetration
of moisture or water into fixture. All circuits shall be controlled by local switches, three way
where required. Wall brackets, chandeliers, recessed and/or other fixtures provided for corridors
and elevator foyer.
MEP 1/7
2007 LIGHTING AND DIMMING
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS K
ii) Public Space (including all restaurants, lobbies and function rooms)
Recessed architectural specification grade incandescent and low voltage lighting luminaires for
accent and down lighting. The recessed luminaires for general illumination in public areas shall,
in general, be of the low brightness type, deep recessed socket, open apertures with ellipsoidal
reflectors, baffled aperture down lights, etc., supplemented with adjustable accent lights, wall
washers, banquet lighting, decorative chandeliers, and wall brackets. Recess fixture trims shall
be installed flush with the ceiling in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Incandescent
or low voltage linear lighting systems for lighted coves. Extensive low voltage adjustable lighting
shall be provided for artwork. Underwater lights provided for decorative pools and fountains.
Incandescent under counter lighting provided at work areas, bar areas, and service areas.
Incandescent hood lighting provided at exhibition cooking areas. Decorative wall sconces,
chandeliers, and picture lights provided in all public areas. Display cases and cabinetwork
require specific individual lighting treatment. Wall sconces and recessed down lighting provided
at vanity areas. Surface mount decorative fixtures or coves provided at toilet areas. All circuits
controlled by dimming system except for task lighting or special stage area lighting.
iii) Service Areas

Recessed or surface mounted fluorescent lighting provided for kitchen, pantries, storage
space, locker room, mechanical/electrical rooms, passages, work areas. Explosion proof
fixtures provided for paint shop and storage room when a separate enclosed area, and other
designated areas. Decorative fixtures provided for Employees Cafeteria, surface mounted
fluorescent fixtures for service and escape stairs. Task lighting as required provided for offices
and other work areas. HID lighting for loading and receiving areas. All circuits controlled by local
switches.
iv) Exterior and Site

Flood or accent lighting provided for faade, hotel signage and other features of the building.
HID lighting provided for parking lot or underground garage illumination. Swimming pool and
wading pool lighting shall be low voltage or be protected by ground fault circuit. Fixtures for
lighting of trees and pathways, direction signs plus general garden accent lighting shall be
outdoor weatherproof construction, corrosion resistant and may be of low voltage types.
All lighting will be controlled by photocell, astronomical time clock or the building management
system (BMS). Circuiting requirements for different time controls shall be approved by FSHR.
Exterior spaces such as porte cochere, dining terraces, etc. will be controlled by the preset
dimming system.
iv) Emergency and Egress Lighting

Emergency fixtures provided as required by local codes. Refer to section entitled Emergency
Power Generation for additional emergency lighting requirements
Illuminated exit signs in general, signs for general advertising, directional signs, room identification
signs, etc., shall be provided.
Exit signs, indirect LED type, architectural style edge-lit for front of house public areas, and
for backhouse to be in standard extruded aluminium enclosures. Wording of signs to conform
to local code requirements and practices. Exit signs shall be circuited to emergency/essential
power.
MEP 2/7
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS K
Dimming devices and associated equipment such as patch panels, contactors, etc., shall be
provided.
Portable fixtures used for display purpose which form a part of operation equipment, shall be
provided
Provide colour filters, diffusers for equipment as required.
Provide garden lighting, although this equipment may be of a portable nature.
Refer to specific electrical and lighting provisions in Architecture section of the standard for
additional information.
d) Lighting Levels
The following list of illumination levels shall serve as a guide for lighting throughout the hotel. The
levels are based on the IESNA Lighting Handbook recommendations. Other areas, not specifically
mentioned shall have similar illumination levels according to function.
i) Ballroom and Meeting Rooms (public areas, such as restaurant and bars require
higher values for cleaning after hours)
AREA FOOT CANDLES
Convention Areas:
Ballroom 50
Ballroom Foyer 35
Meeting Rooms 40 (50 FC on table top)
Assembly and Circulation 25
ii) Public Areas:
Main Lobby 30
Assembly and Circulation 25
Restaurants, Lounges, Bars, Coffee Shops 20
Administrative office areas (at desk level) 50
Front desk (at desk level) 50
Elevator foyer 10 - 20
Corridors 10 - 20
Guest bathrooms at vanity mirror 50
Porte cochere 20
MEP 3/7
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS K
iii) Back of House and Service Areas:
Kitchen Areas 50
Maintenance Areas 50
(depending on task) 50 75
Housekeeping 50
Laundry 50
Valet (depending on task) 50 - 100
iv) Mechanical, electrical, and elevator rooms

General areas 20
Motor control centres, equipment panels
and similar areas 50
Locker rooms, employees dining room 30
Back of house offices (at desk level) 50
e) Fluorescent Lamps and Ballasts

Liner fluorescent lamps shall be T-8 or T-5 types with colour temperature of 3500oK, colour rendering
index of at least 80, rated average life of a minimum 20,000 hours and initial lumens of at least
2,950.
Fluorescent ballasts shall be electronic types with class A sound rating, capable of operation down to
0oC, minimum power factor of 0.97, ballast factor of at least 0.88, lamp current crest factor not greater
than 1.7 and total harmonic distortion less than 15%.
f) General Luminaire Requirements

i) Adjustments of all fixtures will be directed by the Lighting Consultant after installation. The
Electrical Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment and manpower at the direction of
the lighting Consultant. Much of this will be at night.
ii) Appropriate lighting and control shall be provided throughout the building, including all required
luminaries, outlets, switches, dimming equipment, lamps, control points, conduit and wiring.
Lighting layouts for public areas shall be provided by the Interior Designer and Lighting
Consultant.
Recessed fluorescent fixtures with parabolic lenses shall be used in all Administrative Offices
(except General Managers, Reception and Boardroom).
iii) Illuminated exit lights shall be provided over exit doors in all places of public assembly and in the
public corridors as required by codes or for general safety. They shall be flush stencil face, or
edge-lit plastic, as approved by the Architects and Interior Designer. Exit lights shall be of LED
types.
iv) Lamp replacement and maintenance of lighting fixtures must be given serious consideration in
order to prevent the need for scaffolding or special maintenance equipment. Fixture aperture
plates shall be secured with torsion springs or twist latches with drop hangers in lieu of screws,
which shall be avoided wherever possible.
MEP 4/7
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS K
v) Outdoor parking, garden and street luminaries shall be metal halide types.
vi) Actual length of fluorescent light fixtures, e.g. 2 0, 3 0, 4 0 or 8 0 will be determined by room
dimensions and best lighting layout. Standardize where possible.
vii) All store rooms and offices shall have room lighting controlled by local switches located inside
the room and adjacent to the entrance door. Where a room has more than one entrance, three
way switching shall be provided. The switches in storerooms shall incorporate a power outlet
for housekeeping purposes, where a dedicated power outlet cannot be positioned for easy
access.
viii) In mechanical rooms, a fluorescent light fixture shall be mounted at each motor control centre
and shall be on emergency power.
ix) Incandescent lamps shall, where possible, be of the 4,000 hours, 130 volt extended service
inside frosted type.
x) Fixtures in fire escape stairs shall be mounted on main landings only unless otherwise required
by local codes.
2 DIMMING SYSTEM
a) System Description
The dimming system shall be based designed on the Lutron Grafik 7000 series, consisting of factory
pre-assembled, microprocessor controlled dimming and switching panels, centralized preset lighting
controls, low voltage wall stations, control interfaces, programming jacks and solid state fluorescent
dimming ballasts (where required). Acceptable alternative manufacturers shall be identified by the
Lighting Consultant on a project by project basis.
b) Zoning Requirements
Generally, the following areas shall be configured as individual zones of the system:
i) Each meeting or function room (including executive conference room)

ii) Each segment ballroom and pre-function room
iii) Each Restaurant, Bar or F&B outlet
iv) Health Club/Spa all areas including treatment rooms, lockers, reception and exercise rooms
v) All public circulation areas including front desk, reception, hotel entrance, etc. (does not include
guest floors)
vi) All elevator lobbies (does not include guest floors)
vii) All public area restrooms
viii) Select power sockets required for table/floor lamps and illuminated planters or plant accent
lights in public areas
ix) Faade and grounds lighting as determined by the Architect, Landscape Architect, Lighting
Consultant and FSHR.
Group circuiting as required such that lighting is zoned together to provide maximum flexibility in
creating lighting scenes. Downlights adjacent projection screens shall be configured as separate
zone.
MEP 5/7
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS K
c) Other Operation Consideration
Ballroom and meeting rooms shall be provided with audio/video niche mounted remote scene select
control wall stations operable by infrared hand held controls. The wall stations shall have four scenes
and be key operated enabled for individual slide controls. Hand held programming jack shall be also
mounted in niche. Scenes shall be configured to suit events, dining, audio/video presentations and
95% light level for cleaning. In general, all other areas shall be programmed for scenes of morning,
afternoon, evening, night and off.
All partitionable spaces such as ballroom and function rooms shall have Room Assignor Control
Panel for Assignment of Partitionable Areas. This panel shall be located in the Banquet Managers
office in a lockable wall mount enclosure.
Provide manual slider control of dimmable circuits in all health club/spa treatment rooms, the executive
conference room and any meeting rooms located within the Business Center.
For public area restrooms, create two scenes for day and night lighting and one off scene.
Provide remote programming jacks as necessary in all areas to facilitate the setting and adjusting of
scenes.
d) System Control
The operator workstation PC shall be supplied and configured by the dimming system manufacturer
and located in the Engineering Office adjacent to the BMS workstation. The PC from the dimming
system manufacturer should be the latest model supplied by the dimming system manufacturer with
the latest version of control software. The PC is to be equipped with a modem and software for remote
troubleshooting and operation.
e) Coordination
i) The dimming system and fire alarm system shall be interconnected such that upon fire alarm
activation, the dimming system raises level of lighting of the connected luminaires to full on.
ii) Lighting consultant shall identify the control zoning and dimming schedule requirements.
iii) Electrical Engineer and Lighting Consultants should co-ordinate the requirements for emergency
lighting on dimmable circuits. All designated emergency circuits shall illuminate at full brightness
upon loss of commercial power. Do not place emergency circuits for lighting multiple areas in a
single dimming panel. Instead supply emergency power to the entire dimming system or provide
by-pass double throw contactors on designated circuits. Emergency lighting circuits shall not be
switchable (on/off) by any local means except at the circuit breaker for that circuit.
iv) Coordinate location and space requirements of dimming electrical panels early in design to
ensure installation does not conflict with other functions.
v) The supplier/installer of dimming system shall be manufacturers authorized vendor, and which
shall have 24 hours phone contact for emergency service and shall have a support facility with
spare parts available to provide service on site within 48 hours of service call from property.
MEP 6/7
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS K
3 STAGE LIGHTING AND DIMMING
Where a large function room with stage provisions is provided in the design, typically provide the
following features:
i) Eight (8) dimmed and one (1) non-dimmed circuits each connected to two (2) light fixtures.
Control is by remote portable dimmer on stage.
ii) One (1) 20 amp outlet is required for Trouperette lighting locally controlled.
iii) Stage accent lighting shall consist of adjustable stage lights concealed in ceiling with colour filter
provisions, located approximately 2 feet on centre for the entire width of the stage. In addition,
portable three-colour border light strips shall be included for rear stage lighting.
b) Coordination
Electrical contractor shall provide power supply, control wiring, transformers, relays and other
equipment as required.
Refer to stage lighting consultants documents.
MEP 7/7
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL + LIGHTING
L DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 1
2 Guestroom Floors ............................................................................. 1
a) Guest Bedrooms
b) Guest Bathrooms
c) Typical Suite Requirements
d) Typical Guest Corridors
e) Typical Elevator Lobby
f) Guest Room Lanais + Terraces
g) Guestroom Floor Ice Machine Room
h) Typical Floor Service Area
3 Club Floor Lounge ......................................................................... 4

a) Reception
b) Staff Work Area
c) Lounge /Dining Area
4 Restaurants ........................................................................................... 4
a) Maitre D
b) Service Stands
c) Service Doors
d) Private Dining Rooms
5 Bars + Lounges ................................................................................... 5
6 Meeting + Banquet Facilities ................................................... 5

F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
a) Ballroom
b) Ballroom Pre-Function
c) All Meeting Rooms
d) Meeting Rooms of 1,000 sq. ft. or more
e) Group Registration Desks
7 Retail .................................................................................................... 7
a) Displays
b) Sales Desk
8 Main Lobby + Reception Lobby ............................................ 7

a) General Design Requirements
b) Guest Safety Deposit Room
9 Washrooms ........................................................................................... 7
a) Public
b) Staff
c) Washroom Accessories
10 Hotel Entrance + Porte Cochere .......................................... 8

11 Spa + Fitness Area ........................................................................... 8
a) Reception
b) Locker Rooms
c) Sauna
d) Steam Room
e) Treatment Rooms
f) Cardiovascular Exercise Room
g) Aerobics Room
12 Swimming Pool, Whirlpool + Plunge Pools................. 9

a) Whirlpool Control
b) Lighting
c) Swimming Pool Changing Rooms
d) Service Cabanas
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
13 Tennis Requirements ..................................................................... 10
a) Waiting Area
b) Pro-Shop
14 Group Outdoor Activity Area ................................................... 10

a) Buffet Table
b) Lighting
c) Stage
d) General Power
15 Wedding Gardens ............................................................................ 11

16 Parking .................................................................................................... 11
a) Guest Parking
b) Parking Cashiers Office
c) Car Wash Area
d) Car Rental Office
e) Limousine Drivers Waiting Room
17 Offices (General) ............................................................................... 11

18 Coffee / Mail Room .......................................................................... 12
19 Telephone Operators Room .................................................... 12
20 Cashiers Office .................................................................................. 12
21 Staff Safety Deposit Box Room ........................................... 12
22 Security Office .................................................................................... 13
23 Room Service Cashiers Office ............................................ 13

24 Reservations ........................................................................................ 13
25 Staff Facilities ...................................................................................... 14
a) Staff Dining Room
b) Staff Locker Room
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
c) Staff Training Room
d) Staff Entry
e) House Doctors Room
26 Housekeeping + Laundry ............................................................ 14

a) Valet
b) Laundry
c) Main Housekeeping Area
27 Maintenance Area / Engineering .......................................... 15

a) General Area
b) Paint Shop
c) Carpentry Shop
28 Loading Dock ........................................................................................ 16

a) Truck Dock
b) Garbage Compactor Room
c) Car Wash
29 Piers / Docks ......................................................................................... 16
30 Electrical Transportation Vehicles ...................................... 17
31 Switch Receptacle Finishes ..................................................... 17

F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
1 INTRODUCTION
i) This section describes the specific electrical outlet and device provisions for guestrooms, public
and back of house rooms and areas to satisfy hotel-operating requirements.
ii) Voltage as required in North America, adjust for local conditions.
iii) As a point of clarification, a duplex outlet as defined in North America constitutes two power
outlets.
2 GUESTROOM FLOORS
a) Guest Bedrooms
i) Each guestroom bedroom area to have not less than ten power outlets.
ii) Provide accessible power outlet adjacent to night table for cell phone charging.
iii) Outlets in party walls to be offset by at least 12 to maintain specified sound rating. See FSHSD
#F-004.
iv) Provide accessible convenience outlet for housekeeping and guest use of ironing board.
v) Lighting switches to be mounted 48 to centre line above finished floor level.
vi) Power outlets to be mounted 12 to centre line above finished floor level unless stated
otherwise.
vii) Locate two power outlets below the desk for desk lamp and fax. Locate two power outlets above
desk for guest computer and other device.
viii) Surface-mounted decorative ceiling fixture in bedroom and entry foyer.
ix) A recessed ceiling fixture above mini-bar.
x) A three-way light switch shall be provided at the guestroom entrance door and at the bed head
that switches the foyer, mini-bar and bedroom ceiling fixtures.
xi) Ceiling fan with variable speed control in resorts.
xii) Incandescent light in closet with pressure switch in door frame. Where the closet has 3 or more
doors provide pressure switch for at least 2 doors.
xiii) Three power outlets at mini-bar (one @ 12 AFFL for refrigerator and two at 48 AFFL for coffee
maker and toaster) and light in bar cabinet with pressure switch in door frame.
b) Guest Bathrooms
i) Bathroom lighting to be switched from inside room where permitted by code. Located 48
AFFL.
ii) Toilet compartment light switched separately, with switch located inside toilet compartment.
When required by mechanical design to control humidity, exhaust fans also to be controlled by
light switch.
iii) Where heat lamps are desired, they shall be controlled by an electronic timer mounted in the
same junction box as the bathroom light fixture with a common faceplate.
MEP 1 / 17
2007 SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL AND LIGHTING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
iv) Power outlet for portable hair dryer to be mounted 48 to center line above finished floor level.
v) Dual voltage razor outlet with 110V and 240V capacity with both U.S. and European plug
configurations adjacent to vanity.
vi) Illuminated shaving mirror installed at 62 AFFL. Power outlet below mirror at 48 AFFL.
vii) Where two lavatory basins are provided, locate two power outlets so that two people may use
vanity together without electrical cords crossing.
viii) In resorts, bathroom lights to be on dimmer.
ix) Decorative surface mounted lights at central location and toilet compartment.
x) Wall sconces on either side of vanity mirror.
xi) Recessed down light above each basin.
xii) Recessed down light above both bathtub and shower stall.
xiii) In cold climates when bathroom is on outside wall, electric under floor heating.
c) Typical Suite Requirements

i) Entry foyer light switched by three-way switch located at entry door and master bedroom door.
ii) Entry foyer closet to have light with switch in door frame.
iii) Living area lighting to be independently switched and have electronic dimmer with variable
settings.
iv) Dining area/room lighting to be independently switched and have electronic dimmer with variable
setting.
v) Electrical outlets as required by Interior design and additional outlets positioned for easy
housekeeping access.
vi) Ceiling fans on rheostat in resorts.
vii) In the two bedroom suites and larger suites speakers for stereo system to be built-in with
concealed conduit to remote speaker locations.
viii) Desk in living area to have quad-plex telephone/data jack and power as per typical guestroom.
ix) In large suites there is a telephone jack at the living room seating arrangement either on the wall
at 12 AFFL or floor mounted and one in the dining room at 12 AFFL below the sideboard.
x) Suite Dens to have quad-plex telephone/data jack and power as with desks in living rooms.
xi) Fax outlet for fax/printer machine provided by FF&E. Conduit and cabling for control of fax
printer from guests laptop computer at desk.
xii) Powder room to have wall mounted telephone adjacent to toilet.
xiii) When powder room has shower, include razor outlet, illuminated shaving mirror and hair dryer
power outlet at vanity.
xiv) Suite pantries to include wall-mounted phone and power for the following appliances; refrigerator,
microwave, toaster and coffee maker.
xv) Second and third bedrooms of suites configured as with standard bedrooms.
xvi) Power outlet to be coordinated with built-in (concealed) fax location.
MEP 2 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
d) Typical Guest Corridors
i) Provide power outlets and lighting in the typical Guest Corridors as follows:
Power outlets for housekeeping shall be located in the corridor at intervals not to exceed
40 feet, and be of the Twist lock type 15 amp 120 volt Hubbel (or equivalent local utilization
voltage).
Corridor lighting shall be circuited alternatively to provide maximum lighting in the event of
a circuit failure.
Approximately 25% of the corridor lights shall be connected to emergency circuits or as
required by code.
Power outlets for furniture and accent lighting for artwork as required by Interior Designer.
Locate outlets at 12 AFFL, or as specified by Interior Designer to coordinate with furniture
design.
Lighting may consist of decorative chandeliers and wall sconces.
e) Typical Elevator Lobby

i) Provide outlets and lighting in the typical guest elevator lobby as follows:
Lighting may consist of decorative chandeliers and wall sconces.
Provide two power outlets at 12 AFFL, or as specified by Interior Designer.
ii) Provide outlets and lighting in the typical service elevator lobby as follows: Service Elevator
Lobby
Shall contain incandescent lights, two power outlets at 12 AFFL.
Housekeeping closet lighting to be fluorescent and miscellaneous outlets are required.
f) Guest Room Lanais and Terraces

i) Two weatherproof power outlets
ii) FCU shut off switch required in door frame.
iii) Light fixture with local switch located inside the guestroom.
iv) At resorts, ceiling fan on variable speed control located inside the guestrooms.
g) Guestroom Floor Ice Machine Room

i) Lighting within the room shall be incandescent decorative surface mounted.
ii) Direct electrical connections are to be made from 115/60/1 electrical circuits.
iii) 15-amp circuit for dispenser and separate 20-amp circuit for cuber.
iv) Power outlet for housekeeping and maintenance.
h) Typical Floor Service Area

i) Two-power outlet for housekeeping.
MEP 3 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
ii) Electrical panels, dimmer equipment, switchgear, etc. located in a service area must have
locked access panels to controls. This equipment shall not be located in the maids linen closet.
3 CLUB FLOOR LOUNGE
a) Reception
i) Provide the following electrical at reception desk:
Three power outlets (UPS) for each workstation.
Power outlet for credit card verifier and imprinter.
Two computer system outlets.
Two power outlets for general housekeeping.
b) Staff Storeroom Work Area

i) Power outlet above counter for fax machine.
ii) Power outlet for counter top copier.
iii) Two power outlets for stereo system and cable outlet to connect to speakers in lounge.
c) Lounge/Dining Area
i) Recessed ceiling speakers connected to stereo system system located in storeroom.
ii) Ceiling fans resorts only.
4 RESTAURANTS
a) Maitre D
i) Power outlet for cordless phone.
ii) Power outlet for miscellaneous.
iii) Recessed low voltage light fixtures to illuminate writing top.
iv) Locate room lighting dimming control, background music volume control with source control and
ceiling fan control at a service stand and out of guests sight or in a control niche adjacent to the
maitre Ds stand.
b) Service Stands
i) Lighting level in the service stand area to be kept as low as practical. Lighting to be incandescent
with local wall box dimmer. Electrical requirements for service stands are as follows:
ii) Power outlet (UPS) for Point-of-Sale (POS) system
iii) Two power outlets for credit card verifier and credit card imprinter.
iv) Power outlet for miscellaneous.
v) Local task lighting.
MEP 4 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
c) Service Doors
i) Service doors should have power operated automatic door openers operated by either footpad
or infrared sensor.
d) Private Dining Rooms

i) Private dining rooms shall include:
e) General Requirements
i) Electronic dimming lighting controls
ii) Ceiling fan control switch (as applicable).
iii) Power outlet to suit furniture layout and for housekeeping.
iv) Power outlets for housekeeping as required by room size and furniture layout.
v) Two power outlets at each decorative service stand.
5 BARS AND LOUNGES
i) The following details shall be incorporated into the stool bar design:
Two POS power outlets with UPS.
Lighting dimming control.
Power outlet for television.
ii) Four power outlets each on separate circuit adjacent to the dance floor for buffet stands.
iii) When live music stage, provide appropriate power outlets for entertainment equipment.
6 MEETING AND BANQUET FACILITY
a) Ballroom
i) Each ballroom subdivision must be able to function independently, i.e. there must be provision
for each to locally control:
Head of table and runway lighting.
General Lighting dimming located in concealed control niche.
Electrical requirements as FSHSD #C-005 and 006
ii) Remote control of lighting should also be available to enable light levels to be controlled by
an audiovisual operator running a slide show. Ceiling fixtures in front of motorized projection
screens or locations at front of room where projection screens may be installed should be on a
separate circuit to enable them to be dimmed independently of the rest of the room.
iii) One light fixture circuit, three-way switched from the main entrance door and the service door.
iv) In ballrooms of approximately 7,000 square feet and over include two 200-amp 208V 3-phase
4-wire outlets in each ballroom subdivision.
MEP 5 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
v) Motorized projection screen required at each end of ballroom switch operating controls integrated
into touch screen mounted on wall in adjacent control niche.
vi) Show power in AV-1 niches including 200A 3 4W camlock provisions fed from 200A disconnect
switch located in both service corridor.
vii) Ballroom subdivisions must be able to be combined for common control of all combined spaces
lighting, sound, and telephone/data.
b) Ballroom Pre-Function
i) There must be provision for each ballroom pre-function subdivision to independently control the
following:
Lighting dimming (local control) located in concealed control niche.
Electrical services as FSHSD #C-007
ii) Ballroom pre-function subdivisions must be able to be combined for common control of all
combined spaces lighting, sound, and telephone/data.
c) All Meeting Rooms

i) Wall Washer lighting
ii) A minimum of eight power outlets with a maximum of two outlets on each circuit.
iii) Lighting dimming and on/off control. One light fixture or lighting circuit is to be three way switched
from service door and main entrance door.
iv) 220V 30-amp single-phase three-wire wall outlet.
v) Provide Electrical services as FSHSD #C-003
vi) Provide flashing light(s) in service corridor(s) behind meeting rooms. Light is activated by local
switch and used to advise staff that rooms are occupied and additional care must be taken to
minimize conversation or noise that may disturb guests.
vii) Provide two power outlets in the public foyer outside each meeting room at 12 AFFL.
viii) Provide four power outlets each on a separate circuit at 3 6 AFFL in the service area outside
each meeting room for food warmers/coolers.
d) Meeting Rooms of 1,000 sq.ft. or more

i) In addition to the above, also provide services as in FSHDS #C-004
e) Group Registration Desk

i) Provide requirements as in FSHDS #C-002
ii) Outlets should be concealed in the wall behind a baseboard access panel.
MEP 6 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
7 RETAIL
a) Displays
i) Lighting to reflect the same quality level as the other public areas of the hotel.
ii) Accessory power outlets.
b) Sales Desk
i) Concealed lighting
ii) Down lighting at point of sale and counter
iii) Power for jewelry display lighting
iv) Two power outlets (UPS) for point of sale terminal and printer.
v) Two power outlets adding machine and credit card verifier.
vi) Miscellaneous power outlets as required by interior designer and housekeeping.
8 MAIN LOBBY AND RECEPTION LOBBY
a) General Design Requirements

i) The following design requirements shall be provided:
Reception and cashiers desk as FSHSD # D-002.
Concierge desk see FSHSD # D-003.
Storage/work area for concierge behind the concierge desk. See DSHSD # D-006 and
007.
Illuminate display vitrine or cabinets.
b) Guest Safety Deposit Box Room

i) Power outlet mounted 39 AFL adjacent to counter.
ii) Press button to operate buzzer located at front desk.
iii) Electric strike for lock on guest door controlled from button at front desk.
iv) Two wall scones and 1 chandelier on guest side.
v) Incandescent down.
9 WASHROOMS
a) Public
i) Lighting
Incandescent down lights at urinals
Decorative ceiling fixtures in WC rooms and general areas
MEP 7 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
Wall scones and down lights at vanities.
ii) Provide one duplex outlet mounted 18 AFFL for housekeeping.
b) Staff
ii) Recessed fluorescent lighting
iii) Two power outlets at vanities for electric shavers and portable hair dryers.
c) Washroom Accessories
ii) Electric hand dryer - staff only:
Mounted 43 AFFL to bottom in mens washrooms and 40 AFFL to bottom in womens
washroom (one per washroom).
ii) Electric hair dryer staff only:
Mounted 67 AFFL to bottom in mens washrooms and 58 to bottom in womens washrooms
(one per washroom).
10 HOTEL ENTRANCE AND PORTE COCHERE
i) Weatherproof power electric outlets for maintenance.

ii) Electric snow melting to be incorporated in sidewalk in climates with heavy snowfall.
iii) 110V 20 amp weatherproof outlet (separate circuit) for high-pressure washer.
iv) Doormans station provides lighting for night use.
v) VIP and assistance push-button of doorman stand to ring buzzer at Front Desk.
11 SPA AND FITNESS AREA
a) Reception
i) Computer, Monitor, keyboard and printer, require dedicated power, telephone and computer
outlets.
ii) Two power outlets one for pager charger and one for general use.
iii) Buzzers for emergency button at steam rooms and saunas with automatic roll on to telephone
operators room if not answered within 30 seconds.
iv) See FSHSD # D-011.
b) Locker Rooms
i) Two power outlets for hair dryer at vanity counters.
ii) Swimsuit dryer wall mounted.
c) Sauna
i) Emergency button to ring at reception desk. Locate at exterior.
MEP 8 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
d) Steam Room
i) Emergency button to ring at reception desk. Locate at exterior.
e) Treatment Room
i) Lighting concealed in cove and on dimmer for mood lighting. Additional down lights on separate
switch.
ii) Four power outlets
f) Cardiovascular Exercise Room

i) Two wall mounted TVs. TV power outlet at 84 AFFL.
ii) Provide power outlet to each piece of exercise equipment and for TV.
g) Aerobics Room
i) One power outlet on each wall for portable video system.
12 SWIMMING POOL, WHIRLPOOL AND PLUNGE POOLS
a) Whirlpool Control
i) Whirlpool aeration control shall be by means of a 15-minute time switch located near the whirlpool
at 5 0 to center line above finished floor level or as per local code.
b) Lighting
i) Underwater lights to be provided at least equal to local code requirements and not less than two
fixtures in the swimming pool and one in each plunge pool.
ii) No underwater light is required in the bottom of the whirlpool.
iii) Dry niche underwater lights are preferred.
iv) No light fixtures are to be mounted over the swimming pool or whirlpool unless with fracture
proof lenses.
v) 110V 15 amp weatherproof power outlets at 40 0 on center for maintenance, special displays,
etc.
c) Swimming Pool Changing Rooms

i) Hair dryer mounted 5 0 AFL adjacent to full length mirror. Hair dryer supplied and installed by
contractor.
ii) Power outlet mounted on the wall at 3 6 AFL at each end of the vanity counter.
iii) Bathing suit spin dryer see FSHDS D (j) 2 (h).
d) Service Cabanas
i) Power outlet for base station for cordless telephone.
MEP 9 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
ii) Two-power outlet for POS.
iii) Two power outlet for fridge and bottled water chiller unit.
iv) One power outlet for miscellaneous.
e) Maintenance
i) Waterproof power outlets at 100 ft. centers for maintenance equipment.
13 TENNIS REQUIREMENTS
i) Install electrical outlets in waterproof enclosures at each tennis court for both tennis equipment
and group functions.
ii) All courts shall be lighted using the latest non-glare light fixtures.
a) Waiting Area
i) Four outlets in waiting area for use with parties.
ii) 20 Amp outlets for area wash down with power washer.
b) Pro-Shop
i) Standard office electrical requirements
ii) Workroom 2 power outlets
14 GROUP OUTDOOR ACTIVITY AREA
a) Buffet Table
i) Lighting as required. Provide six outlets for decorative effects and special lighting.
b) Lighting
i) Lighting needs to be provided to all parts of the activity area and should be designed so that
guests are not looking into lights when seated at the time.
c) Stage
i) Requires total of 75 amps of electric power for entertainers instruments and amplifiers (five
outlets, each on a separate circuit, at one end of stage) and 45 amps for general use (three
outlets, each on a separate circuit, at ten foot centers starting from the other side of the stage).
ii) Lighting should be concealed at the front of the stage requires five 20 amp circuits each on
a separate dimmer with the control station remote from the stage, but with a clear view of the
stage. Additional spot lights will also be required remote from the stage allow four 20 amp
circuits each on a separate dimmer with control adjacent to the foot light controllers.
MEP 10 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
d) General Power
i) Provide weatherproof duplex outlets around the perimeter of the activity area are at 30 ft.
centers.
15 WEDDING GARDENS
i) Stage lighting from adjacent trees if possible.

ii) Power outlets adjacent to each side of stage for guests own lighting.
iii) Decorative landscape lighting, including moonlighting.
16 PARKING
a) Guest Parking
Light levels must be adequate for complete safety and security. Choice of fixture and light
source will be determined by location of parking area.
b) Parking Cashiers Office

Uninterruptible power outlet hotel computer system, duplex outlet and telephone.
c) Car Wash Area

Include 20 Amp outlet and additional lighting, in area for cleaning VIP cars.
d) Car Rental Office

Two power outlets at desk/counter.
Uninterruptible power outlet for computer workstation.
e) Limousine Drivers Waiting Room

Power outlets for TV, fridge and coffee machine.
Paging system controlled from bell desk or doormans station.
17 OFFICES (GENERAL)
i) Individual offices shall have six power outlets, one quad-plex outlet per FSHDS #J-014. GM
office requires an additional power outlet.
ii) Each secretarial position shall have one four-plex.
iii) Lighting in office areas with exterior windows shall be incandescent.
MEP 11 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
18 COFFEE/MAIL ROOM
i) The following shall be included for beverage function of the room:

One 110V 15-amp outlet adjacent to counter for refrigerator.
One 110V 15-amp outlet (separate circuit) for coffee maker t 48 AFL.
One 110V 15-amp outlet (separate circuit) for kettle at 48 AFL.
ii) The following shall be included for mail functions:
One 220V 1 phase 30 amp outlet (separate circuit) for photocopier
Three 110V 15 amp outlets mounted above counter, 48 to center line above finished floor
level for postage meter (2), and electric pencil sharpener.
Two outlets for two fax machines.
19 TELEPHONE OPERATORS ROOM
i) See Voice and data infrastructure standards for voice and data requirements for this area
ii) See Emergency Power standards for UPS requirements for this area.
iii) Close Circuit TV monitors for security system.
iv) Remote door alarm indicator panel (if applicable).
v) Walk-in coolers/freezers alarm indicator panel.
vi) Fire alarm annunciation panel including smoke detector annunciation in guestrooms.
vii) Power bar with 40 outlets for radio and pager chargers. Each charger needs approximately 5.
viii) Outlet for wake-up clock.
ix) Outlet for pager master control unit.
x) Outlet, and adjustable shelves at supervisors desk.
xi) Lighting system shall be on emergency power.
20 CASHIERS OFFICE
i) Lighting on emergency power.

ii) Six outlets.
21 STAFF SAFETY DEPOSIT BOX ROOM
i) Power outlet mounted at 54 AFFL

ii) Lighting on emergency power
MEP 12 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
22 SECURITY OFFICE
i) The security office shall contain the following:

Monitors etc. for CCTV system See Section 0.28.
Remote door alarm console See Section 0.30.
Electrical as FSHSD # J-09A.
Remote fire alarm panel.
Power outlets for VCR/DVD to play safety film on guestroom TVs.
23 ROOM SERVICE CASHIERS OFFICE
i) The room service cashiers office shall have the following special features:
2 outlets (UPS) for F&B Point-of-Sale system and 1 UPS outlet for computer system.
3 outlets mounted 33 above finished floor level for credit card machine, calculators and
credit card verifier.
110v 15-amp outlet mounted 12 above finished floor level on wall opposite counter. See
FSHSD # J-001.
Provide intercom between office and room service set up area. Microphone (with on/off
switch) in office and loudspeaker in set up area. Also intercom between office and kitchen
hot line if hot line is not visible from Room Service Office. Microphone (with on/off switch)
at both locations and speakers at both locations.
Adjacent power outlet to store and charge pagers.
24 RESERVATIONS
i) Reservations managers office/desk same electrical as individual position in reservations

counter.
ii) Outlet and outlet for fax machine.
iii) 110V 15 amps UPS outlet
iv) Outlet for disputed cheque holder as FSHSD # J-015.
v) Two outlets (UPS) and F&B POS for error printer.
vi) Built-in counter position require the following electrical (at each position):
Quad-plex outlet for telephone data
Two outlets
Two outlets (UPS).
MEP 13 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
25 STAFF FACILITIES
a) Staff Dining Room

i) Electrical hook-up to equipment in the food preparation and service counter:
ii) Power outlets for housekeeping.
iii) Power outlet for TV and TV signal outlet at 8 0 above finished floor level.
iv) 110V x 20-amp outlet (separate circuit) for cold drink vending machine.
v) 110V 150-amp outlet.
vi) Cyber caf power 2 stations.
b) Staff Locker Room

i) Outlet for shoeshine machine.
c) Staff Training Room

Recessed motorized projection screen.
Excellent light fluorescent.
Power outlets and TV outlet for built in TV/video center.
Multiple at room perimeter power outlets at 12AFFL.
d) Staff Entry
i) Card/magnetic key system so than only authorized persons can open door to enter building.
ii) Electric latch operated from security office.
e) House Doctors Room

i) Examination room:
Fluorescent ceiling fixtures.
Two power outlets at 48 AFFL above counter and 2 at 12 AFFL.
26 HOUSEKEEPING AND LAUNDRY
a) Valet
i) Lighting levels of 100 f.c. at table height in seamstress (sewing machine) area, guest check-in
table/bin area and other specified area.
ii) Two power outlets at valets desk location.
iii) Two power outlets at sewing machine location.
iv) Power outlet at shoe shine location.
MEP 14 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
b) Laundry
i) Power outlets are to be provided as indicated by consultant but are not to replace standard
use-area requirements.
ii) Six power outlets in laundry managers office.
iii) Coordinate lighting layout with equipment locations and work areas at 80 f.c.
c) Main Housekeeping Area

i) Power outlet for sewing machine if not located in valet room.
ii) Power outlet for refrigerator for flowers.
iii) Provide electrical/power as required by conveyor.
27 MAINTENANCE AREA / ENGINEERING
a) General Area
i) Single phase electrical outlets each on a separate circuit shall be provided at 48 AFFL as
follows:
10 - 110V 15 amp
2 - 110V 30 amp
3 - 110V 15 amp
1 - 220V 50 amp
ii) Two 110V 15 amp duplex outlets each at 48 AFFL above TV workbench.
iii) Lighting layout shall be related to work areas and shall be kept as high as possible. One
row of lighting shall be provided 2 0 on center from perimeter walls to properly illuminate
workbenches.
iv) One power outlet mounted together at 54 above finished floor level in the secured storage room
for TV.
v) Provide power outlets for Building automation system equipment, Elevator control system
equipment and dimming control system equipment per each contractors specifications.
vi) Provide outlet for plotter.
b) Paint Shop
i) 1 - 110V 20 amp outlet at 48 AFFL
ii) 2 - 110V 15-amp outlet at 48 AFFL.
iii) Connection and control of paint room exhaust fan. Confirm code requirements for explosion
proof provision.
c) Carpentry Shop
i) 1 - 220V 30-amp single-phase outlet at 90 AFFL.
MEP 15 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
ii) 2 - 110V 15 amp outlet at 48 AFFL
iii) 3 -110V 15-amp outlets at 12 AFFL.
iv) An 110V 15-amp outlet will be provided flush mounted in the center of the room for circular
saw.
28 LOADING DOCK
a) Truck Dock
i) Power outlet for weight scale adjacent to receivers office.
ii) 110V 20-amp outlet (separate circuit) adjacent to hose bib for high-pressure water wash down
unit.
iii) Electric dock leveler.
iv) Weatherproof electrical duplex outlets for maintenance.
v) Where dock is exterior, provide electrically operated insulated overhead metal doors with
controls in receivers office.
vi) Intercom from exterior of truck dock doors to receivers office.
vii) Outlets for cart charging in receivers office.
viii) Include outlets for battery chargers.
b) Garbage Compactor Room

i) 60-amp power supply mounted 5 0 above finished floor level for connection to compactor.
ii) 15 amp x 110V outlet mounted 6 0 to center line above finished floor level for air purifier e.g.
Sonozaire or equivalent:
iii) 15-amp 110V weatherproof outlet mounted 4 6 to center line above finished floor level for
maintenance.
iv) Lighting layout to be coordinated with compactor loading and maintenance locations.
v) Electrically operated, insulated, overhead door with control in receivers office.
vi) 110V 15 amp outlet mounted 6 0 AFL for bug killer.
c) Can Wash
i) Weatherproof outlet (110V 20 amp) for high-pressure water wash down unit.
29 PIERS/DOCKS
i) Lighting should be bright to clearly illuminate steps, gangplank, handrail, etc.

ii) Utility monuments complete with electrical power to run lighting, air-conditioning, bar equipment
etc. on vessels along with connections for telecommunication and cable TV.
iii) An illuminated sign with the name of the property must be incorporated into the design.
iv) Lighting should be concealed and at low level to avoid glare in guests eyes.
MEP 16 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS L
30 ELECTRICAL TRANSPORTATION VEHICLES
i) Allow for remote recharging electric outlets at each service center, and at Porte cochere for
charging of electric golf carts
31 SWITCH AND RECEPTACLE FINISHES
i) The colour of switches, receptacles and cover plates shall be as follows:

Guestrooms polished stainless steel or as specified by Interior Designer and FSHR
Guestroom bathrooms polished stainless steel or as specified by Interior Designer and
FSHR
Public areas oil rubbed bronze or other depending on wall finishes, as approved by
Interior Designer and FSHR.
Service areas - satin finish brushed stainless steel.
Exterior weatherproof switches and receptacles shall be stainless steel.
ii) Securing screws shall be concealed.
MEP 17 / 17
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
M LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
1 Design + Construction ................................................................ 1
b) Design Requirements
c) Installation Requirements
d) Designer/Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications
e) Alternate System

a) Requirements
b) Documents
3 Warranty + Preventative Maintenance .......................... 4

F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS M
1 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
This section describes the requirements of the lightning protection system. The system shall be comprised
of air terminals, down conductors, earth rods and inspection pits.
a) Design Requirements
i) The requirements for lightning protection systems for buildings shall be based initially on per-
forming an analysis of the risks from potential lightning strike hits. The Electrical Consultant shall
present to Owners team a report identifying the level of risk (low/medium/high) that the specific
site may be subject to lightning strikes and consequential damages. The Electrical Consultant
shall recommend course of action to Owners team. Owners team will decide if the risk of
damage of lightning strikes out weighs the costs for lightning protection.
ii) This section includes lightning protection systems for buildings and associated structures and
includes requirements for lightning protection systems components including, but not limited to,
the following:
Air Termination Network
Earth Termination Network
Connections to reinforcing bars of structures
Bonding
Accessories
iii) The Electrical Consultants must review local codes and methods for lightning protection and
request FSHR approval of locally used designs, such as central mast terminal system.
In addition to the requirements of Section entitle Codes and Standards found elsewhere in the
Standards, the following standards shall be applied:
NFPA 780 Lightning Protection Code

UL96A Installation Requirement for Lightning Protection
LPI-175 Lightning Protection Institute-Standard of Practice
BS 6651 Protection of Structures against Lightning
iv) Air Termination Network: Shall consist of vertical air terminal rods interconnected with horizontal
conductors around periphery (or parapet), and along inner edges of roofs that are higher than
adjacent parts, unless they fall in zone of protections of a higher conductor. Horizontal conductors
on roof shall be as per code requirements. All elements of the lightning protection system shall
be joined together and joined to steel reinforcing bars of outer columns.
Down Conductors: The air termination network shall be connected to earth via bare copper down
conductors running in PVC conduits embedded in the building structural columns, beams/slabs
and in floor screed and shall be bonded by exothermic welding to the steel reinforcing rebars
for the building structure at the roof and ground level.
v) Earth Termination Network: Shall consist of an earth rod at each down conductor, inter-
connected via earth termination loops. Connection between rods and loop conductors shall be
via exothermic welding.
MEP 1/4
2007 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS M
vii) Inspection Earth Pits: Shall be provided at the building corner rod for testing of the resistance to
earth of the system, according to code requirements.
Bonding: All metalwork in, on or outside the structure(s) shall be bonded to the lightning
protective system roof conductors or to exposed earthing points bonded to reinforcing bars
in the structure. Metal work includes water pipes, tanks, signs, structures, communications
supports, metal sheaths and exposed parts of electrical installations, metal staircases, metal
window frames, vent pipes, steel doors or door frames and main earthing terminal or earthing
bar of the electrical distribution.
Bonding: Metal work leaving or entering a structure and having system continuity (water piping,
etc.) shall be bonded as directly as possible to the earth termination, near the point at which
the service enters or leaves the structure at nearest earth point or at the nearest main earthing
terminal or earthing bar of the protective earthing system.
vii) Provide air terminals, bonding plates, conductors, connectors, conductor straps, fasteners,
grounding plates, grounding rods, rod clamps, splicers and other components required for a
complete system that meets the Standards.
viii) Provide lightning protection system materials and components that comply with approved
manufacturers standard design, in accordance with published product information.
b) Installation Requirements
Install lightning protection systems in accordance with equipment manufacturers written instructions,
and in compliance with applicable Standards or Codes governing the site.
i) Conceal all system conductors.

Conceal exterior conductors from normal view from all exterior locations at grade.
Support roof conductors and down conductors using fasteners spaced horizontally and vertically,
and fix by anchor bolts or lead inserts with machined screws.
Down conductors are to follow most direct path between air terminals and earth rod. Re-entrant
loops are not permissible.
ii) Joints and bonds: Clean and treat contact surfaces with non-corrosive compound. Protect joints
between dissimilar metals from moisture by inert, tenacious material, and with overlapping joints.
Joints and bonds are to be as few as possible and made mechanically and electrically effective
by clamping, bolting or exothermic welding. Effective cross-sectional areas of joints and bonds
are not to be less than that of the main conductor.
iii) Inspection (Earth) pit is to extend 150 mm (6 in.) below top of earth rod. Cover earth rod connector
with suitable protective compound that can be easily removed for inspection. Connector is not to
be covered with backfill material and is to remain clean.
iv) Prohibit the use of materials that may form an electrolytic couple of such nature that corrosion
is accelerated in the presence of moisture, unless moisture is permanently excluded from the
junction of such metals. Where unusual conditions exist that would cause deterioration or
corrosion of conductors, use conductors with suitable protective coatings.
MEP 2/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS M
c) Designer/Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications
The system designer/installer shall be qualified and accredited in the design and installation of
lightning protection systems of the type required for the particular project.
d) Alternate System
In locations where air terminals and downconductor are unsightly, an alternate mast system or
equivalent is to be investigated based on local codes and practises.
a) Requirements
i) The installer must arrange for an inspection of the lightning protection system installation in
accordance with the applicable codes and as per the manufacturers instructions. The lightning
protection system will be required to pass any required certification test(s) for authorities having
jurisdiction or for the Owners insurance company requirements. The Electrical Consultant shall
issue a method statement as part of the specifications that will fulfill these requirements. The
intent is for the Lightning Protection System to achieve a UL rating or equivalent.
ii) Prior to final acceptance and before occupancy for pre-opening, the system shall be 100%
inspected, tested and accepted by the authorities. The independent testing agency will perform
these final tests:
Resistance to earth of each isolated earthing point and of the complete bonded installation is to
be measured during the dry season and checked against specified resistance of the applicable
code(s).
Electrical continuity of all conductors, bonds etc. is to be checked by use of resistance measuring
instruments.
b) Documents
Document these inspections on standard forms. Provide one copy of each completed form in the
Operating and Maintenance Manuals and as complete report to FSHR.
Provide advance notice of at least 24 hours to the Electrical Consultant and FSHR before concealing
lightning protection system work. Work shall not be concealed prior to testing and inspection or without
the approval of the Electrical Consultant.
Provide inspection, delivery certificates, manufacturers certificates etc. to the Owner.
Provide the original Authority Certification of the system to the Owner. The installer shall be required
to obtain necessary certifications, approvals, permits etc.
Compare these final tests to the original certification tests and report any deviations to the Electrical
Consultant, Architect and FSHR.
MEP 3/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS M
3 WARRANTY AND PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
Provide a standard 1-year parts and labor warranty. Warrant all exposed components against corrosion for
an additional 4 years.
Warranties shall commence with the opening of the property.
MEP 4/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
N FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
1 General ..................................................................................................... 1
a) Code Requirements
b) System Design Requirements
c) System Components
2 Equipment + Devices ................................................................ 4

a) Transponders
b) Emergency Voice Communication
c) Fire Fighter Communication
d) Power Requirements
e) Annunciators
f) Addressable Pull Stations
g) Addressable Duct Type Smoke Sensors
h) Addressable Thermal Sensor
i) Guestroom Sensors
j) Evc Cone Speakers
k) Evc Horn Speakers
l) Remote Firemans Telephones
m) Strobes
3 Security System Interface .......................................................... 8

a) Requirements
b) Coordination
4 Wiring .................................................................................................... 9
a) General
b) High-Rise Applications
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5 Manufacturer/Installer Qualifications ............................. 9
a) Supply
b) Services
6 Spare Parts/Tools ............................................................................. 10

8 Warranty + Preventative Maintenance ........................... 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
1 GENERAL
This section describes the requirements of the fire alarm systems. The system shall be comprised of a
microprocessor based, addressable fire alarm system with emergency voice communications and additional
features depending on the property building classifications. Additional features described include fire
fighters communications, smoke control, elevator homing and interconnections to other building systems.
a) Code Requirements
i) All system components and work in conjunction with the system installation must be in
accordance with (as a minimum) the latest applicable local code requirements. In all locations
the relevant codes of NFPA 70, 71, 72 and 101 shall be followed. In Europe, Africa, the Middle
East and Asia/Pacific Regions the relevant codes of DIN/VDE, IEC, BS and IEE should be
followed. Always consult applicable municipal requirements for building permit approval and
local governing fire authorities prior to commencing the design. Where more than one given
standard can be applied then the standards of NFPA shall take precedence.
ii) Additionally the system and its components shall comply with but not be limited to the following
specific codes:
National Electric Code, Article 760.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (ULC): The system and all components shall be listed
by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for use in fire protective signalling system under the
applicable ULC standards.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
International Standards Organization (ISO)
ISO-9000
ISO-9001
European Union (EU)
EMC Directive 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements
CENELL
Appropriate European Committee for Electro-Technology Standardization Standards.
b) System Design Requirements

i) The requirements for fire alarm systems for the properties shall generally be dictated by local fire
and building codes and the minimum standards set forth herein. The most stringent requirements
shall generally apply to properties with buildings classified as high rise, in which full fire alarm
system features shall be provided including the following:
multiplexed, two stage, zoned, addressable system utilizing initiating devices (pull
stations, heat detectors, products of combustion detectors, suite alarm detectors) and
alarm indicating devices (speakers, horns, strobes);
emergency voice communication (EVC) consisting of centralized controls (microphone
handsets, amplifiers, tone generators) and speakers/horns located throughout property;
MEP 1 / 11
2007 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
fire fighters telephone communications consisting of centralized controls (microphone
handsets, amplifiers) and remote handsets located typically on every floor or specific
areas to local code requirements;
remote annunciators consisting of active or passive graphic types, LED/LCD types and
cathode ray tube (CRT) types;
smoke control system consisting of control switches, relays, etc. and connections to air
handling equipment to close/open dampers or activate fans to suit specific smoke control
requirements.
fire rating of conductors for power and control to control panels and transponders;
redundant feeder risers to provide two conductor paths of power/control to control panels
and transponders in event of failure of one path;
homing of elevators in which upon alarm activation, elevators shall be sequenced to home
to ground floor (except if ground floor is zone of alarm) and a designated elevator shall be
limited for fire fighters use.
central alarm and control facility (CACF) where the main control panel, main EVC and
fire fighters communication controls, main annunciator/printer and smoke controls shall
be located; the CACF shall also typically house the central security operations of the
property.
ii) Low rise properties shall require less features than high rise properties with provisions of the
above items either not required or reduced in scope. Generally items iii) through viii) are not
necessary unless required by local codes and authorities. The requirements for EVC are required
for all properties.
iii) In smaller properties including those classified as low rise, the CACF would not be a dedicated
room but may be a designated response point such as the security office or at the main lobby.
iv) Additional system requirements that shall be considered in the design of the system include:
type of remote annunciators generally a passive colour graphic shall be provided with a
remote LED/LCD annunciator at the main entrance to property which the fire fighters are
expecting to use; secondary panel located in Operators room where initial annunciation
is frequently done; for large properties, a CRT type annunciator shall be considered for
use at the CACF;
locations for transponders the number of transponders is generally determined by system
size and in consultation with system manufacturers; transponders may be provided in
remote buildings and networked to main building panel.
Electromagnetic door holders and electromagnetic door locks upon activation of fire
alarm, electromagnetic door holders and locks shall release doors; a pull station shall be
provided adjacent electromagnetic locked doors connected such that operation of pull
station shall release doors;
Interconnections to other building systems connections to building management system
(BMS), emergency power gensets, security systems and dimming systems shall be made
generally for specific system status information.
v) Generally, in high rise properties, activation of the first stage of fire alarm shall sound an alert
signal in designated areas which may be the floor of activation and the floor above and below.
If investigation of the cause of the alarm indicates a need to evacuate the property, then a
MEP 2 / 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
2nd stage key switch shall be operated. EVC shall also clearly and appropriately give required
instructions. Designate air handling equipment shall be signaled to provide smoke control
operation. Elevators shall go into homing sequence. Local fire department shall be automatically
notified.
vi) Properties that have both high rise and low-rise type building shall be provided with features that
apply to respective applications to the approval of local fire authorities. Generally the CACF shall
monitor and control the networked transponders of the property, thus providing a centralized
command location.
c) System Components
In general adhere to the following guidelines in the layout and design of the system components:
i) Provide 100% smoke detector coverage in addition to the requirements by code. As a minimum,
provide in each guestroom, at each elevator lobby, A/V room, in public areas, Function/Ballrooms,
Offices, in the housekeeping service area, inside each electric room, inside the computer room,
inside the PBX/PABX room, inside the TV head end/pay per view control room, any storage
room, in locker rooms, any mechanical or elevator motor rooms, in the housekeeping service
area or garbage storage/handling areas and any other back of house and service areas. Closets
with areas less than 50 square feet (4.6 square meters) do not require smoke detectors. Locate
smoke detectors on ceilings or walls as required by NFPA codes and the manufacturers
instruction to achieve proper coverage. Provide multiple individually addressed smoke detectors
in rooms as required..
ii) For the computer room, PBX/PABX room and TV head end room provide smoke/heat detectors
that will trigger at a lower temperature than the sprinkler heads in these rooms to enable staff to
handle minor alarms without the expensive equipment being damaged by water.
iii) Provide ceiling or wall mounted voice evacuation speakers as required by code. For guestrooms,
in general locate the speaker on the entrance foyer ceiling. All speakers in finished areas shall
be flush mounted. EVC speakers may be incorporated into the Centralized Background Music
Systems, if permitted by local code, which may allow for reduction in the number of speakers
and reduction in overall system costs. EVC messages broadcast from the CACF shall have
priority over the background music system. The Contractor shall co-ordinate this requirement
with the supplier and installer of the Background Music Systems. If these systems are combined,
then the Contractor shall co-ordinate the location of speakers in places of public assembly and
circulation to ensure the functionality for both voice evacuation and the broadcast of music.
Install horns in mechanical / electrical rooms and service rooms.
iv) Co-ordinate with the architect the location and requirements of all handicapped guestrooms.
Comply with the regulations of ADA for the installation of strobes, horns or other devices that
may be required in guestrooms designed for the physically challenged. The fire alarm system
designer shall have primary responsibility for co-ordinating these requirements with the Architect
and FSHR. Locate these devices in accordance with applicable regulations.
Co-ordinate the location of each device with other devices such as ceiling light fixtures, sprinklers,
access panels, speakers, etc., to achieve a uniform and plumb installation that is aesthetically
pleasing and fully functional. Where possible, co-ordinate the colour of the fire alarm device with
the interior designer. Where permitted by governing authorities, in general the device should
match the colour of the other electric device covers in the room.
v) Provide ceiling or wall mounted strobe-indicating lights as required by code. Locate these
devices in accordance with applicable regulations.
MEP 3 / 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
Provide wall mounted addressable manual pull stations at the entrance to each escape stair.
Install additional manual pull stations at the entrance to all kitchens, the entrance to the laundry/
valet, at the entrance to the chiller and boiler rooms and outside the main switchgear room. All
devices shall be surfaced mounted and installed at the height specified by the local authorities.
Provide firemans telephone in the service area of each guest floor, each public function room
and in all service elevator lobbies of high rise applications, or where required by local applicable
codes.
vi) Be aware of the requirements for smoke control systems, which are specified under the
Mechanical Section. Generally, in high rise applications, each floor will have provisions for smoke
evacuation, elevator lobby or shaft pressurization and stair pressurization. These systems are
required to interface with the fire alarm and BMS systems. The fire alarm system designer is
responsible for co-ordinating any and all systems that interface with the Fire Alarm System.
vii) Provide addressable duct smoke detectors on all supply, return and general exhaust fans as
required by local codes. Where return or exhaust fans serve multiple floors or fire zones provide
a detector for each zone or floor located where the branch connects to the riser.
Provide addressable supervisory tamper switches on all fire protection shut off valves. Provide
addressable water flow detectors on all branch sprinkler piping.
viii) Co-ordinate and provide the required addressable input/outputs and local alarm panel for the
computer room pre-action system, if provided.
Co-ordinate and provide the required addressable input/outputs for the loading dock/garage dry
pipe systems, if provided.
Co-ordinate and provide the required input/outputs for all Kitchen Hood Fire Suppression
Systems, if provided.
Co-ordinate and provide the required input/outputs for the elevator controllers.
2 EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES
a) Transponders
i) Transponders shall be intelligent, microprocessor based control panels that connect to and
handle network communications in a peer-to-peer manner, and shall be used in large systems.
If a group of transponders become isolated from the rest of the network ring, that group shall
form a sub-network with all common interaction of monitoring and control remaining intact. In
the event that a single transponder becomes unable to handle the network token, the network
interface card shall continue communications to the rest of the network. The off-line transponder
is reported as such to the network.
ii) Transponders shall include amplifiers, and a two-way fire phone circuits. All communication
trunk wiring shall be electrically supervised.
iii) All transponder controls shall be housed in NEMA 2 or IP 43 sprinkler-proof, wall mounted,
enamel finished, steel cabinets.
MEP 4 / 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
iv) Signal/Speaker circuits shall be independently supervised and fused such that a fault on one
(1) circuit shall not affect the operation of any of the other circuits. Signal circuits for high rise
applications shall be generally configured as follows:
Analogue addressable loop wiring for alarm initiating devices.
Alternate circuit wiring for EVC speakers and firefighters handsets.
Redundant backbone wiring equivalent to North American standard NFPA Style 7.
b) Emergency Voice Communication

i) The voice communication system shall generally be an integral modified triple channel system
with the capability of transmitting minimum three (3) audio signals simultaneously to different
areas of the building. The system shall include custom pre-programmed digitised voice messages,
words, and alarm tones that can be transmitted to all or specific areas of the building. The exact
sequence of operations must be confirmed with FSHR. The voice communication system shall
provide prioritized paging announcements to all zones and selected zones of the building.
ii) One (1) channel will be used for general announcements from a remote microphone paging
and sound/music systems shall be automatically overridden by emergency alarm tones and
emergency paging from the EVC center. General announcements shall include ability to page
specific zones only and all call. Confirm zone arrangement, with FSHR prior to programming.
iii) Each transponder shall have a Master microphone to control the speaker circuits in its own area.
Provide remote handset microphone and paging control unit at telephone switchboard room and
CACF Room.
c) Fire Fighter Communication

i) Provide a 2-way voice communication the CACF and remote emergency fire phones. All wires
between the Fire Alarm and Security Room and all remote telephones shall be continuously
supervised. Any fault, which occurs, shall be reported visually and audibly at the CACF.
ii) A master telephone control module shall be furnished to provide processing of all two-way
communication functions. This module shall include an audible alert for call and trouble signalling;
a trouble silence switch with ring-back, a trouble indication and supervising monitor circuit.
iii) Phone (talk) circuit modules shall be furnished to electronically supervise for shorts, opens and
grounds of circuit wiring. Each phone module shall contain a call-in indication and a 2-position
switch to enable two-way voice communication between remote and master phones.
d) Power Requirements
i) All control panels, transponders and annunciators shall receive power via a dedicated fused
disconnect circuit. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power
failure must be audibly and visually indicated at the transponder and the remote annunciator.
ii) The system shall be provided with sufficient standby capacity to operate the entire system upon
loss of all power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of twenty-four (24) hours with local
code required time, but a minimum of fifteen (15) consecutive minutes of alarm device operation
at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon
power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic.
MEP 5 / 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
iii) Standby power for the system shall be produced maintenance free, by dual sealed, lead acid /
gelled cell batteries. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or
disconnection of the batteries shall be audibly and visually annunciated at the control panel.
iv) System shall be provided with transient voltage surge suppression (TVSS) device to protect
system electronics from surges and spikes on the power lines.
e) Annunciators
i) In large system applications, a printer and CRT annunciator shall be provided in the CACF or
in the Engineers Control Room. Printer shall receive English language text from the fire alarm
control panel in an industry standard ASCII format via. All printed information shall include time
and date.
ii) A desktop CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) with detachable keyboard shall provide an English language
display with time and date of system events. CRT shall be a tilt/swivel, 14 inch (355-mm), monitor
with capability to display minimum 24 lines of information. Information on the screen shall not
scroll off until the acknowledge key is pressed. CRT shall include a composite video output to
drive slave CRTs.
iii) CRTs with keyboards shall provide the following functionality:
Acknowledgment of alarms and trouble conditions.
Alarm silence.
System reset.
Setting of time and date functions.
iv) Active graphic display annunciators shall consist of an electronically stored, multi-coloured,
outline of the property including floors and zones. The display shall indicate locations of exit
doors, fire hose cabinets, siamese connections, stairs, elevators, fire pumps, sprinkler pumps,
gensets, gas shut off valves, etc. YOU ARE HERE notation shall be identified.
LED/LCD remote annunciators shall be provided to local code requirements but shall at a
minimum include one in the telephone operators room.
f) Addressable Pull Stations

i) Pull stations shall be addressable, single action, non-coded, 2 stage (where permitted), Semi-
flush mounted type. Pull stations shall be break-glass; key locked and have 2-sets of sealed N/O
contacts. One (1) contact is to activate when the handle is pulled down, activating a first stage
alarm. The second contact is operated by means of a key switch, which activates the second
stage alarm. Stations adjacent electro-magnetically locked doors shall be complete with auxiliary
contacts to release doors upon 2nd stage alarm, activation. Exact sequence of operation must
be confirmed with the Owners team prior to programming.
g) Addressable Duct Type Smoke Sensors

i) Duct type smoke detector sensor assemblies shall come complete with duct housing, photoelectric
smoke sensor head and sampling tubes as required. The duct-housing base shall come complete
with an auxiliary set of from C dry contacts and terminals for a remote lamp unit.
ii) The duct housing assembly shall consist of an airtight housing mounted on the side of the
MEP 6 / 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
duct. This housing shall contain the sensor base into which the photoelectric sensor head is
inserted.
h) Addressable Thermal Sensor

i) The addressable thermal sensor shall be programmable for any one (1) of the following
functions:
Fixed Temperature Detector Type
Rate of Rise Detector Type
Rate compensated Fixed Temperature Type
ii) The sensors small thermal mass shall allow for an accurate up-to-date temperature reading of
each sensor to be logged at the transponder. It shall be possible for the heat sensor to monitor
and report temperatures of 0 to 53 degrees C. without causing a fire alarm condition.
iii) The rate-of-rise operation shall be selectable for either an 8.3 degrees C. per minute or an 11.1
degrees C. per minute rate of temperature rise.
iv) The fixed temperature setting is selectable for 47 degrees C. or 57 degrees C. and is entirely
independent or the rate-of-rise operation.
v) Both the rate-of-rise and fixed temperature operations shall be self-restoring.
i) Guestroom Sensors
i) The addressable smoke alarm sensor in guestrooms and suites shall be of the photoelectric
type and shall be complete with integral local alarm and be powered by the fire alarm system.
The sensitivity range shall be programmable. The sensors shall be of a low profile design for
both ceiling and wall mount applications. Sensor shall be equipped with a fine 30 mesh insect
screen.
j) Evc Cone Speakers

In all finished areas provide a 4.5 (114mm) cone-type speaker with a round enamel painted steel
baffle suitable for ceiling or wall mount applications. Speaker assembly shall consist of the following:
i) Fire retardant and moisture proof cone rated at 15 watts.

ii) 25 Volt Matching Transformer complete with , , 1 and 2 watt taps.
iii) 220 gram magnet.
iv) 80HZ to 13,000 HZ frequency response.
v) 94db at 1.2m, with a 1 watt input.
vi) Moisture repellent treated steel enclosure.
vii) Pre-tap speakers at watt tap.
MEP 7 / 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
k) Evc Horn Speakers
In all parking areas, unfinished areas or mechanical rooms provide 4 (100mm) red, horn speakers.
Speakers assembly shall consist of the following:
i) Rugged die-cast metal housing.

ii) Vandal resistant grille.
iii) High efficiency driver.
iv) 25 Volt matching transformer with .25, .5, 1 and 2 taps.
v) 400 HZ to 4,000 HZ frequency range.
vi) 90db at 3m, with a 2-watt input.
vii) Pretap horn speakers at 1 watt.
viii) Weatherproof boxes for horns exterior or in wet locations.
l) Remote Firemans Telephones

Remote firemens telephones shall be housed in a flush mounted steel cabinet with a hinged door
assembly. Cabinet shall be finished in Red with the inscription FIRE EMERGENCY PHONE in
English. The telephone shall be constructed of red cycolac Type T thermal ABS material and have
a coiled line cord.
m) Strobes
Provide a 24 VDC strobe complete with 12,000 candle power, or of power required by local
authorities.
3 SECURITY SYSTEM INTERFACE
a) Requirements
Provide requirements to interface fire alarm system to security system for the following:
i) Automatic unlocking of fail-safe security electric locking mechanisms upon a fire alarm
condition; provide NC auxiliary dry contacts as per security system requirements.
ii) Manual unlocking of fail-safe security electric locking mechanisms from the CACF; provide
NC auxiliary dry contacts and toggle switch in CACF as per security system requirements.
iii) Automatic bypass of card reader control of elevators upon a fire alarm condition (where
applicable); provide NC dry contact as per security system requirements.
iv) Interface terminal cabinet; lockable, continuous hinge cover, IP 43 type enclosure, complete
with dual screw barrier type terminal strips and lamacoid identification nameplates on cover
(labels on terminals)
v) Manual unlock switch: maintained DPDT contact toggle switch mounted on single gang plate
with guard and complete with identification nameplate.
vi) Install interface terminal cabinet and switch in CACF. Provide wiring in conduit from contacts
MEP 8 / 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
and switch to cabinet terminals. Provide required power wiring.
b) Coordination
Refer to security system design documents for exact requirements.
4 WIRING
a) General
Wire and cable shall be listed for fire alarm circuits; color-coded insulation, solid copper conductors,
as per IEC, IEE Regulations and NFPA requirements. All wiring and cable shall be sized and installed
in accordance with the system manufacturers instructions and code requirements.
b) High-Rise Applications
For high rise application, provide two (2) hour fire rated, mineral insulated, copper sheathed, copper
conductors or other approved fire feeder provisions for the following:
For power wiring to and between each transponder.

For multiplexed signal wiring from the main console to transponders and to remote
annunciators.
For wiring as required by local codes.
5 MANUFACTURER/INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
a) Supply
i) The Fire Alarm System and all components shall be supplied and installed complete by one
company. Acceptable companies shall have at least 15 years history of providing fire alarm
system, local service access, UL/ULC listed (or equivalent certified in regions other than North
American).
ii) The Fire Alarm System suppliers shall also provide a letter of 12 years part/labour support.
b) Services
i) The manufacturer and installer shall have an office, with 24-hour phone contact for emergency
service, staffed with factory trained engineers and technicians fully capable of providing
instructions, routine maintenance and emergency call back service on all system components.
ii) The Supplier shall have in place a support facility within 50 miles (110 km) of the site with
spare parts inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment. For resorts in remote
locations the above requirements shall be waived provided that the supplier complies with 24-
hour emergency phone contact as outlined above. Additionally, the supplier must be able to
provide emergency service within 48 hours and will be required to maintain essential spare parts
on site.
MEP 9 / 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
6 SPARE PARTS/TOOLS
In additional to requirements of General Design Requirements, the following spare parts/tools shall
be provided:
One hand held remote terminal from the manufacturer or the latest model Laptop computer to
facilitate field programming of the system.
Special tools required for the operation and maintenance of the system and all its components.
One complete set of spare fuses.
One spare power supply and battery for a system transponder.
One spare water flow detector.
4 spare manual pull stations.
If manual call points (pull stations) are equipped with glass rods or break glass then provide 50
spare of each.
4 spare smoke detectors of each type.
4 spare heat detectors.
One spare tamper switch (valve supervisor).
Refer to requirements in General Design Requirements.
Provide 40 hours of instruction upon completion of work and after work has been commissioned
and accepted by the independent testing/commissioning agency and the local authority having
jurisdiction. All points and programs are to be tested and verified. The system, when 100% complete
and commissioned, shall undergo a 72-hour full automatic test period under the supervision of the
propertys Director of Engineering where all devices are to operate trouble free with no failures. Should
any failures occur during the test period then repairs shall be made and a new 72 hour test period
begun. Upon completion of the successful test the system shall be deemed acceptable to FSHR
MEP 10 / 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS N
8 WARRANTY AND PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE
Refer to requirements in General Design Requirements
Provide full 1-year parts and labor warranty with emergency service available 24 hours, 7 days a
week at no additional cost to property Owner.
Provide scheduled preventative maintenance as per the manufacturers instructions during the
warranty period at no additional cost to property Owner. In general provide for monthly service visits
during the warranty period. Perform testing of all devices twice during the warranty period. Clean
all smoke detectors twice during the warranty period at 6-month intervals Programming changes,
software updates and additional training shall also be included during the warranty period under the
provisions of the service contract.
The warranty period shall not commence until the satisfactory completion of the 72-hour system test
and acceptance by Four Seasons.
MEP 11 / 11
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BUILDING AUTOMATION + ENERGY

O MANAGEMENT
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
b) Approved Providers
c) Primary Components
2 Control System ................................................................................... 1

a) System Design
b) Central Server
c) Distributed Controllers
d) Network Communications
3 Functional Principles .................................................................. 2

a) Primary Function
b) Alarm + Condition Monitoring
c) Software Programming
4 Additional Requirements ......................................................... 3

a) Warranty
b) System Documentation
c) Training of Operating Personnel
5 Controls Equipment ............................................................... 4

a) Room/Suite Fan Coil Unit Control
b) Room/Suite Thermostat
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS O
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) This section describes the requirements for the building automation and energy management
system. The building automation and energy management system (hereafter referred to as the
BAS) is to be a state-of-the-art, expandable, integrated Direct Digital Control (DDC) networked
control system, for the monitoring and control of primary and secondary mechanical equipment
and the implementation of energy management features for the entire facility.
b) Approved Providers
i) The BAS is to be provided by an organization specializing in design, installation, commissioning
and service of DDC systems, having completed five (5) projects of similar size and complexity
within the preceding five (5) years, employing certified controls engineers and technicians
experienced in this type of work. Acceptable providers include: Honeywell (Excel 5000), Johnson
Controls (Metasys), Siemens Building Technologies (Apogee), or FSHR approved equivalent.
c) Primary Components
i) The BAS is to include a high-speed, peer-to-peer network of microcomputer based Direct Digital
Control (DDC) controllers with web-based operator interface. Each mechanical system, building
floor plan, and control device to be displayed through point-and-click graphics. Web server
with network interface card to gather data from this system and generate web pages that can
be accessed through conventional web browser on any PC connected to network. Operators
to access this system through web browser, and browser interface to perform normal operator
functions.
2 CONTROL SYSTEM
a) System Design
i) Design of the BAS is based on the contract documents prepared by the Engineering Consultant.
Specifically the Control Sequences, Control Schematics, Points Lists, and Equipment Schedules
will determine the size and scope of the BAS.
ii) The architecture of the BAS is to be modular, permitting stepped expansion of application
software, system peripherals, and field hardware.
b) Central Server
i) A central BAS web server communicates with distributed BAS controllers that receive information
from field mounted sensors and switches and transmit instructions to actuators to perform control
sequences.
ii) The central BAS web server performs global application programs and data consolidation:
communicating with controllers, obtaining data from field devices for central monitoring of
building systems, and transmitting instructions to controllers, and has software routines for:
BAS Server operation, database creation and data storage, web based graphical user interface
with generation and display of visual representations of building systems, report formulation,
printing, and presentation, alarm detection and reporting and event initiated programming.
MEP 1/4
2007 BUILDING AUTOMATION + ENERGY MANAGEMENT
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS O
c) Distributed Controllers
i) The BAS is to include distributed data gathering panels / local BAS controllers located in
mechanical rooms, third party integration devices for connection to manufacturers control
panels, and application specific controllers coupled with a building management server, graphics
packages, printer and web browser interface.
ii) Each BAS controller is to operate with local closed loop programming, independent from server,
if peer-to-peer communication is interrupted; to perform resident control routines, receiving
information from field mounted sensors and switches and transmitting instructions to actuators to
perform control sequences; to manage local hardware and software alarms; to collect historical
data; to facilitate operator input and output and to communicate with Central BAS web server
and operator interface.
d) Network Communications
i) Communication between the central BAS web server and BAS controllers allows the central
BAS web server to obtain data from the field devices for central monitoring of building systems
and transmit instructions to BAS controllers.
3 FUNCTIONAL PRINCIPLES
a) Primary Function
i) The primary function of the BAS is to aid the FSHR Director of Engineering and the building
operations staff in the everyday operation of the facility. Using the BAS operator interface, the
building operator is able to: (i) receive alarms, logs and reports; (ii) monitor operating conditions;
(iii) change control set points, operating schedules, and (iv) program data gathering and energy
usage reporting.
b) Alarm and Condition Monitoring

i) Examples of the kinds of critical facility alarms that are to be annunciated on the BAS include:
kitchen cooler and freezer loss-of-refrigeration alarms, sanitary lift station and storm sump
pump high level alarms, water storage tank low level alarm, loss of utility power, on emergency
power - generator running, emergency generator trouble, electrical substation high temperature
alarm, etc.
ii) Examples of the monitoring of operating conditions monitored include environmental data and
control of heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems, air handling units, cooling towers,
boilers, hot water circulating pumps, chillers, chilled and condenser water pumps; monitoring
temperature sensors located in public areas, and system temperatures in domestic hot water
systems, chilled water systems, condenser water systems, temperature and humidity sensors
for indoor swimming pool and whirlpool areas.
MEP 2/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS O
c) Software Programming
i) Examples of the kinds of software modules required for setpoint control, setting of operating
schedules and programming of data gathering and energy use reporting are: Scheduling, Optimal
Start/Stop, Temperature based load control, Supply air reset, Enthalpy Economizer, Grouping
of objects, Alarms, Electrical demand management, Maintenance Management, Sequencing,
PID Control, Staggered Start, Energy Calculations, Anti-Short Cycling, On/Off Control with
Differential, Run-Time Totalization.
4 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
a) Warranty
i) System provider is to guarantee and service the installation for one year.
b) System Documentation
i) Contract documents, including: Control Sequences, Control Schematics, Points Lists, and
Equipment Schedules.
ii) As-built interconnection wiring diagrams, wire lists of field installed system with identified,
ordering number of each system component and service;
iii) Floor plans with accurate depiction of location of system devices, controllers, and trunk wiring;
iv) Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals;
v) Original Software: furnish one original set of application and system software on original media.
Disks to bear manufacturers label.
vi) Original-issue copies of software to include operating systems, custom programming language,
application generation, graphic support, maintenance support, operator workstation or web
server software, and other utilities provided in support of installed system.
c) Training of Operating Personnel

i) Arrange for the BAS contractor to provide services of competent Engineer, familiar with BAS
software, hardware and building operating sequences to instruct Owners operating personnel,
for period of not less that five (5) days during cooling season and five (5) days during heating
season.
ii) Operator instructions to be performed following mutually agreed upon schedule established
during building commissioning.
iii) Provide instructions to owners designated personnel on operation of computer interface to
BAS and describe its intended use. Operator orientation to include overall operational program,
equipment functions, commands, system generation, advisories, and appropriate operator
intervention in responding to Systems operation.
iv) Additional instruction to include description of chronological information flow from field sensors,
contacts and flied-located BAS controllers to centrally located BAS web server and overview of
BAS communication network.
MEP 3/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS O
5 CONTROLS EQUIPMENT
a) Room/Suite Fan Coil Unit Control

i) The thermostat will normally be located in the guestroom bedroom area approximately 60
above finished floor level. Thermostats locations are to be carefully coordinated with the interior
designer.
ii) Fan coil units are to be controlled by the room thermostat that modulates/cycles control valves
on cooling or heating coils or electric heat.
iii) Controls are to be silent in operation, and where electric heating elements are used, the primary
electrical contactor is to be of the silent, mercury type or equivalent.
iv) MANDATORY: When the room is sold/rented, the fan is to run continuously at the selected
default speed and is not to cycle on and off with temperature. When a guest occupies the room,
the thermostat is not to override the setpoint or fan speed or fan status selected by the guest.
v) MANDATORY (WARM HUMID CLIMATES ONLY): When the exterior balcony door switch
indicates that the door has been held open for a (programmable) two minutes, shut-down the
fan coil unit serving the room, until the exterior door is closed.
vi) MANDATORY (WARM HUMID CLIMATES ONLY): Provide thermostat with an integral humidistat
and with on/off cycling of fan coil unit to control humidity.
vii) OPTIONAL: When the room is unsold, the thermostat may, in addition to resetting the control
deadband (to allow room temperatures to depart from those maintained when the room is to
be occupied), cycle the fan or change fan speeds to bring room under temperature or humidity
control, to conserve energy. These additional modes of operation are only to be provided where
the wired connection to the room thermostat has also been provided, and the hotel management
system is able to report the sold/unsold status of the room to the thermostat.
viii) OPTIONAL: Additional control functions of the thermostat (lighting control, mini bar monitoring,
smoke detection annunciation, room status annunciation) are not required.
ix) Do not provide motion sensors, guestroom corridor door switches, or other devices to locally
sense room occupancy without FSHR approval.
b) Room/Suite Thermostat
i) Provide INCOMM e4 Smart Digital Thermostat Model e527 (or equal approved by FSHR):
has an auto-off illuminated LCD display of room temperature and setpoint in degrees F or
degrees C with a faceplate mounted touch button to toggle units display;
permits the guest to set desired room temperature setpoint by means of two clearly
labelled faceplate mounted up and down touch buttons;
permits the guest to select one of three fan speeds or turn fan on or off by means of a
faceplate mounted touch button;
permits the operator to set a (programmable) deadband and limits such that heating
setpoint cannot be set over (programmable) 75F and cooling cannot be set below
(programmable) 68F.
is without manufacturers logo, labelling or marking.
MEP 4/4
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
P PLUMBING
1 General ...................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
b) Systems
2 Plumbing Systems ........................................................................ 1

a) Incoming Service
b) Domestic Cold Water Distribution
c) Domestic Hot Water Distribution
d) Storm Water Drainage
e) Sanitary Waste Disposal
3 Special Requirements ................................................................ 3

a) Guestroom Tub
b) Guestroom Shower
c) Fan Coil Unit Condensate Drains
d) Ice Making Equipment on Guestroom Floors
e) Irrigation, Pools, Fountains + Water Features
f) Valet Special Systems
4 Plumbing Equipment .................................................................. 4

a) Water Heaters
b) Water Softeners
c) Domestic Cold Water Booster Pumps
d) Sewage + Sump Pumps
e) Hose Bibbs
f) Floor + Roof Drains
g) Grease Interceptor
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
a) Connections to Equipment
b) Flushing + Disinfecting
c) Metering + Instrumentation
d) Insulation
6 Piping Materials ................................................................................. 7

a) Plumbing Piping
b) Natural Gas Piping
c) Fuel Oil System
7 Plumbing Fixtures + Trim .......................................................... 8

F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS P
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) This section describes the requirements for plumbing systems, including piping, equipment and
fixtures
b) Systems
Plumbing systems typically include the following:
i) Water Supply:
Connection to incoming water service for domestic and fire use, with back flow
prevention;
On-site water storage;
Water softening systems;
ii) Domestic Water:
Domestic cold water distribution;
Domestic hot water generation and storage;
Domestic hot water distribution and recirculation;
iii) Special Systems:
Metering and instrumentation on plumbing systems;
Special water and waste systems;
Services to laundry systems;
Services to kitchen systems;
iv) Waste Systems:
Storm water drainage;
Sanitary waste disposal.
2 PLUMBING SYSTEMS
a) Incoming Service
i) The water supply to the property is to be sufficient to adequately accommodate both the daily
total water requirement and the instantaneous peaks.
ii) The water supply must be reliable with a proven history of continuous, adequate service.
iii) In the event that the first two criteria cannot be met, provide a water storage facility, of sufficient
size (usually a minimum of one day using 350 U.S. gallons per room per day average requirement
or as dictated by local code requirements, whichever is more stringent). The storage tank is to
have a minimum of (4) four compartments, (2) two independent for domestic water use and (2)
two independent for fire use. Fire fighting water requirements are to be considered in sizing the
water storage facility.
MEP 1/8
2007 PLUMBING
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS P
iv) Water quality from plumbing systems in the facility are to meet the requirements United States
Environmental Protection Agency (US EPA)-enforced Safe Drinking Water Act (SDWA) and meet
the World Health Organization (WHO) requirements. Where the local supply is not sufficient
and requires additional treatment to remove suspended solids, demineralize, soften, chlorinate,
and/or correct pH correction that is not provided by the local water supplier, a water treatment
plant may be required.
v) The end water product is to have a chlorine residual, 7 grain per gallon maximum hardness for
general use and a minimum pH of 6.9.
b) Domestic Cold Water Distribution

i) Provide domestic cold water system with distribution pipe, fittings, valves and equipment.
ii) Provide equipment back flow protection where required by code or local authority.
iii) Provide valved connections from supply system to fixtures and other equipment requiring cold
water.
iv) Water pressure at guestroom plumbing fixtures is to be maintained within the minimum and
maximum pressure levels recommended by fixture manufacturer. Minimum water pressure is
to be not less than 40 psi 275 kPa) and maximum water pressure is not to exceed 75 psi (500
kPa).
c) Domestic Hot Water Distribution

i) The domestic water systems is to be an up-fed street pressure system, with booster pumping
and additional pressurization control systems such that the system can provide a minimum
of 20 psi pressure at any plumbing fixture and a minimum of 20 psi pressure at kitchen and
laundry washing machines. Hot water distribution system is to be pressurized by the cold water
system.
ii) Water velocities in the piping system are not to exceed six feet per second for quiet operation
and where quick closing valves are installed, shock-absorbing devices are to be installed to
prevent water hammer.
iii) Multiple fixed temperature recirculated hot water systems are normally provided, each serving
different portions of the facility with different loop water temperatures.
iv) A 120F (49C) water system is to serve the guestrooms, public areas, and employee
restrooms.
v) A 140F (60C) water system is to serve kitchen fixtures and equipment. Where 180F (82C)
hot water is required at glass and dishwasher equipment, booster heaters are to be provided as
part of the kitchen contract.
vi) The laundry domestic hot water is to be designed to provide 160F (41C) hot water or other
temperature required by the laundry consultant. The hot water system is to be mechanically
circulated, with high points automatically vented by means of float operated vent valves piped
to drain.
vii) The domestic hot water systems to be provided with a recirculation system to maintain
temperature throughout the piping systems during low usage periods using bronze recirculating
pumps.
MEP 2/8
2007 PLUMBING
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS P
d) Storm Water Drainage
i) Storm water drainage is to include a gravity system of piping inside the building, collecting water
from roof areas through roof drains connected to leaders, which in turn connect to house drains
terminating outside the building or discharging to the site storm service.
ii) Drainage below storm water outfall elevation that cannot be conveyed by gravity, is to be collected
to a storm sump pit and pumped by means of a duplex pump installation into the house drain at
a point where the house drain leaves the building.
iii) The site is to be drained through a piping system with catch basin located as required by the
terrain. The building system is to discharge into either the storm sewer or combination sewer
system. The site utilities or civil consultant is normally responsible for services exterior to the
building at a point 5 ft (1.5m) outside of the building footprint.
e) Sanitary Waste Disposal

i) Sanitary waste disposal is to include a gravity system of piping inside the building, collecting
sanitary wastes from plumbing fixtures, kitchen equipment and laundry equipment.
ii) System is to include solid waste and vent stacks, solid waste and vent branches to fixtures and
a house drain and house sewer discharging to a public sanitary sewer, combination sewer or a
sewage treatment plant.
iii) Sanitary wastes located below sanitary sewer outfall elevation that cannot be drained by gravity,
is to be collected to a sanitary ejector pit equipped with duplex ejector pumps discharging to the
site sanitary service.
iv) Where ejector pumps are used, there is to be a suitable method of preventing impassable solids
from reaching the impeller of the pumps such as the Flush and Clean system manufactured by
the Chicago Pump Company. Any other method used to overcome this problem will be subject
to the approval of FSHR.
3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
a) Guestroom Tub
i) Tub locations in typical guestroom and/or suites are to be served with domestic hot and cold
water piping sized and provided with sufficient water pressure to deliver a minimum discharge
flow rate of 4.5 gpm (3.8 l/m) at the tub fill spout.
ii) Tub locations are to be connected with a minimum 2 (50 mm) waste line sloped minimum 2%
slope (unless otherwise required by local code).
b) Guestroom Shower
i) Shower locations in typical guestroom and/or suites are to be served with domestic hot and cold
water piping sized and provided with sufficient water pressure to deliver a minimum discharge
flow rate of 4.5 gpm (3.8 l/m) at the shower head.
ii) Shower locations are to be connected with a minimum 1-1/2 (38 mm) waste line sloped at
minimum 2% (unless otherwise required by local code).
iii) Provide pressure balancing mixing valves for showers.
MEP 3/8
2007 PLUMBING
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS P
c) Fan Coil Unit Condensation Drains
i) Provide a complete independent condensate drainage system from guest room fan coil units.
ii) Provide flexible connection in piping connection between drain pan and rigid condensate drain
piping.
iii) Maintain minimum % slope from condensate drain pan to connection to vertical riser
iv) Connect to sanitary or storm drainage (in accordance with requirements of local authority having
jurisdiction) by means of an indirect connection.
d) Ice Making Equipment on Guestroom Floors

i) Provide in-line filtration on domestic cold water service to ice making machines.
ii) Insulate first 8 ft. of sanitary drain piping from floor drains in vicinity of ice making machines.
iii) Coordinate specific requirements with kitchen/food services consultant.
e) Irrigation, Pools, Fountains and Water Features

i) Filters, circulating pumps chlorine treatment for bacteria and acid control chemicals to control the
water chemistry are normally specified by specialty pool, fountain or water feature consultant.
ii) Provide domestic water to and drainage from irrigation systems, pool and pool equipment rooms,
fountain and water feature equipment spaces.
f) Valet Special Systems

i) A vacuum piping system is to be provided to supply laundry/valet equipment and is normally
specified by the laundry consultant.
ii) A compressed air piping system is to be provided to supply laundry/valet equipment and is
normally specified by the laundry consultant.
4 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
a) Water Heaters
i) Water heaters to be of the self-contained storage type, horizontal, gas fired with automatic burner
controls and are to be glass or cement lined Patterson-Kelley indirect-fired scale free water
heaters. Semi-instantaneous type, manufactured by Aerco or equivalent may be considered
with prior approval of FSHR.
ii) Size guestroom component of the domestic hot water load for a minimum of 15 US gallons (57
liters) of storage and 15 gallons (57 liters) per hour recovery per guestroom fixture group for
resorts, low-rise and applications where few rooms share a common domestic hot water system.
When large numbers of rooms share a common centralized hot water system, the storage and
recovery rate may be reduced with prior approval of FSHR.
iii) For the kitchen and laundry hot water loads, confirm requirements with specialty consultants.
MEP 4/8
2007 PLUMBING
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS P
b) Water Softeners
i) Provide water softeners sized to soften incoming water service where local water quality requires
softening. Size softeners to condition water for dishwashing, laundry and boiler feed water.
ii) Provide fully automatic packaged potable water conditioning equipment, including: softener
tanks, exchange resin beds, brine system, valves, interconnecting piping and controls.
iii) Equipment, chemicals and services to be provided by specialist firm with an established
reputation in field.
iv) Acceptable manufacturers: Premier Water & Energy Technology, Inc., Ashland Chemical Co.,
Cullligan, or equivalent.
c) Domestic Cold Water Booster Pumps

i) Locate booster pumps close to the incoming water supply where required for high-rise buildings.
In low-rise hotels, booster pumps may be needed for the water softening equipment. Locate
these pumps adjacent to the water softening equipment.
d) Sewage and Sump Pumps

i) No pumps with the exception of sewage and sump pumps are to located in a pit. Pumps so
located are to have electrical connections and motors located above the top of the pit. An I-
Beam or eyebolt of suitable capacity conveniently located to insure fast and easy removal of the
motor and sump is to be installed above each pump.
ii) Ejector pumps are to be cast iron pumps with bronze impellers and bearings with stainless steel
shafts or sleeves.
e) Hose Bibbs
i) Hose bibbs and other water outlets in public areas, planters, etc. are to have screwdriver stops.
In cold climates hose cocks is to be of the frost proof design.
ii) Provide hose bibb(s) at the porte cochere, at each tennis court, at exterior terraces and pool
decks for cleaning; and in valet parking areas (for car washing).
f) Floor and Roof Drains

i) A floor drain and hose bib with screwdriver stop is to be installed in each public and staff
washroom under a vanity counter at 24 above finished floor.
ii) Pipe cleanouts are to be readily accessible. They are not to be exposed in unfinished areas
or floor or wall type in finished areas. Cleanouts in ceiling voids will only be accepted when, in
the opinion of FSHR, they cannot be terminated at floor level or wall line. Where cleanouts are
installed in ceiling voids, a 24 X 24 access panel is to be located beneath each cleanout.
g) Grease Interceptor
i) Grease interceptors are to be provided. Grease trap specifications and locations are to be
prepared by the mechanical consultants and approved by the kitchen consultant.
ii) Locate grease interceptors exterior to the building and remote from public areas, and in locations
providing easy access for both regular maintenance and pumper trucks.
MEP 5/8
2007 PLUMBING
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS P
5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
a) Connections to Equipment
i) The equipment sub-trade or specialty consultant is to supply dimensioned rough-in drawings.
ii) Rough in hot and cold water, waste and vent connections to equipment. When equipment has
been set and installed, connect the equipment with plumbing accessories and drainage piping
from the rough-in work.
iii) Provide vacuum breakers and backflow preventers on equipment connections, and hose bibbs,
and on fixture connections without adequate air gaps.
iv) Where hot and cold water supply pipes connect to combination supply fitting with shut-off valve
on discharge, or where combination supply fitting is equipped with manual or thermostatic mixing
valve, equip each hot and cold water supply pipe with composition disc swing check fitting.
v) Provide shut-off valve on each service line close to apparatus and brass trap complete with
cleanout on waste connection unless waste discharges directly into floor drain or funnel drain.
b) Flushing and Disinfecting

i) Clean, disinfect and flush domestic water systems in accordance with AWWA C651, Disinfecting
Water Mains. Complete piping pressure tests prior to flushing and disinfecting operations.
Engineering Consultant is to witness tests.
ii) Water mains are to be flushed through available outlets with sufficient flow to produce velocity
of (5 ft/min (1.5 m/s) within piping for 10 minutes, or until foreign materials have been removed
and flushed water is clear. Open and close valves, hydrants and service connections to ensure
thorough flushing. When flushing has been completed to satisfaction of Consultant, introduce
strong solution of chlorine into water main and ensure that it is distributed throughout entire
system.
iii) Provide laboratory testing reports for water samples taken from newly disinfected mains.
iv) Contractor is to provide certification letter to Ownership and FSHR that flushing and disinfecting
of domestic water systems has been completed and report system volume (quantity of water)
required to fill systems.
c) Metering and Instrumentation

i) Coordinate requirements for incoming water meter with local supply authority.
ii) Provide water consumption metering on: (i) main hotel water supply, (ii) kitchen hot and cold
water supply, (iii) laundry hot and cold water supply, (iv) domestic hot water supply; (v) boiler
feed water; (vi) cooling towers make-up water; (vii) irrigation systems.
iii) Provide meters for tenant and/or residential component as directed by Ownership and FSHR.
iv) Provide bimetal, dial type insertion thermometer at the inlet and outlet of each water-heating
device.
d) Insulation
i) Insulation requirements for plumbing system piping and equipment is specified in Section entitled
INSULATION.
ii) All cold piping, fittings, valves and metal tanks not buried should be insulated with insulation,
MEP 6/8
2007 PLUMBING
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS P
including vapour barrier. In climates where cold temperature is safely above the dew point of the
ambient unconditioned air at all times, insulation on cold water lines may be omitted.
iii) All hot water piping, circulation piping, tanks, fittings and valves should be insulated.
iv) All piping subject to freezing is to be insulated and, if necessary, provided with electric heating
cable.
v) Fiberglass type of insulation is preferable for both cold and hot application. Under no circumstances
will materials, which produce noxious gases when subjected to heat, be accepted.
vi) For specific requirements of insulation type, quality and thickness refer to insulation section.
6 PIPING MATERIALS
a) Plumbing Piping
i) Water sources, as identified in Domestic Water Systems, Scope of System is to be equipped
with piping materials of a quality to U.S. Standard for Class 150 cast iron water pipe with Class
D fittings, and spigot ends with lead and oakum joints or mechanical joints. Valves is to be iron
bronze trim with ends to match the piping. The aforementioned materials are to be used in the
portions of the system that are buried in the earth. For unburied cold water piping, the choice
of piping materials is determined by the character of the water. With fairly good water having a
minimum PH of 7 and a hardness of no greater than 6 grains, copper piping and threaded fittings
can be used for cold water piping 1 ips and over. All hot and cold water piping 1 and smaller
should be copper tubing type L with sweat fittings and joints made with tin and antimony solder,
95/5. The use of lead solder for potable water systems is not permitted.
ii) Vertical soil, waste and vent stacks and vertical storm water piping inside the building, and not
buried, are to be uncoated cast iron with lead and oakum joints. Unburied horizontal branch
sanitary and vent piping is to PVC Schedule 40 with solvent weld fittings.
iii) Sanitary and storm water piping outside the building is to be extra heavy cast iron, vitrified tile,
PVC or reinforced concrete pipe. The type selected, would in some instances, depend upon
code requirements.
iv) Swimming pool and whirlpool piping can be PVC Schedule 80 with threaded PVC fittings, using
Teflon tape as a jointing compound or copper tubing with sweat joints.
b) Natural Gas Piping

i) Provide natural gas distribution piping to connect gas fired equipment, and provide required
vent piping to atmosphere in accordance with national standards and requirements of local
authorities.
ii) Pipe is to be Schedule 40 black steel standard weight mild steel pipe with makers name stamped
or rolled into each length. Provide gas code approved ball type or lubricated plug type shut off
valves to isolate equipment.
iii) Slope gas piping in the direction of flow to low points.
iv) Provide full pipe diameter, long drip pockets at the bottom of all vertical risers, at piping low
points.
v) Identify natural gas piping in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
vi) Install gas piping without pockets, with drip legs or drip pots installed at drops in accordance
with gas code.
MEP 7/8
2007 PLUMBING
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS P
vii) The contractor is to make provisions for the installation of the gas metering equipment, regulator,
venting, and coordinate with the local utility company. The contractor is to pay any fees associated
with the installation of metering equipment.
viii) Gas piping is to be tested by means of an air pump and mercury gauge to a pressure equal to
the maintenance of a column of mercury six inches high for a period of one hour. This test is to
be witnessed by the Owner and representatives of authority having jurisdiction.
ix) Fittings above ground and within building are to be galvanized, banded, malleable iron fittings.
Valves in gas piping is to be 125 lb. plug cocks with square nut. Provide three (3) operating
wrenches for each size required. Valves are to be as follows:
Valves 2 and smaller are to be all brass.
Valves 2 and larger are to be iron bodied with brass plug and washer.
All check valves 3 and longer are to be iron bodied bronze mounted.
All check valves 2 or smaller are to be brass or bronze.
Right and left couplings will be used on gas piping in lieu of unions.
Piping joints are to be made up with either litharge or plastic tape. In no case is red lead
or pipe dope to be used.
c) Fuel Oil System

i) Provide fuel oil systems for boilers and for Emergency Power Generators. Note that fuel
systems for Emergency Power Generators will be dedicated for that purpose only and will not
be combined with fuel systems serving other equipment.
ii) If boilers are oiled fired, capacity of fuel storage facilities depends on dependability of supply.
A minimum two week supply is considered standard. Fuel meters/gauges are to be supplied
based on the type of fuel specified.
7 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM
i) Specific specific manufacturers are identified to establish a standard of performance, quality of

material and workmanship.
ii) Products are normally selected by the Interior Designer or Architect. Products by manufacturers
other than those specifically named may be proposed as alternatives provided they are of equal
performance, quality of manufacture and workmanship.
iii) The plumbing subcontractor is to supply a book of catalogue cuts of plumbing fixtures and trim
for approval by FSHR prior to ordering. After approval by FSHR and other consultants, a copy
of the book is to be returned to FSHR.
MEP 8/8
2007 PLUMBING
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Q TESTING + BALANCING
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
a) Scope
b) Quality Assurance
c) Submittals
d) Site Visits During Construction
2 Testing .................................................................................................... 1
a) Vibration Testing
b) Sound Testing
c) Leak Testing
d) Temperature Control Adjusting
e) Equipment Testing
f) Miscellaneous Testing
3 Balancing ............................................................................................. 3
a) Air Balancing + Adjusting
b) Water Balancing + Adjusting
b) Final Water + Air Balancing
4 Completion ........................................................................................... 5
a) Verification of Testing + Balancing Report
b) Warranty (Water + Air Balancing)
c) Site Visits After Completion
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS Q
1 GENERAL
a) Scope
i) This section outlines the testing and balancing requirements for vibration and sound testing of
equipment and systems, pipe leak testing, air and water testing and balancing, temperature
controls calibration and adjusting and, miscellaneous testing. This section also provides quality
assurance requirements for specialist firms engaged to provide the work of this section.
ii) Testing, adjusting and balancing is to be performed as described by the contract documents.
Ensure that the specialist companies are engaged in time to review the details of the work and
can recommend exact locations for valves, dampers and other means of adjustment prior to
installation.
b) Quality Assurance
i) Testing, adjusting and balancing work is to be performed by specialist companies, licensed to
carry out the work in their field of expertise.
ii) Water and air testing, adjusting and balancing work is to be performed by an independent firm in
good standing with either Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or the National Environmental
Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
c) Submittals
i) Upon completion of testing, adjusting and balancing, submit 5 copies of the results for review by
the Consultant and FSHR operating staff.
d) Site Visits During Construction

i) Each testing Company/Agency is to visit the site with adequate frequency to ensure that the
installation is to not adversely affect the testing, adjusting and balancing.
2 TESTING
a) Vibration Testing
i) Vibration and alignment field measurements are to be taken for each and every circulating water
pump, water chilling unit, air handling unit, and fan driven by a motor over 10 horsepower.
ii) Readings are to include shaft alignment, equipment vibration, bearing housing vibration, and
other tests directed by the Engineer.
iii) Readings are to be made using portable balancing instrument (Approved manufacturer: IRD
or equivalent) equipment capable of filtering out various unwanted frequencies and standard
reporting forms.
iv) Maximum vibration at any point listed above or specified.
v) Equipment manufacturers are to certify in writing that the field readings which do not exceed the
maximum specified are acceptable to them.
vi) Readings are to be taken with vibration isolation blocked solid to foundation.
MEP 1/6
2007 TESTING AND BALANCING
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS Q
b) Sound Testing
i) Sound level readings is to be taken at ten (10) locations in the building as selected by the
Engineer.
ii) The readings is to be taken on an Octave Band Analyzer in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer.
iii) The Contractor is to submit test equipment data and reporting forms to the Engineer for review.
In order to reduce the ambient noise level, the readings is are be taken at night. Testing is to be
performed in the presence of the Engineering Consultant.
c) Leak Testing
i) The water chilling unit refrigeration systems is to be tested for refrigerant and air leaks at least
two times approximately six (6) months after start up and at the end of the warranty period. The
Contractor is to certify the condition of the refrigeration system in writing after test. Any leaks
detected is to be properly sealed and the above test period repeated. Soap suds and Halide
torch or electronic refrigerant detector is to be used for leak detection. Replace refrigerant and
oil lost during warranty period at no cost to the Owner.
ii) Leak testing for heating water, chilled water and steam and condensate piping is to be conducted
in accordance with ANSI B31.10 Power Piping Code and as specified herein. Before piping
of various systems has been covered or furred in, all piping systems is to be tested tight for 24
hours under hydrostatic pressure 1 times the system working pressures, with the exception
that the maximum test pressure is to be 500 psig. Tests is to be witnessed by the Engineer and
pronounced satisfactory before pressure is removed or any water drawn off.
iii) Sprinkler system is to be leak tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13.
iv) Stand pipe systems is to be leak tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 14.
v) After soils, wastes, and storm lines, etc., have been installed, all outlets is to be temporarily
plugged up and the pipe is to be filled with water full to the top and allowed to remain so filled
for twenty-four (24) hours.
vi) A final test is to be made after vertical and horizontal pipes and roughing in have been run and
before sewer or fixture connection is made. In this case, as before, all pipes in groups of four or
five floors is to be filled with water to the top of vertical lines and allowed to remain so filled for
twenty four (24) hours. Retesting after leaks are repaired is to be at no additional cost.
vii) In addition to the water test, all pipes is to be tested by the peppermint or smoke test, if required
by the Engineer or the Authority.
viii) NOTE: Equipment is to be valved off or removed during the test if its pressure rating is less
than the test pressure. Steam piping is to be provided with the additional temporary supports as
required and at all spring vibration isolation to support the weight of the test liquid.
d) Temperature Control Adjusting

i) Automatic temperature controls is to be field calibrated and all thermostats, dampers, etc.,
adjusted so that control system is in proper operating condition, subject to review by the
Engineer.
MEP 2/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS Q
e) Equipment Testing
i) Pumps are to be tested to check the impeller trim and operating characteristics. The following
data is to be recorded and submitted to the Engineer for review:
ii) Flow at operating conditions where flow venturi or orifices are installed in the system.
iii) Shut off pressure required to check impeller trim.
iv) Discharge pressure at operating conditions.
v) Suction pressure at operating conditions.
vi) Motor amperage and voltage on each phase at operating conditions.
vii) Demonstrate operating controls and safety devices on domestic water pumping systems.
viii) The Contractor is to prove the capacity and performance of each piece of equipment by field
tests as specified herein in various Sections. All equipment and instruments required for tests
as well as additional thermometer wells or gauge connections is to be installed at no additional
cost to the Owner. A qualified representative of the equipment manufacturer is to be present
at the test. These test requirements specifically include the water chilling units, cooling tower,
and pumps. The Engineer may witness tests, if he so desires. The Contractor is to notify the
Engineer, in writing, at least two (2) weeks prior to the day of the test.
f) Miscellaneous
i) Oil sample from refrigeration machine is to be analysed and report submitted.
3 BALANCING
a) Air Balancing and Adjusting
i) Supply air systems installed in finished areas of the building is to be balanced and adjusted as
follows:
ii) After duct systems have been installed, complete with all grills, dampers, ducts, coils and other
items herein after specified, the Contractor is to make adjustments, as required, to deliver the
volume of air at each air outlet within 5% of design flow as shown on the drawings. After the
finished area is occupied, the air volumes is to be readjusted, if required, to properly balance the
cooling loads throughout the conditional areas.
iii) Supply air systems installed in unfinished tenant areas of the building is to be balanced as
follows:
iv) After duct systems have been installed, complete with grills, dampers, ducts, oils and other
items herein after specified, except the duct taps serving the air diffusers in the interior zones,
the Contractor is to make adjustments, as required, to deliver the volumes of air within 5% of air
handling unit design flow.
v) After the unfinished areas are completed and prior to occupancy by the tenant, the Contractor
is to readjust the air volumes, if required, to properly balance the required heating and cooling
loads throughout the conditioned areas.
vi) The final balanced position of manual balancing dampers such as in each air handling unit zone
duct is to be permanently marked on the ductwork.
MEP 3/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS Q
vii) After ventilation systems have been installed, including ducts, grills, louvers, dampers, fans,
and other items as herein after specified, the Contractor is to make adjustments, as required,
to deliver the volumes of air, or differential static pressure in the case of the pressurization fans,
at each air inlet and/or outlet within 5% of design flow. Differential pressure at furthermost point
from the stairwell pressurization fan is to not exceed 0.20 W.G. with all doors closed.
viii) The Contractor is to submit detailed balancing procedures and recording forms for the Engineers
review, prior to commencing any air balancing work.
ix) Submit copies of complete reports in accordance with article entitled Submittals.
b) Water Balancing and Adjusting

i) After piping systems have been installed complete with all pumps, piping, valves, coils and other
items as herein specified, the Contractor is to make adjustments, as required, to deliver the
water volumes at each coil and piece of equipment to within 5% of design flow, or as required,
to properly balance the cooling load throughout the conditioned areas. Each air handling unit
with multiple coils is to have the flow through each coil balanced. Adjustments in water volumes
is to be made in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The Contractor is to submit detailed
balancing procedure and recording forms for the Engineers review prior to commencing any
water balancing.
ii) Submit six (6) copies of complete comprehensive bound reports of the performance of the
systems to the Architect for review and comments. Identify all data completely. Identify the
manufacturers, size, type, location, room number, and zone of each coil and piece of equipment
reported. Give design and actual water flow. Give complete nameplate data for each piece of
equipment reported.
iii) The Contractor is to submit detailed balancing procedures and recording forms for the Engineers
review, prior to commencing any water balancing work.
c) Final Water and Air Balancing

i) After water and air flow are balanced, and with the temperature controls set to produce design
cooling, measure and record all data necessary to compile a complete report to demonstrate
the acceptability of the various mechanical systems. Include at least the following data in the
report:
ii) Outside dry bulb and wet bulb temperature.
iii) Inside dry bulb and wet bulb temperatures in six (6) selected areas of the conditioned space,
room or area selected by the Engineer.
iv) Dry bulb temperature of air entering and leaving all coils.
v) Temperature of water entering and leaving each water coil.
vi) Temperature of all thermometer well locations.
vii) Temperature of water entering and leaving each water chilling unit condenser and evaporator.
viii) Temperature of water entering and leaving each heat exchanger.
ix) Suction and discharge pressure and shut off head of each circulating water pump and domestic
water pump.
x) With controls set for design heating, repeat procedure specified in the immediately preceding
subparagraph.
MEP 4/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS Q
xi) The balanced position of the controlling valve is to be permanently marked on the pipe or
insulation.
xii) Submit copies of complete reports in accordance with article entitled Submittals.
4 COMPLETION
a) Verification of Testing and Balancing Report

i) When the testing, adjusting and balancing report has been received, the Consultant is to
schedule a site visit or visits for the purpose of verifying balancing results contained in the
report. In addition to spot checking equipment performance, a maximum of 30% of all terminal
equipment is to be checked.
ii) The testing and balancing agency is to accompany the Consultant during report verification, and
is to supply all required tools and instruments to take measurements. Instruments used is to be
the same instruments used in performing the testing and balancing work.
iii) If, during the verification procedures, testing and balancing results indicated in the report are
found to differ substantially with the results of spot checks, the report is to be rejected by the
Consultant, and testing, adjusting and balancing procedures is to be repeated and a new report
issued for review and verification.
iv) Testing, adjusting and balancing is to be complete and accepted by the Consultant prior to
application for a Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work.
v) Include a copy of the accepted testing and balancing report in each copy of the operating and
maintenance instruction manuals.
b) Warranty (Water and Air Balancing)

i) When testing, adjusting and balancing work is complete and the balancing report has been
accepted, submit to the Project Manager, in the name of the Owner, an AABC National Guaranty
Certification or NEBB Certificate of Conformance Certification, as applicable, and in addition,
submit to the Project Manager, in the name of the Owner, a written extended warranty covering
one (1) full heating season and one (1) full cooling season, during which time any balancing
problems which occur in the building, with the exception of minor revision work done during
scheduled site visits, will, at no cost, be investigated by your personnel and reported on to the
Project Manager. If it is determined that the problems are a result of improper testing, adjusting
and balancing, they is to be immediately corrected without additional cost to the Owner.
c) Site Visits after Completion

i) After completion of testing, adjusting and balancing work and acceptance of the report, make
the following follow-up site visits:
ii) Once during the first month of building operation;
iii) Once during the third month of building operation;
iv) Once between the fourth and tenth months in a season opposite to the first or third month visit.
MEP 5/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS Q
v) During each visit and accompanied by the Project Managers representative, spot rebalance
terminal units as required to suit building occupants and eliminate complaints.
vi) Schedule each visit with the Consultant.
vii) After each follow-up site visit, issue to the Consultant a report indicating any corrective
work performed during the visit, all abnormal conditions and complaints encountered, and
recommended corrective action.
MEP 6/6
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
R STRUCTURED CABLING - VOICE + DATA
1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 1
2 Industry Standards ........................................................................... 1
Network Design Criteria + Overall System

3 Topology ....................................................................................................
2
4 Technology Rooms .......................................................................... 4

a) Computer Room
b) PABX Room
c) Telecommunications Closet
d) MATV Head End Room
e) AV Control Room
f) Locations
5 Installation Practices + Performance Criteria 5

Cable Standards + Terminations
6 Horizontal Cabling ............................................................................
6
a) General Description
b) Copper Voice + Data Cabling
c) Meeting Space Related Fibre Optic Cable

7 Riser Cabling - Copper ..................................................................
7
a) General
b) Copper Voice

8 Table 1: Riser Cabling - Fibre ................................................
8
a) Voice + Data (Except Meeting Space)
b) Fibre Optic Riser Feeding Meeting Space Closets
c) Typical Fibre Optic Backbone Cabling Requirements
d) Table One- Fibre Optic Capacity
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
9 Patching at Closets ........................................................................
8
a) Patching Voice at Telecommunications Closets
b) Patching Data at Telecommunications Closets
c) Patching
10 Cable Standards + Terminations Cables ..................... 9

a) Station Cables
b) Patch Cables
c) Interface Cables
d) PABX Equipment Cables
Jack Types
11 Administration, Public Space + Back of House.......
11
a) Voice Only Locations
b) Data Only Locations
c) Voice + Data Locations (4-plex Jack)
d) Voice + Data Locations (Duplex Jack)
e) Wireless Voice + Data
Jack Types
12 Guestrooms ...........................................................................................
13
a) Telephone Only Locations
b) Desk Locations
c) TV Locations
d) Wireless Voice + Data Locations
Jack Types
13 Meeting Rooms + Ballrooms ...................................................
14
b) Control Niche Telephones (CN)
c) AV Niche - Voice + Data Only (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4)
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
d) AV Niches With Fibre Optic Cabling (AV1-F, AV2-F)
e) Floor Box Niches (FB1, FB2, FB3)
f) Meeting Space Corridor Niches (GR)
g) Loading Dock / External Access
14 Routing - Meeting Room Cabling ....................................... 16

a) General
b) Meeting Room Patch Panel Requirements - Copper
c) Meeting Room Patch Panel Requirements - Fibre
15 Wireless Voice + Data Services ........................................... 18

16 Voice + Data Incoming Services ........................................... 19
17 Uninterrupted Power + Dedicated Power .................... 20

a) Computer Locations
b) Point of Sale Equipment
18 Warranties + Quality Assurance .......................................... 21

19 Documentation .................................................................................. 22
20 Testing .................................................................................................... 22
Voice + Data Administration Wiring Locations
21 General ....................................................................................................
23
b) Meeting Space
c) Outdoor Telephones
d) Payphones
e) Lifts + Elevator Telephones
f) Mechanical + Electrical Rooms
g) Lift Lobbies
h) POS Locations
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Voice + Data Requirements by Functional Area
22 Table 2 ....................................................................................................
25
a) Important Notes
b) Table 2: Voice + Data Requirements by Area
Point of Sale Requirements by Functional Area

23 Table 3 ....................................................................................................
26
a) Important Notes
b) Table 3: Point of Sale Requirements by Area
Voice + Data Requirements For Guestrooms

24 Table 4 ....................................................................................................
27
a) Important Notes
b) Standard Guestroom Cabling + Configuration
c) FS Executive Suite Cabling + Configuration
d) One Bedroom Suite Cabling + Configuration
e) Two Bedroom Suite Cabling + Configuration
f) Presidential + Royal Suite Cabling + Configuration
g) Table 4: Voice + Data Requirements by Guestroom
25 Locations with Special Cabling Requirements 29

a) Front Desk / Reception Desk
b) Concierge Desk
c) Operators Room (Telecommunications or CORE)
d) Computer Room / PABX Room / Main Systems Room
26 Index Tables ........................................................................................... 32

a) Table 1: Fibre Optic Capacity
b) Table 2: Voice + Data Requirements by Area
c) Table 3: Point of Sale Requirements by Area
d) Table 4: Voice + Data Requirements by Guestroom

F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
1 INTRODUCTION
i) This section describes the requirements for a structured cabling system for the following
technologies:
Wired voice communications
Wireless IP voice communications
Wired and wireless data communications
IP Television
Digital pay per view (PPV) - also known as digital video on demand (DVOD)
Other specialty data cabling requirements, principally for interfaces,
Related specialty UPS power requirements.
ii) This document covers the requirements for the passive components of the network only. If the
cabling contractor is also providing the active network equipment the contractor must separately
consult Four Seasons Hotels Corporate IT standards for active network equipment specifications,
acceptable vendors, logical network design and related specifications.
Note that in all cases where active network equipment is referenced in this document it
would be provided as part of the overall active network equipment provision for the project
and is not to be provided by the cabling contractor unless they are proposing to provide all
the active network equipment.
iii) Consult Four Seasons standard specification for telephone switches for details on PABX
equipment specifications, acceptable vendors, switch programming requirements and related
specifications.
Note that in all cases where PABX equipment is referenced in this document it would be
provided as part of the overall PABX equipment provision for the project and is not to be
provided by the cabling contractor unless they are proposing to provide the PABX.
iv) Consult Four Seasons Design Standards for MATV networks for all coax based television
requirements. Note that these locations will require coordination with the structured cabling
system in many cases as common Telecommunications rooms are used and in some cases
duplex coax/data jacks may be installed in some places.
v) Contact Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts for specific exceptions to these standards or additional
requirements needed as they may apply to residential or mixed use building projects.
2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS
i) The following documents set forth the guidelines for installation practices, and the performance
criteria for materials. The chosen vendor is fully expected to adhere to all of these guidelines
and practices as applicable.
EIA/TIA 568A/B, Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard.
EIA/TIA 569, Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
MEP 1 / 58
2007 STRUCTURED CABLING / VOICE + DATA
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
EIA/TIA 570A, Residential and Light Commercial Telecommunications Wiring Standard
EIA/TIA 606, Telecommunications Administration Standard for Commercial Buildings
EIA/TIA 607, Grounding and Bonding of Communications Systems
EIA/TIA TSB-36, Additional Cable Specifications for Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables
EIA/TIA TSB-40, Additional Transmission Specifications for UTP Connecting Hardware
EIA/TIA TSB-67, Transmission Performance Specifications for Testing Unshielded Twisted
Pair Cables
EIA/TIA 492AAAB, Specification for 50/125 class 1a Multimode Graded Index Optical
Waveguide Fibres
EIA/TIA 492CAAA, Specification for class IVa Dispersion unshifted Single mode Optical
Fibres
EIA/TIA 526-7-A, Optical Power Loss Measurement of Installed Single mode Fibre Cable
Plant
EIA/TIA 526-7-A, Optical Power Loss Measurement of Installed Single mode Fibre Cable
Plant
EIA/TIA 526-14-A Optical Power Loss Measurement of Installed Multimode Fibre Cable
Plant
EIA/TIA 854 Full Duplex Ethernet Specification for 1000Mbps Operating over Category 6
Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling
BICSI Telecommunications Code and Electrical Code (US)
IEEE 802.1 LAN/MAN Bridging and Management
IEEE 802.3 CDMA/CD Access Methods
IEEE 802.11 Wireless LANS
ii) All governing federal, provincial, state and local codes and ordinances (including where appropriate
OSHA, IEEE, ANSI and NEC), adhering in each instance to the strictest interpretation.
iii) Cabling installation practices should adhere to BOCA standards (Building Officials and Code
Administration))
3 NETWORK DESIGN CRITERIA AND OVERALL SYSTEM TOPOLOGY
i) The structured cabling system shall be an EIA/TIA standards based end-to-end solution with a
hierarchical star topology using a recognized network design system such as Systimax, IBDN,
Molex, AMP, Panduit or others approved by the project owner, Telecommunications consultant
and Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts. The entire structured cabling system including jacks and
patch cords (sometimes called leads in Europe) shall be supplied as part of a certified end-to-
end solution provided by one contractor complete with 20-year warranty.
ii) All Data cable from the station jacks in the guest rooms, administration areas, public space,
and back of house to the Telecommunications Closets (horizontal data cable) shall be 4-pair,
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Category 6 copper cable (CAT 6).
MEP 2 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
iii) Data cable shall be used for the following technologies:
Wireless IP voice communications
Wired and wireless data communications
IP Television
Digital pay per view (PPV) - also known as digital video on demand (DVOD)
Other specialty data cabling requirements, principally for interfaces,
iii) All voice cable from the station jacks in the guest rooms, administration areas, public space,
and back of house to the Telecommunications Closets (horizontal voice cable) shall be 4-pair,
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) Category 5e or Category 6 copper cable (CAT 5e or CAT 6).
For ease of reference, this document will refer to all horizontal copper cabling as CAT 6; however
for VOICE ONLY, CAT 5e is acceptable.
iv) Voice cable shall be used for the following technologies:
Wired voice communication
v) Horizontal copper wiring distribution.
All copper cabling terminations shall use the 568A termination format.
All horizontal copper voice and data cabling shall be terminated on patch panels and
cross connected to either voice riser or active data network equipment using patch cables
certified for the most stringent technology (i.e. CAT6 for CAT6 to CAT3 and CAT5e for CAT
5e to CAT 3).
IP based telephone services should be treated as data services and terminated on separate
patch fields as with other data services in the Telecommunications Closet. Jumpering should
not be done for such lines. Each IP jack must be treated as a separate connection.
vi) Horizontal fibre wiring distribution.
All horizontal fibre optic cabling terminations shall be SC termination.
All horizontal fibre optic cabling shall be terminated on fibre patch panels appropriate for
the type of cabling (single mode or multi-mode) and cross connected to either fibre riser or
active data network equipment using patch cables certified for the appropriate type of fibre
and specifications (i.e. Single mode for single mode, multi-mode for multi-mode, 50/125
for 50/125 fibre, etc.
vii) Data backbone cabling from the Telecommunications Closets to the Computer room and/or
PABX Room, including cabling carrying Voice over IP (VOIP), shall be composed of single mode
and multimode fibre.
viii) Voice backbone cabling for non-IP voice services from the Telecommunications Closets to the
Computer room and/or PABX Room, shall be multi-pair unshielded twisted pair Category 3
copper cable.
In a multi-building resort or hotel complex with distributed guest rooms or Telecommunications
closets where remote fibre modules are used for voice services, or where project consultants
or ownership has mandated an IP telephone switch, a combination of fibre optic cabling
and Category 3 cabling shall be used for the voice backbone. Fibre optic shall be used to
link the remote switch components and network equipment supporting IP telephone sets.
MEP 3 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Copper Category 3 cabling shall be used to support the analogue guest room, public space
and back of house wall telephones and lifeline analogue telephone sets in an otherwise
full IP installation.
x) Unless specific requirements are noted in this document, multi-mode fibre is to be used for all
horizontal and riser fibre requirements except where distances require the use of single mode
(i.e. over 500 meters). If distances require single mode, such cable will be substituted with
appropriate changes to connectors patch panels, etc.
xi) The network backbone environment shall be engineered for a minimum of 1 Gb switched Ethernet
service for data (10 Gb preferred). Active network equipment will be selected in consultation with
Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts Corporate IT department that will provide standards for and
design input into the logical design of the active network. The passive cable network design shall
be done by the Telecommunications Consultant and reviewed and approved by Four Seasons
Hotels and Resorts.
xii) The structured cabling system shall include single and multi-mode fibre optic cables to selected
locations in meeting space for voice or data use. Normal fibre optic cable installation rules for
data cabling shall apply.
xiii) The structured cabling system shall include special purpose point-to-point cabling which does
not fall under normal topology. This cabling must be included in the scope of work of the cabling
contractor. The requirements are described in this document.
xiv) Where other low voltage systems such as security cameras or audio systems require the use of
CAT 5e or CAT 6 copper cable, or fibre optic cable, sufficient additional cables must be added
to the voice and data requirements in this document to support these ancillary services. Voice
and data horizontal cabling shall not be used to carry other than voice and data signals. It is
acceptable to run these ancillary services in the same conduit or raceways as voice and data,
assuming there is sufficient capacity. See separate specifications on Security and A/V systems
for cabling requirements for these systems.
4 TECHNOLOGY ROOMS
a) Computer Room:
i) Contains hotel servers, data network core switches and is the central point for all data distribution
on the property. The data backbone terminates in this room.
b) PABX Room:
i) Contains the hotel PABX and is the central point for all voice communications on the property.
The voice backbone terminates in this room.
c) Telecommunications Closets
i) Formerly called Intermediate or Intermediate Distribution Frames IDFs) are the intermediate
cross connect locations
ii) These shall be designed into the project to consolidate cabling from the station locations for
onward connection to the main Computer Room or PABX room as required.
iii) All horizontal cabling shall be no more than 90 m (295 ft) from a Telecommunications Closet.
MEP 4 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
iv) Where a Telecommunications Closet supports both administration and guest horizontal cabling,
that cabling shall be physically segmented in that closet with separate patch panel fields.
v) Telecommunications Closets shall have separate fields for data, voice and pay TV services.
vi) There must be no punch down type intermediate cross-connects for any data or voice cabling
in Telecommunications Closets.
vii) There must be sufficient space and electricity to power data switches, VOIP telephones
and wireless antennas using power over Ethernet switches or power injectors in each
Telecommunications Closet (see power requirements later in this document).
d) MATV Head End Room:

i) Contains the free to guest TV head end equipment (modulators, amplifiers, head end distribution
equipment) and may contain components of the pay per view/video on demand system. The
Coax cable TV network terminates in this room (see MEP MATV cabling standards document)
e) AV Control Room:
i) Contains the AV control equipment for the property central background music system and the
AV control equipment for the meeting space. This may contain the Telecommunications closet
for the meeting space. (see MEP Background Music and AV systems standards document).
f) Location:
i) Computer room, PABX room and MATV head end room are usually located adjacent to each
other in a property and may be combined into one room if design permits.
5 INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
i) All cabling in walls shall be in conduit. Metal is preferred but PVC is acceptable as an alternative
where fire code permits.
ii) Spare pull strings shall be left in conduit to permit additional cables to be run in the future.
iii) All cabling in corridors and ceilings must be in either conduit or lain in properly specified cable
trays.
iv) Where conduit is not provided, cable shall be plenum rated where regulations require or where
cable is run in a return air plenum or under flooring where under floor area is used for ventilation.
Low smoke zero halogen cabling may be an acceptable alternative to plenum rated cabling in
certain circumstances and where code permits.
v) Where copper cabling enters or exits a building (such as in a resort where the cabling links
buildings), and local code or safety requires it, appropriate lightning arrestors are to be provided
for the cabling to reduce/eliminate the possibility of lightning strikes damaging sensitive electronic
equipment. Lightning protection devices shall be as follows unless otherwise approved by Four
Seasons Hotels and Resorts:
Category 3 voice service entrance panels with gas tube protection.
Category 6 data solid-state over voltage protection with over current protection and
adjustable low voltage protection.
MEP 5 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
vi) In environments where cabling must be run between buildings, outdoor rated cabling in
environmentally protected trenches with appropriate pull boxes MUST be used. Indoor cabling
MUST NOT be used in any outdoor application.
vii) These actions will typically void cabling warranties and will be treated as construction deficiencies
with respect to any cabling contract:
Voice and data cables may not be split to serve two or more jacks in a duplex or 4-plex
faceplate.
Voice and data cables may not daisy chain from one jack to the next to extend service.
All copper Data cables must not exceed 90 metres from faceplate to Telecommunications
Closet.
All components of a CAT 6 network must be certified for CAT 6 and from one manufacturer,
including cable, terminations, patch panels, patch cords, etc.
It is NOT acceptable to hang cable from piping such as water piping, other conduit such
as flexible conduit carrying power cable or other material not specifically designed to carry
cable.
6 CABLE STANDARDS AND TERMINATIONS - HORIZONTAL CABLING
a) General Description
i) Horizontal cable is copper voice/data cable from station jack (guest room or administrative jacks)
to the Telecommunications Closet.
b) Copper Voice and Data Cabling:

i) All copper voice and data cable shall be 4-pair, CAT 6, unshielded twisted pair cable with an
outer sheath suitable for plenum installation if an enclosed raceway is not provided.
ii) The station end shall terminate on a CAT 6 certified RJ-45 jack provided as part of the structured
cabling solution in a faceplate approved for installation with the selected data network design.
iii) The Telecommunications Closet end shall terminate on a rack mounted CAT 6 certified RJ-45
jack patch panel provided as part of the structured cabling solution.
iv) Terminations should be 568A.
c) Meeting Space Related Fibre Optic Cable:

i) Fibre optic cable used for voice, data or video feeding meeting space audio-visual cabling
niches (A/V niches) and related A/V locations, shall be 6-strand mixed mode fibre (4 strands of
multi-mode and 2 strands of single mode) cable if available, or separately 4-strand multi-mode
and 2-strand single mode cable or as otherwise recommended by the Telecommunications or
AV consultant.
ii) The multi-mode fibre shall be graded-index optical fibre waveguide with nominal 50/125 um
core/cladding diameter.
iii) Single mode shall be graded-index optical fibre waveguide with nominal 9/125 um core/cladding
diameter.
MEP 6 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
iv) All fibre shall comply with ANSI/EIA/TIA - 492AAAA specifications.
v) The station end of either single mode or multi-mode fibre shall terminate on a certified SC
connector provided as part of the structured cabling solution in a faceplate approved for
installation with the selected data network design.
vi) The Telecommunications Closet end (single or multi-mode fibre) shall terminate on a rack
mounted certified SC jack patch panel provided as part of the structured cabling solution.
Terminate single and multi-mode fibre on separate patch panels.
7 CABLE STANDARDS AND TERMINATIONS - RISER CABLING - COPPER
a) General
i) Riser cable is cable from each Telecommunications Closet to the Computer room and/or PABX
room.
b) Copper Voice
i) Shall consist of multi-pair, Category 3, unshielded twisted pair cabling, typically in 25, 50, 100
or 200 pair bundles.
The Telecommunications Closet end shall terminate on a rack mounted CAT 3 certified
RJ-45 jack patch panel provided as part of the structured cabling solution, with one pair
per jack.
The Computer Room and/or PABX Room end shall terminate on a rack mounted or wall
mounted CAT 3 patch panel. The patch terminations may be RJ-45 or punch down blocks
certified for use with the structured cabling solution.
There must be at least 25% spare copper riser provided to account for bad pairs during
installation and to provide for later expansion if required.
ii) In multi-building resorts or where project consultants or ownership has mandated an IP telephone
switch the voice riser shall consist of 2 strands of Multi-mode fibre optic cable.
Specifications are graded-index optical fibre waveguide with nominal 50/125 um core/
cladding diameter.
If fibre riser is provided for a non-IP switch the cabling contractor must coordinate this
installation with the telephone switch provider to ensure the correct terminations and
specifications are provided and the telephone switch provide specifies remote fibre cabinets
in their equipment design.
iii) In some projects Cat 5E riser may be used. If multi-pair (10 or 25 pair) Cat 5E is used it shall be
installed as with Cat3. If individual 4-pair cables are used for backbone, then each one should
terminate on an RJ45 jack using 568A termination format.
MEP 7 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
8 CABLE STANDARDS AND TERMINATIONS - RISER CABLING - FIBRE
a) Voice or Data (except for meeting space)

i) Shall consist of Multi-mode fibre optic cable unless design requirements require single mode.
ii) The number of strands depends on the number of separate networked data services at the
Telecommunications Closet location (e.g. guest network, administration network, digital TV
network, wireless voice network). See typical requirements for fibre backbone in Part 2 of this
document.
iii) Specifications are graded-index optical fibre waveguide with nominal 50/125 um core/cladding
diameter.
iv) Single mode shall be graded-index optical fibre waveguide with nominal 9/125 um core/cladding
diameter.
v) All fibre shall comply with ANSI/EIA/TIA - 492AAAA specifications.
vi) Each end (Telecommunications Closet and Computer Room and/or PABX Room) shall terminate
on a rack mounted CAT 6 certified SC jack patch panel provided as part of the structured cabling
solution. Multi-mode and single mode cable patch panels shall be separate.
b) Fibre Optic Riser Feeding Meeting Space Telecommunications Closet

i) Shall be 12-strand mixed mode fibre (8 strands of multi-mode and 4 strands of single mode)
cable if available, or separately 8-strand multi-mode and 4-strand single mode cable.
The multi-mode fibre shall be graded-index optical fibre waveguide with nominal 50/125
um core/cladding diameter.
Single mode shall be graded-index optical fibre waveguide with nominal 9/125 um core/
cladding diameter.
All fibre shall comply with ANSI/EIA/TIA - 492AAAA specifications.
c) Typical Fibre Optic Backbone Cabling Requirements

i) The number of fibre pairs depends on the services provided from the Telecommunications
Closet serving the stations connected to it. Attached is a table of typical fibre optic riser
capacity configurations for hotels and resorts. The Telecommunications Consultant will make
recommendations on each project for approval by Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts:
d) Table One - Fibre Optic Capacity

i) Table One can be found at the end of this MEP Section R beginning on page 32.
9 CABLE STANDARDS AND TERMINATIONS - PATCHING AT CLOSETS
a) Patching Voice at Telecommunications Closets

i) The voice cabling jacks in the Telecommunications Closet patch panels will be patched using
CAT 6 patch cables to a CAT 3 riser patch panel (one pair per jack on the riser side) and then
MEP 8 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
connected via CAT 3 riser to the Computer Room and/or separate PABX Room, depending on
where the PABX is located.
ii) All administration voice lines must cross-connect such that each line is live in the telephone
switch. There shall be at least two live pair in each horizontal cable. Therefore there must be
sufficient riser pairs PLUS spare pairs to support this.
iii) For analog voice services only, as the first two voice lines in each guest room (see Part 2 for
locations) are the same at each location in the room, the cabling in the Telecommunications
Closet on the CAT 3 riser side must be jumpered to parallel line 1 and line 2 at each of the jacks
in the room with the same extension, typically the bed, desk and bathroom WC. Only the first
jack of these jumpered connections will terminate on the PABX in the PABX room.
iv) The third and any other voice line in each room will be terminated without jumpering and use its
own CAT 3 riser to the Computer Room and/or PABX Room.
v) IP based telephone services should be treated as data services and terminated on separate
patch fields as with other data services in the Telecommunications Closet. Jumpering should not
be done for such lines. Each IP jack must be treated as a separate connection.
vi) All cross-connects will be clearly labeled according to EIA/TIA 606.
b) Patching Data at Telecommunications Closets

i) The data cabling jacks in the patch panels will be patched using CAT 6 patch cables to active
network switch equipment provided under the Computer Systems budget. Four Seasons Hotels
and Resorts Corporate IT will work with the owners and contractors to specify and procure such
equipment.
ii) The active network equipment noted above in F.1.b.vii. will connect to the Computer Room
and/or PABX room using the fibre optic backbone.
iii) All cross-connects will be clearly labeled according to EIA/TIA 606.
10 CABLE STANDARDS AND TERMINATIONS - CABLES
a) Station Cables
i) Station cables are cables connecting wall jacks to telephones or computers.
ii) All Data station cables are provided by the cabling contractor and are factory made, CAT 6,
unshielded twisted pair with RJ-45 terminations on each end. One cable is to be provided for
every station data jack in the project plus 10% spare.
iii) All Voice station cables are provided by the telephone set manufacturer according to their
specifications and must match the jack end to be plugged into the wall (universal RJ-45). Counts
match number of telephone sets provided which includes spares.
b) Patch Cables
i) Patch cables are cables used to connect horizontal cable to riser cable using a patch panel or
used to patch station fax/modem lines to a limited number of switch extensions using a patch
panel, OR
ii) Cables used to connect horizontal copper data cable to data active network equipment (network
switches) or to connect network switches to fibre risers via fibre patch panels.
MEP 9 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
iii) Patch cable requirements are as follows:
All copper patch cables are provided by the cabling contractor and are factory made, CAT
6, unshielded twisted pair with RJ-45 terminations on each end. Counts match number of
station side Telecommunications Closet patch panel ports in all locations, plus 10% spare.
Lengths shall be sufficient to easily patch from any jack in a Telecommunications Closet
rack to any other jack without danger of stretching or damaging the patch cable.
Provide 5% extra long patch cables (next larger standard size).
All fibre patch cables are provided by the cabling contractor and are factory made, two
strand multi-mode fibre cables with SC terminations on each end or two strand single
mode fibre cables with SC terminations on each end. Counts match number of station side
and riser side patch panel ports in all locations, plus 10% spare per type of cable. Lengths
shall be sufficient to easily patch from any jack in a Telecommunications Closet rack to any
other jack without danger of stretching or damaging the patch cable.
Provide 5% extra long patch cables (next standard size).
c) Interface Cables
i) Cables connecting computer systems to each other or computer systems to telephone systems or
other non-computer systems (called interface cables) are provided by the cabling contractor and
shall be 4-pair unshielded twisted pair CAT 6 cabling. Counts are to be determined based on the
equipment to be provided on the specific job. See section below under Part 2 on Miscellaneous
Cabling.
Each end shall terminate on a CAT 6 certified RJ-45 jack in a faceplate approved for
installation with the selected data network design.
The interface cabling will run straight through without splicing or termination on
Telecommunications Closets from location to location using dedicated point to point conduit
or a common raceway path that does not require splicing or patching of cables.
ii) Conduit and cable shall be run as follows for interfaces between systems. If conduit is not
possible, a clear raceway path must be used:
Run a 1 conduit between computer room and telephone switch room for interface between
property management system and telephone switch. Run three (3) 4-pair CAT 6 cables in
conduit between these locations and leave 20-ft/6 m on each end free. Terminate each
cable on each end with RJ-45 jacks.
Run a 1 conduit between computer room and telephone operators room for interface
between property management system and call accounting/voice mail systems. Run three
(3) 4-pair CAT 6 cables in conduit between these locations and leave 20-ft/6 m on each end
free. Terminate each cable on each end with RJ-45 jacks.
Run a 1 conduit between telephone switch room and telephone operators room for
interface between telephone switch and call accounting/voice mail systems. Run three
(3) 4-pair CAT 6 cables between these locations and leave 20-ft/6 m on each end free.
Terminate each cable on each end with RJ-45 jacks.
Run a 1 conduit between computer room and MATV head end room for interface between
Pay per view system and property management system. Run two (2) 4-pair CAT 6 cables
between these locations and leave 20-ft/6 m on each end free. Terminate each cable on
each end with RJ-45 jacks.
MEP 10 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
d) PABX Equipment Cables:
i) Cables connecting PBX/PABX administrative terminals, printers, ACD display boards and other
specialized equipment to PBX/PABX are provided by the cabling contractor and shall be CAT 6,
unshielded twisted pair. Counts to be determined based on the equipment to be provided on the
specific project. See section below under Part 2 on Miscellaneous Cabling.
This cable shall be run straight through without splicing or termination on Telecommunications
Closet from the equipment location to the Telephone switch room and left unterminated
for the equipment supplier to terminate according to their requirements unless otherwise
determined on the specific project.
ii) Conduit and cables shall be run as follows for switch administration equipment:
Run a 1 conduit between switch room and operators room for system administration and
voice mail terminals. Run two (2) 4-pair CAT 6 cables between these locations and leave
free 20-ft/6 m on each side. Do not terminate cables unless specifically required to by the
project.
Run a conduit between switch room and reservations for automatic call distribution
management terminal and printer. Run two (2) 4-pair CAT 6 cables between these locations
and leave free 20-ft/6 m on each end. Do not terminate cables unless specifically required
to by the project.
11 JACK TYPES - ADMIN, PUBLIC SPACE, BACK OF HOUSE
a) Voice Only Locations

i) Provide a single jack faceplate, terminated using RJ-45.
ii) In wall-mounted locations, specifically back of house corridors, elevator landings, mechanical
rooms, etc., a faceplate designed for wall-mounted telephones shall be provided and the width
of the faceplate shall not exceed the width of a Trimline telephone - 3 or 7.65 cm in order to
present a good appearance.
iii) Each location requires one (1) 4-pair CAT 6 cable
iv) See Part 2 of this specification for locations where these jacks are used.
b) Data Only Locations

i) Provide a single jack faceplate, terminated using RJ-45.
ii) Each location requires one (1) 4-pair CAT 6 cable.
iii) Terminate cabling from data jacks used for point of sale (POS) equipment on separate fields in
the Telecommunications Closet patch panel. Make sure that these drops are identified as for
POS equipment.
iv) Terminate cabling from VOIP data jacks used for VOIP telephone equipment on separate fields
in the Telecommunications Closet patch panel. Make sure that these drops are identified as for
VOIP equipment.
MEP 11 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
v) Terminate cabling from Wi-Fi antenna data jacks used for Wi-Fi voice or data services on
separate fields in the Telecommunications Closet patch panel. Make sure that these drops are
identified as for Wi-Fi equipment.
vi) See Part 2 of this specification for locations where these jacks are used.
c) Voice and Data Locations 4-plex Jack

i) Provide a 4-plex faceplate, with four RJ-45 terminations for voice and data. See Four Seasons
Hotels Standard Details #S-10.
ii) Each location requires four (4) 4-pair CAT 6 cables. It is not permitted to split one of the 4 pair
cables to provide two pair to each of the voice jacks. Four Separate cables MUST be run to
preserve flexibility in rewiring office space later.
iii) Terminate cabling used for POS equipment in this 4-plex jack on separate fields in the
Telecommunications Closet patch panel. Make sure that these drops are identified as for POS
equipment.
VOIP equipment.
d) Voice and Data Locations Duplex Jack

i) A limited number of duplex faceplates, with two RJ-45 terminations, one each for voice and data
may be required on a project specific basis.
ii) Each location requires two (2) 4-pair CAT 6 cables.
iii) Terminate cabling used for POS equipment in this duplex jack on separate fields in the
Telecommunications Closet patch panel. Make sure that these drops are identified as for POS
equipment.
VOIP equipment.
e) Wireless Voice and Data

i) See Section XXX below for the wireless voice/data requirements for these areas.
MEP 12 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
12 JACK TYPES - GUESTROOMS
a) Telephone Only Locations

i) Provide a single jack faceplate, with an RJ-45 termination for voice.
ii) In wall-mounted locations, specifically bathrooms and kitchen pantries, a faceplate designed for
wall-mounted telephones shall be provided and the width of the faceplate shall not exceed the
width of a Trimline telephone - 3 or 7.65 cm in order to present a good appearance.
iii) Each location requires one (1) CAT 6 cable.
b) Desk Locations
i) Provide a single jack faceplate above the desk with an RJ-45 termination for guest high-speed
Internet service.
ii) Provide a duplex jack faceplate below the desk with two (2) RJ-45 terminations for voice. See
Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts Standard Details #B-005A, .
iii) The single jack requires one (1) a 4-pair CAT 6 cable. Each duplex jack requires two (2) 4-pair
CAT 6 cables.
iv) Terminate cabling used for guest High speed Internet services on separate fields in the
Telecommunications Closet patch panel from the voice cabling. Make sure that these drops are
identified as for Guest High Speed Internet service equipment.
v) Note that if IP telephones are installed in guest rooms these cables should be terminated on
separate fields on the Telecommunications Closet patch panels from the regular voice lines and
identified as such.
c) TV Locations
i) Provide one (1) RJ-45 termination of data for digital television services in addition to the standard
coax jack for basic television services (coax connects to MATV network). The RJ-45 jack and the
MATV jack can share the same two-port faceplate and conduit back to the Telecommunications
Closet.
ii) If the project uses IP TV in place of coax based MATV Television service, provide two (2) RJ-45
terminations for data in a common faceplate.
iii) Each location requires one (1) CAT 6 cable.
d) Wireless Voice and Data Locations

i) See Section XXX below for the wireless voice/data requirements for these areas.
MEP 13 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
13 JACK TYPES - MEETING ROOMS AND BALLROOMS
i) See Part 2 of this specification, Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts Standard Details and
MEP Audio-visual Systems Specification for meeting space for the voice, data, fibre and A/V
requirements in each A/V niche type and the locations of each type in hotel meeting space
ii) Installation of all voice and data cabling in A/V and control niches in meeting space must be
coordinated with the project A/V consultant and contractor and the interior designer to ensure that
each A/V niche is of sufficient size and depth to provide the appropriate number of connections
for all parties.
Note that this document does not address requirements in niches for power, microphones,
A/V inputs or other A/V requirements. See Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts Design
Details and MEP Audio-visual Standards for meeting space for a description of those
requirements.
b) Control Niche Telephones (Symbol: CN)

i) Each control niche shall have a wall-mounted telephone connected to an RJ-45 wall plate
specifically designed for wall-mounted telephones, inside the same control niche that provides
lighting and sound controls for the space. The width of the faceplate shall not exceed the width
of a Trimline telephone - 3 or 7.65 cm in order to present a good appearance.
ii) Each jack requires one (1) 4-pair CAT 6 cable.
iii) The size of the niche must be large enough to accommodate the telephone with a dimming
control, a volume and source control for background music and a fully electronic touch pad
control.
iv) The niche depth must be sufficient to accommodate the telephone hung on the back of the wall
inside the niche with the covering door closed.
c) AV Niches - Voice and Data Only (Symbol: AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4)
i) This excludes AV Niches that have fibre optic cabling. See below for these requirements.
ii) Meeting spaces including ballrooms, pre-function rooms, meeting rooms and boardrooms
contain a variety of A/V niches pre-function include various copper voice and data connections.
Voice and data requirements for these A/V niches are composed of jacks of the following types
(not all used in all A/V niches):
iii) One (1) 4-plex jack faceplate (see FSHD #S-10), with two RJ-45 terminations for voice and two
RJ-45 terminations for data.
Each faceplate requires four (4) 4-pair CAT 6 cables.
iv) One 6-plex RJ-45 faceplate in an A/V niche.
The faceplate should be connected to six (6) 4-pair CAT 6 cables, one per RJ-45 jack.
On the Telecommunications Closet end the 6 cables are fully terminated (all pairs punched
down to enable connection to multiple phone lines) on a patch panel (see patch panel
specifications later in this document).
MEP 14 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
v) One (1) duplex jack faceplate with one RJ-45 termination for voice and one RJ-45 termination
for data.
Each faceplate requires two (4) 4-pair CAT 6 cables.
vi) One (1) single jack faceplate with one RJ-45 termination for voice or data depending on the
function.
Each faceplate requires one (4) 4-pair CAT 6 cable.
d) AV Niches With Fibre Optic Cabling (Symbol: AV1-F, AV2-F)

i) Meeting space A/V niches may also include various fibre optic connections. These niches include
jacks of the following types (not all used in all A/V niches):
ii) One six-strand mixed mode fibre optic cable
Four (4) strands shall be multi-mode to permit switching of high-speed data.
Two (2) strands shall be single mode to permit switching of high-speed video.
If mixed mode cable is not available then two separate fibre cables, one 4-strand multi-
mode and one two strand single mode, shall be run.
iii) One four-strand multi-mode fibre optic cable to permit switching of high-speed data.
iv) All fibre cable runs must adhere to industry standards for bend radius and other requirements.
v) All runs must terminate on fibre patch panels, with single mode and multi-mode terminations
separately identified and labeled.
e) Floor Box Niches (FB1, FB2, FB3)

i) Each floor jack location will have one (1) 4-plex jack faceplate (see FSHD #S-10), with two (2)
RJ-45 terminations for voice, two (2) RJ-45 terminations for data and one duplex power point.
Each faceplate requires four (4) 4-pair CAT 6 cables.
ii) Floor jacks may also contain laptop video connections and/or microphone or audio connections.
See Four Seasons AV Design Standards and Design Details for AV contents of each type of
niche.
iii) Each floor box in each room shall be covered with a brass removable faceplate approved by
Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts, ownership and the project interior designer. The jacks must
be terminated in the floor box at sufficient depth to permit connection of cables to the jacks and
have the faceplate closed. There must be a gasketed gap when the faceplate is closed for the
cables to exit the floor box without being pinched or cut by the faceplate.
f) Meeting Space Corridor Niches (GR)

i) The public corridors outside ballroom pre-function space and outside meeting rooms that do not
have pre-function space will have 4-plex jack faceplates (see FSHD #S-10) in AV niches similar
to those used inside meeting rooms for group registration purposes.
MEP 15 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
g) Loading Dock / External Access
i) A specific AV niche containing voice, data, fibre (mixed mode), audio and control link jacks is
provided at the loading dock (if above ground) or at street level at a location convenient to park
a semi-trailer truck such as those used by television services. This niche is installed to permit
switching of external voice and data services from/to a satellite/TV service truck to the meeting
space. The niche will contain at a minimum the following voice/data/fibre provisions:
One (1) 4-plex jack faceplate (see FSHD #S-10), with two (2) RJ-45 terminations for voice,
two (2) RJ-45 terminations for data
One (1) 6 strand/core mixed mode (or one 4 strand/core multi-mode and one 2 strand/core
single mode) fibre optic cable in a faceplate terminated with SC connectors.
Two (2) duplex power points.
ii) Television/satellite service providers will use their own generators to provide any heavy power
requirements they need.
iii) The fibre optic cable in this niche will connect directly to the AV control room.
i) See Four Seasons MEP AV Design standards for information about the audio and control link
connections.
14 ROUTING - MEETING ROOM CABLING
a) General
i) Control niche cabling (for control niche telephone) shall run to the nearest Telecommunications
Closet and will be terminated on the standard RJ-45 voice patch panel.
ii) Voice and data jacks in ballroom/meeting room public corridors shall be treated as other public
space voice/data jacks and terminate in the nearest/most practical Telecommunications closet
regardless of whether this is a meeting space closet. If a meeting space closet, these must
terminate on separate fields from the patchable voice and data jacks as described in item e.
below.
iii) All A/V niche cabling (voice, data and fibre) will go to an Telecommunications Closet serving all
banquet space (all ballrooms, meeting rooms, related pre-function) or to the A/V control room if
space permits. Unless building design prevents this, all A/V niche cabling for all meeting rooms
on a given floor shall go to one closet. In any case, it is not acceptable to split any meeting
rooms cabling between closets.
iv) In the Telecommunications Closet (s) servicing the A/V niches, all voice, data and fibre cables
will go to separate fields on separate patch panels. Each panel shall have sufficient ports to
patch all voice, data and fibre meeting room horizontal station cables from the meeting room
niches to an equivalent number of
Voice lines (to the switch),
Data ports (to the active equipment connected to the hotel LAN network) or
Fibre ports (to the fibre backbone of the hotel).
MEP 16 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
b) Meeting Room Patch Panel Requirements - Copper
i) Goal:
Allow the hotel to patch individual PABX extensions to any jack in any meeting room.
Patch external services such as ISDN or Internet directly to any jack in any meeting
room.
Patch internal voice or data from/to any jack in any meeting room.
ii) Data:
There will be an RJ-45 jack on the meeting room side of the patch panel for every data jack
in every AV niche in the meeting space, including ballrooms, meeting rooms, pre-function
space. Each RJ-45 jack will patch into a port on a separately supplied network switch.
iii) Voice:
The first of two Patch Panels shall be located in the AV control room or meeting space
Telecommunications closet.
The second of two Patch Panels shall be located in the PABX room.
iv) AV Control room/Telecommunications closet patch panel:
All voice cables in ballrooms, meeting rooms, and pre-function rooms, with the exception
of the control niche telephones, shall terminate on the meeting space voice patch panel in
the AV control or Telecommunications closet.
The patch panel will either be wall-mounted or rack mounted, determined by layout of the
equipment and the cable in the patch panel area.
One half of the patch panel (meeting room side) will support the terminations from the
meeting space. The other half (switch side) will support the terminations of the cable going
to the telephone switch.
There will be an RJ-45 jack on the meeting room side of the patch panel for every voice
jack in each niche in the meeting space.
There will be a corresponding RJ-45 jack on the switch side of the patch panel for every
meeting room jack to permit 100% of the jacks in the meeting space to be patched to live
extensions in the telephone switch.
All 4 pair of each jack will connect to riser.
Allow 25% spare riser.
v) PABX room patch panel:
On the meeting room riser side will be RJ-45 jacks for each RJ-45 coming from the meeting
space patch panel.
On the switch side for each of the standard RJ-45 jacks (each containing 4 pair) there will
be four (4) RJ-45 jacks (each containing 1 pair). (RJ-11 jacks could be used if the switch
side of the patch panel uses RJ-11).
The contractor will provide splitter cables with one 4-pair RJ-45 plug terminated on one end
and 4 single pair RJ-45 plugs on the other. One cable will be provided for each RJ-45 riser
cable jack that is installed on the patch panel. (RJ-11 could also be provided on the split
end of the cable if RJ-11 jacks are installed on the switch side of the patch panel).
MEP 17 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Alternatively, use punch down jacks (i.e.110 or 66 block jacks) on the switch side and RJ45
on the riser side. The punch down jacks would be permanently installed and the RJ45
connected as needed. In this case wire management is needed to keep the RJ-45 ends
neatly hung out of the way until needed.
If ISDN service is brought to the hotel, this will be terminated in the PABX room on a
separate field to permit patching of this service to the meeting rooms using the riser side
RJ-45 voice jacks. On a project specific basis the contractor will provide patch cables to
patch the ISDN service to the riser side RJ-45 jacks.
vi) The cabling contractor is to supply sufficient patch cables to patch all switch-side lines to guest
rooms, plus 10% spare. The patch cables must be of the same specification as the patch panel
and cabling.
c) Meeting Room Patch Panel Requirements - Fibre

i) All fibre optic jacks in all meeting rooms shall terminate on a Fibre optic data patch panel in the
Telecommunications Closet typically located in the AV control room.
There will be a fibre optic patch panel with SC connectors for each pair of multi-mode
strands in each fibre optic cable feeding the meeting space. There will be an ST connector
in the panel for each single mode strand in each fibre optic cable feeding the meeting
space.
Each fibre optic port will patch into a fibre optic port on Four Seasons supplied active
network equipment.
See Part 2 of this document for typical sizes of the meeting room fibre riser.
ii) The meeting space fibre riser will go to the PABX room not the computer room (if they are
separate) although if it is easier to run this backbone via the computer room this is acceptable,
provided sufficient mixed mode cable is run between the computer room and the switch room.
If the rooms are separate, there will be a 12 strand mixed-mode cable between the computer
room and the switch room to permit connection of hotel data services to the meeting space
and the telephone/video providers whose service typically would terminate in the switch
room. Alternatively, a mixed-mode fibre cable could be brought to the computer room from
the A/V room/meeting room Telecommunications Closet separately from the mixed mode
cable to the switch room.
15 WIRELESS VOICE AND DATA SERVICES
i) Locations shall be identified with Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts where 802.11b/g protocol
wireless network access points and antennas will be installed to provide wireless voice and data
service throughout the hotel, inclusive of public space, meeting space, guest rooms, all back
of house locations, any gardens or outdoor space associated with the hotel, parking garages,
etc.
ii) Locations should be chosen to provide maximum wireless Internet coverage with the fewest
wiring points.
iii) Locations are typically near ceilings or high on walls in inconspicuous places but not where walls
or other obstructions may interfere with their signals.
MEP 18 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
iv) External locations must be protected from the elements.
v) Access points and antennas should be mounted in back of house or other service areas near
the spaces to be covered to keep them out of guest view, assuming such locations do not restrict
the antennas ability to perform properly.
Note: If the project will open beyond 2008, network design should be compatible with and
prepared for the new 802.11n protocol being released in first quarter 2007.
i) Provide each location with one CAT 6 data cable terminated with an RJ-45 jack. Locations chosen
must have sufficient space to mount the wireless antenna. Specific equipment requirements will
be determined on a project-by-project basis.
ii) The CAT 6 cables should run back to the nearest Telecommunications Closet and identified as
a wireless access point drop.
iii) All wireless access points will be power over Ethernet (POE) compliant.
16 VOICE AND DATA INCOMING SERVICES
i) Voice services from the telephone provider should be a combination of analogue (multi-pair
copper) and digital (either fibre or copper based digital services).
ii) Telephone switch requirements and incoming services shall be coordinated and matched for
compatibility with the business requirements (i.e. E1 vs. T1 vs. ISDN PRI) and the capabilities
of the PABX.
iii) Clearly identify the demarcation point of each service and coordinate with the local service
providers.
The preference is to provide the demarcation point within the telephone switch room,
computer room or pay per view TV head end room as applicable whenever practical and
possible with the agreement of the local providers.
If not possible, the demarcation point for incoming underground services shall be within 15
meters of where the service enters the building.
For satellite and wireless based services the demarcation shall be on the roof or at the
remote head end location.
The cabling contractor shall be responsible for installing any necessary cabling, including
all terminations, to connect the demarcation room to the telephone switch room, computer
room or pay per view TV head end room as required. If the quantity and type of these
connections is not provided in the cabling design, the contractor shall obtain this information
before finalizing their installation.
iv) Data services shall be coordinated and matched for compatibility with the business
requirement.
There shall be a minimum of two physical connections, one primarily for guest use and one
primarily for administration use. The hotel shall install technology to enable these to act as
overflow/backup for each other.
MEP 19 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Contact Four Seasons Corporate IT Department for the required bandwidth and technical
specifications (including quantity of real IP addresses) of each service.
Provide separate conduits for incoming/outgoing voice and data services. Spare conduit
shall be provided where possible against future requirements.
17 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER AND DEDICATED POWER
a) Computer Locations
i) Provide uninterruptible power (UPS) for all equipment below at a minimum:
All equipment in the computer room
All computer related equipment at the front desk PCs, printers, Electronic lock encoders,
and credit card authorization equipment.
All computer related equipment at the concierge desk PCs, printers, Electronic lock
encoders, and credit card authorization equipment.
All computer related equipment in reservations PCs, printers.
All computer related equipment in the operators room PCs, printers, operator consoles
(if wall powered)
All network equipment in Telecommunications Closets, Computer rooms and PABX rooms
and anywhere else that network equipment is located.
ii) At least two circuits are to be used for each location in a) above to split the power serving the
equipment such that one circuit failure will not stop all systems at that location.
Up to three PCs may be connected to one circuit.
At the front desk, provide two circuits for the PCs and alternate the stations on each
circuit.
Utilize separate circuits for the Front Desk and Concierge Desk.
iii) The UPS must also provide UPS power, 15 amps, 110 V/60/1 (North American Specification;
equivalent for local power in other countries) at each other PC location in the hotel.
iv) Provide duplex 110 V utility (North American Specification; equivalent for local power in other
countries) outlets for each printer location. Provide appropriate power for each network fax/
copier as specified by the equipment to be installed.
v) The UPS MUST be connected to the hotel generator. Sufficient battery time (at least 30 minutes
at full load) must be available to enable the system to remain operating until the building switches
to generator power in the event of a power failure, or to provide enough time to be able to shut
down gracefully all systems.
vi) Connect the UPS to the primary hotel server using a UPS interface to warn users of the change
to battery power.
vii) Identify all isolated ground and UPS receptacles with a different colour, e.g. orange or red.
viii) The above does not describe any power requirements for utility power in the property for lighting,
calculators, etc. See FS Design Standards and Details for requirements for standard power for
non-computer related loads.
MEP 20 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
b) Point of Sale Equipment
i) All Point of Sale equipment must be served by a dedicated, isolated (earth) ground. That is,
there should be no other loads on any circuit serving POS equipment (terminals and printers as
identified on electrical drawings). The circuit(s) must have a separate earth ground from other
loads on the property. There may be several circuits to service the equipment and multiple
devices may be on the same circuit; however each must be configured the same way - no other
loads.
ii) Kitchen printers should have single receptacles (where duplex is the standard configuration as
in North America) to discourage staff from plugging other equipment into the same circuit.
iii) All isolated ground and UPS receptacles should be identified using a different colour, e.g. orange
or red.
18 WARRANTIES AND QUALITY ASSURANCE
i) All equipment provided as part of the installation of this structured cabling system shall be UL
listed or equivalent where such listing is available or required by code.
ii) All materials and equipment supplied by the contractor shall be new and shall meet or exceed
the latest published specification of the manufacturer in all respects.
iii) All equipment and materials to be installed permanently shall be the products of recognized
manufacturers. The contractor shall supply the latest model available at the time of order
placement
iv) The cabling contractor shall be certified to install the cabling system using the design (e.g.
Systimax, IBDN, AMP ACO, Molex, etc) approved by Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts and
ownership.
v) Should the contractor not have certified technicians for this type of system, the contractor shall
either subcontract to a company with this expertise or shall have their personnel trained by
manufacturers representatives in this cabling scheme, at no additional cost to the property or
owner. In either case, the cabling contractor shall remain responsible for completion of the
cabling job according to the standards set out in this document.
vi) The cabling contractor shall pass on to ownership the manufacturers warranty applicable to the
cabling installation, typically 25 years.
vii) Should Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts agree to any modifications to the cabling scheme that
would affect the warranty (e.g. daisy-chaining of cabling in a guest room), the cabling contractor
shall notify Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts of any limitations in this warranty as a result of
the modification. Note that Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts reserves the right to withdraw any
approval for such modifications if such modifications will remove entirely the manufacturers
warranty from the cabling project.
viii) The cabling contractor shall provide upon completion of the job, and prerequisite to obtaining
final payment for the work, documentation in writing from the manufacturer certifying that the
specific cabling job is warranted as agreed.
MEP 21 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
19 DOCUMENTATION
i) The cabling contractor will provide a hardcopy and an electronic (CD-ROM) set of as built
drawings of the cabling plant as installed. All termination points shall be identified on the drawings
to enable the hotel to maintain the cable plant later using AutoCAD.
ii) The cabling contractor will also provide in each Telecommunications Closet, a diagram identifying
all station end points on all BIX, 110 or other punch down blocks and on all patch panels to
enable the hotel to easily identify what cable goes to what location and to what hotel network
port or telephone switch port.
iii) All cross-connects in all Telecommunications Closets will be clearly labelled according to EIA/TIA
606. Labelling must be reviewed and accepted by Four Seasons Hotels and Resorts.
20 TESTING
i) The structured data cabling system certification shall include 100% cable testing and verification
for an EIA/TIA CAT 6 solution for all CAT 6 components of the system.
ii) The verification of each cable shall be performed by the Contractor and shall be documented
on a cable-testing sheet that shall form part of the hard copy documentation supplied at the end
of the installation. The testing sheets shall list the detailed performance test measurements as
requested and as required to prove compliance with the referenced standards. Submit sample
of test sheet with shop drawings.
iii) Testing Procedures: Testing shall be performed using CAT 6 testers such as Fluke Networks
DSP 4000 series, Microtest Omni-Scanner 2 or Scope Communications Agilent Wirescope 350.
Testing shall include, but not be limited to the following:
Wire map
Cable length;
Attenuation;
Near end crosstalk (next);
Power sum near end crosstalk (PSNEXT);
Equal level far end crosstalk (ELFEXT);
Power sum equal level far end crosstalk (PSELFEXT);
Return loss;
ACR;
Power sum ACR;
End to end continuity;
Opens or shorts;
Pair polarity.
MEP 22 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
iv) Where applicable, each fibre optic strand shall be tested with an optical time domain reflectometer
(OTDR), which shall calculate the length and the losses that exist along each fibre. Measure
end-to-end attenuation loss of a strand at specific wavelengths. Tests shall be performed in
accordance with ANSI/EIA/TIA 566-14 standards, method B and EIA/TIA 455-60.
v) Submit detailed indexed test report in a 3- ring binder with covering letter from the company
responsible for the installation and testing of the system stating the accuracy of the report. The
tester and companys authorized representative shall sign the letter.
vi) Any cable not passing the testing procedure shall be replaced expeditiously and in its entirety.
No splicing is permitted in the repair of any defective cable.
21 VOICE/DATA ADMINISTRATION WIRING LOCATIONS - GENERAL
i) Refer to Four Seasons Standard Details for exact location of telephone equipment, PCs, Network
Printers and Cabling within office space and millwork.
ii) See Special Location Details Section below for an explanation of what cabling is needed for
Reception, Concierge and Spa Reception and how that is installed.
iii) All offices shall have a faceplate with a 4-plex jack consisting of two (2) RJ-45 terminations for
voice and two (2) RJ-45 terminations for data even if there is only one PC and one phone there
initially. The other jacks may be used for printers, fax machines, or additional telephones. See
Four Seasons Hotels Standard Details #S-10.
iv) All administration workstations in an open work area using modular furniture shall have three (3)
RJ-45 jacks (1 voice and 2 data) at each workstation.
If the modular furniture design permits, cabling shall be run from the wall through the
furniture and terminated on faceplates at each workstation.
The cabling contractor must coordinate the cabling installation in these areas with the
furniture supplier.
When cabling is run in advance of furniture placement, the contractor should install the
cabling with 3-5 m (10-25 ft) of cable exiting the wall, coiled and ready for routing through
the furniture when installed. Cabling contractor must return to finish the cabling work after
the furniture is installed.
Testing of the cabling for end-to-end CAT 6 compliance will occur after the cabling is
installed in the furniture.
v) Back of house wall telephones as required by the specific project, will have a single wall faceplate
with an RJ-45 jack mounted at 1370 mm (54) AFF. Example: engineering shops.
vi) Front of house public area guest telephones, as required by the specific project, will have a
single wall faceplate with an RJ-45 jack mounted at 500 mm (18) AFF. The phones shall be
desk-type and at least one location will have one unit set on a shelf at a lower height for use by
the disabled. Example: guest elevator lobby telephones, public phone kiosks.
MEP 23 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
b) Meeting Space
i) See Four Seasons Design Details, Four Seasons Architectural Design Standards and Four
Seasons MEP AV Design standards for more detailed information about cabling for, locations of,
and quantity of Control niches (CN), AV niches (AV) and floor boxes (FB) in meeting space.
ii) Control niches are typically recessed in the wall at the guest entrances, one per segment of a
divisible space and one per meeting room/ boardroom..
iii) AV niches are installed at convenient, accessible locations around the perimeters of the rooms
with operable flaps (see Four Seasons Design Details) that can be closed once the cabling is
connected with an undercut to prevent cable damage. Quantity and placement depends on
room size and layout.
iv) Each divisible section of ballrooms and selected meeting rooms will have floor jacks at strategic
positions in the room.
Ballrooms and larger meeting rooms typically have one in each segment at the appropriate
focal length for a display projector to project toward a dropdown screen at the service
corridor end of the room. Ballrooms also have one in each end segment at the appropriate
focal length to display on a drop down screen positioned at each end of the ballroom.
Additional floor boxes may be positioned at typical head table locations and at locations to
permit connection of telephone or computer points for displays or booths.
Small meeting rooms may have a centrally positioned floor jack to enable guests around a
boardroom table to connect to a data service and/or use a conference telephone facility.
The voice/data contractor must coordinate all voice/data/fibre cabling installation with the
AV contractor, the interior designer and the millwork contractor.
c) Outdoor Telephones
i) Weatherproof boxes shall be used for telephones located outdoors such as tennis courts,
waiting and service areas on resort grounds, and swimming pool locations that must be served
by conduit from the building.
d) Payphones
i) Public pay phones shall be wall-mounted (if this is the typical installation) where required. These
are typically only installed in staff areas in hotels. Below are requirements for such payphones:
ii) Where return air plenums exist, pay phone cable should be in a separate conduit from house
phone cables.
Install one phone at a lower height for use by the disabled.
All wall-mounted phones must be fully recessed if possible.
Power shall be provided for each payphone location to power displays. Coordinate with
supplier of payphones.
Number of payphones to be determined on a project-by-project basis.
MEP 24 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
e) Lifts and Elevator Telephones
i) If lifts/elevators have emergency telephones, each needs one phone connection per lift back to
the PABX.
ii) If lifts/elevators are serviced by intercom, it will need to go back to a hotel service location (usually
security but if this area is not staffed 24 hours it should go to the telephone operators room),
unless local government regulation requires that it go to the elevator maintenance company.
iii) Each lift machine room needs a wall telephone in addition to any jacks for lift telephones
themselves.
f) Mechanical and Electrical Rooms
i) Each Mechanical and electrical room over 5 m2 (50 ft2) and any smaller one where there is no
nearby telephone needs a wall telephone. Large rooms with two entrances should have a phone
at each entrance.
g) Lift Lobbies
i) All guest and service lift lobbies MUST have telephone jacks.
ii) Baseboard 500 mm (18) AFF for guest lift lobbies
iii) Wall 1370 mm (54) AFF for service lift lobbies
iv) Service elevator lobbies of serviced apartments, condominiums, or other third party occupied
units that will have hotel services provided to them MUST have a wall telephone as with regular
guest room floors.
Note: if IP Television is provided in hotel install one Cat 6 data jack at each location where
a television set will be located or where a coax TV jack would be provided
See Four Seasons Architectural Design Standards and Design Details for typical locations
of Television in public space.
See Section C of this Part 2 of the Structured Cabling Standards for the guest room
television locations that would require Cat 6 data jacks.
h) POS Locations
i) Each Terminal location contains a 4-plex jack with two (2) CAT 6 voice and two (2) CAT 6 data
cables unless otherwise noted. Each printer location requires one (1) CAT 6 data cable in a
single jack.
ii) The power points at each POS location below must be dedicated isolated ground. Please see
above for an explanation of these requirements.
22 TABLE 2: TYPICAL VOICE/DATA REQUIREMENTS BY FUNCTIONAL AREA
a) IMPORTANT NOTES:
i) Minimum requirements for each functional area are found in the table below.
ii) Not all areas may be designed into all hotels.
iii) Additional positions or locations may also be needed depending upon the size or type of the
hotel and the actual hotel design brief (e.g. marina or ski concierge).
MEP 25 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
iv) This table is NOT to be used to size a telephone switch or network or determine how much
equipment should be budgeted. This table provides general direction for the voice/data cabling
detailed design development and equipment requirements for each area typically designed into
a hotel.
v) The telephone switch configuration, network design and systems budget must be prepared
based on the design brief and project drawings for the specific project. The equipment listed is
indicative only and may change for specific projects.
vi) Non-network equipment (e.g. printer connected directly to a PC) is not listed here.
vii) Wireless phone users are included in the list below by department even if they do not have a
wiring connection.
viii) CAT 6 cabling locations for wireless access points are not listed below as they are project specific
and the number per department or location can vary greatly depending on construction material
and space adjacencies. They are still required and must be incorporated into the structured
cabling design for the hotel project.
ix) This table does not consider voice or data drops that may be required for third party space in
a mixed-use building such as a hotel with office and condo component. Those areas must be
considered on a project-by-project basis.
x) Unless otherwise stated in the table voice/data connections, telephone requirements and data
requirements are per position in each functional area.
xi) All voice and data locations where POS equipment is found, including kitchen areas are covered
in TABLE 2, POS locations. TABLE 2 includes all voice, data and POS and non-POS equipment
for these areas.
b) Table Two
i) Table Two can be found at the end of this MEP Section R beginning on page 33.
23 TABLE 3: POINT OF SALE (POS) REQUIREMENTS BY FUNCTIONAL AREA
a) IMPORTANT NOTES:
i) Minimum number of point of sale terminals and printers for the food and beverage system are
noted in the table below. The average counts are based on the typical seat numbers noted.
iii) Additional positions or locations may be needed depending upon the size or type of the hotel
and the actual hotel design brief (e.g. beach services or hotel operated retail outlets).
equipment should be budgeted. This table provides general direction for the voice/data cabling
detailed design development and equipment requirements for each area typically designed into
a hotel.
b) Table Three - Point of Sale Requirements By Hotel Functional Area
i) Table Three can be found at the end of this MEP Section R beginning on page 50.
MEP 26 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
24 TABLE 4: VOICE AND DATA REQUIREMENTS FOR GUESTROOMS
a) IMPORTANT NOTE:
i) Minimum/Typical requirements for each functional area are found in the table below.
hotel and the actual hotel design brief (e.g. condos for rent, beach villas).
equipment should be budgeted. This is to provide general direction in doing the detailed design
development for the voice/data cabling and equipment requirements only for each area typically
designed into a hotel.
vi) This table does not consider voice or data drops that may be required for third party space in a
mixed-use building such as house phones for condos that Four Seasons is managing. Those
areas must be considered on a project-by-project basis.
vii) Unless otherwise stated in the table voice/data connections, telephone requirements and data
viii) Cabling and configuration
Each cable in the guest room is a CAT 6 cable home run to the Telecommunications closet
for guest rooms.
All Cables are terminated RJ-45 at all locations.
NOTE: if IP Television is installed in the hotel, provide TWO (2) Cat 6 cables at each TV
location in guest rooms.
b) Standard Guest Room Cabling and Configuration

i) The same 2 voice lines appear on each telephone (bed, desk, bathroom WC) see Part 1 for
how they are connected in the Telecommunications closet.
ii) The fax/modem jack is the 3rd line in the guest room and has a completely separate extension
number.
iii) The Wireless access point in the ceiling at the FCU is typically required every 3 rooms in order to
provide 100% guest room floor coverage for a high-rise hotel. In resorts where the guest rooms
may be independent villas one per villa may be required.
c) Four Seasons Executive Suites Cabling and Configuration

i) Same as standard guest room except:
ii) Additional RJ-45 data jack for the living room TV (total 2 TV data points in the room)
MEP 27 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
d) One Bedroom Suites Cabling and Configuration
i) Same as standard guest room except:
ii) Additional RJ-45 data jack for the living room TV (total 2 TV data points in the room)
iii) Additional RJ-45 voice jack for telephone in powder room off living room.
iv) The same 2 voice lines are on this set as the other sets in the room.
e) Two Bedroom Suites Cabling and Configuration

i) Master bedroom/living room same as One bedroom suite except:
Additional RJ-45 voice jack for living room seating area
Additional RJ-45 voice jack for dining room
Additional RJ-45 voice jack for pantry
ii) The pantry voice jack is independent of the other telephone lines in the suite.
iii) Second bedroom (if a separately saleable key) same as standard guest room.
Telephone lines in 2nd bedroom are completely separate from the Master bedroom/living
room.
iv) If 2nd bedroom is not separately saleable, room would typically have only:
Two line phone at bed
Telephone lines are still separate from those of the Master bedroom/living room.
Data connection at TV for digital pay per view.
f) Presidential/Royal Suites Cabling and Configuration

i) Master bedroom/living room same as 2-bedroom suite.
ii) Add Study/media room with the following connections:
RJ-45 voice jack for 2-line phone.
RJ-45 data jack for desk high speed internet access
RJ-45 data jack for digital pay per view/video on demand.
iii) Add Security office/desk if required with the following connections:
RJ-45 voice jack for 2-line telephone.
One of these lines is a separate line from the main lines in the suite. The other is the
primary line in the suite so that security can answer on behalf of the suite.
RJ-45 data jack for high-speed Internet access.
iv) Add maids quarters if required with the following connections:
RJ-45 voice jack for 1 line telephone.
This line is completely independent of the other lines in the suite.
v) 2nd, 3rd, 4th, etc. bedroom (if separately saleable keys) same as standard guest room.
MEP 28 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Telephone lines in each of these bedrooms are completely separate from the Master
bedroom/living room.
Any of these bedrooms that are not separately saleable would typically have only:
2 line phone at bed
Data connection at TV for digital pay per view.
vi) Presidential and Royal Suites are customized for each property. The actual design and cabling
requirements will be unique to each property.
g) Table Four - Voice and Data Requirements For Hotel Guestrooms

i) Table Four can be found at the end of this MEP Section R beginning on page 57.
25 LOCATIONS WITH SPECIAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS
a) Front Desk/Reception Desk

i) Voice/data requirements for a 3 position (4 position) reception desk are:
Four (4) single voice for 4 telephones (5 voice for 5 telephones)
Three (3) single voice for 3 credit card authorization machines (4 voice for 4 credit card
authorization machines)
NOTE: these are telephone extensions NOT data lines.
Six (6) single data for 3 PCs and 3 Printers (8 for 4 PCs/4 Printers)
Three (3) single data for 3 electronic lock encoders (4 data for 4 encoders)
ii) Requirements in item E.1.a above for the reception desk must be coordinated with the appropriate
locations to have single RJ-45 voice and data jacks terminated in faceplates integrated in the
millwork for these areas per the interior designer details. Jacks should NOT be combined unless
adjacent to each other. See FS Design details for reception desk requirements.
b) Concierge Desk
i) Voice/data requirements for a 2 position (3 position) concierge desk are:
Three (3) single voice for 3 telephones (4 voice for 4 telephones)
One (1) single voice for 1 credit card authorization machine (same)
NOTE: these are telephone extensions NOT data lines.
Three (3) single data for 2 PCs and 1 Printer (5 single data for 3 PC/2 printer)
One (1) single data for 1 electronic lock encoder (same)
ii) Requirements in item E.2.a above for the concierge desk must be coordinated with the appropriate
locations to have single RJ-45 voice and data jacks terminated in faceplates integrated in the
millwork for these areas per the interior designer details. Jacks should NOT be combined unless
adjacent to each other. See FS Design details for concierge desk requirements.
MEP 29 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
c) Operators Room
i) Each operator workstation:
One (1) 4-plex admin faceplate for console, telephone (if necessary), and computer
Two (2) power points
ii) Managers workstation
One (1) 4-plex faceplate for console, telephone and computer.
Two (2) power points
iii) Above the operator workstations we have the following equipment:
CTV monitors with sufficient power for them
Two (2) single voice and two (2) power points for Wireless telephone or Pager master
control
One (1) power point for power bar to charge pagers
Warning/alarm lights per FS Standards
Single POS data point and 1 power point (UPS) for POS/PMS interface failure printer (if
located here and not behind desk)
iv) Equipment desk (includes non-voice/data items to show what else is located at this location
other items to be finalized from Four Seasons Design Details and project specific requirements
not from these notes)
One (1) single POS and 1 power point (UPS) for POS printer (if located here and not in
operators room)
Three (3) serial cables to PABX for system administration, voice mail administration and
call accounting interface
Three (3) serial cables to Computer room for system administration, voice mail administration,
and call accounting interface.
One (1) 4-plex admin faceplate for modems and call accounting system.
Three (3) UPS power for the items on this desk.
d) Computer Room/PABX room/Main Systems Room

i) Cabling vendor to provide a detailed drawing of the computer room with the cable racking and
all power/data points laid out to incorporate the computer racking requirements per our Four
Seasons Design Details. Typically we would have the following:
One (1) or two (2) 19 racks for copper and fibre data cabling (cabling contractor provided),
depending on size of voice and data network and whether IP telephony is being used.
One (1) 19 rack for network equipment core switches (cabling contractor provided) . Rack
is enclosed and lockable
Three (3) 19 racks (cabling contractor provided) for data servers. Racks are enclosed and
lockable
MEP 30 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
One (1) 19 rack for digital pay per view (pay per view vendor provided)
One (1) or Two (2) 19 racks (cabling contractor provided) for digital free to guest television
(connected to MATV network or TV structured cabling network depending on project
design). Racks are enclosed and lockable. Located in MATV head end room if separate
room provided.
MDF for CAT 3 riser cable, wall mounted, adjacent to PABX location. Located in PABX
room if separate room provided.
Four (4) 19 racks (PABX vendor provided) for PABX. Located in PABX room if separate
room provided.
ii) 8 modem jacks should be located near the computer server racking.
iii) Four (4) 4-plex faceplates should be located equidistant around the room, one on each wall.
iv) One wall telephone to be located near door to computer managers office.
v) Conduit and special interface cabling enters room and terminates adjacent to the PABX,
Computer server and Digital free to guest racking as appropriate.
vi) See Section XXX above for specific interface cable requirements to and from the Computer /
PABX Room.
vii) See Section XXX above for specific PABX Equipment cable requirements to and from the
Computer / PABX Room.
e) Spa/Health Club Areas

i) Voice/data requirements for a 2 position spa/health club Reception desk are:
Two (2) single voice for 2 telephones
One (1) single voice for 1 credit card authorization machine
Three (3) single data for 2 PCs and 1 Printer
ii) Requirements in item E.5.a above for the spa/health club desk must be coordinated with
the appropriate locations in the millwork per the interior designer details. Jacks should NOT
be combined unless adjacent to each other. See FS Design details for spa/health club desk
requirements.
iii) Emergency phones should be located outside steam and sauna locations next to emergency
buttons. If this is a wet area, the phones should have some type of protection against moisture
or move to just outside doors to these areas.
iv) Such telephones MUST NOT BE inside the steam or sauna rooms themselves.
v) Emergency and house phones should be clearly visible in the exercise rooms.
vi) All treatment rooms should have a wall-mounted telephone.
vii) There should be a house phone and an emergency phone wall mounted in a conspicuous
location near every indoor or outdoor pool.
MEP 31 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
viii) There should be an additional emergency phone near any Jacuzzi if the Jacuzzi is located any
distance from the nearest pool.
ix) Guest use Cabanas on the pool deck should have jacks for telephone and for data located in
each cabana. These should be mounted on conduit stub-ups and protected from the environment
in a weatherproof enclosure.
x) Towel pavilion/service cabanas should each contain the following:
One 4-plex POS jack for: One telephone, One POS terminal, One credit card verification
terminal
Two additional voice jacks for two additional cordless phones.
26 INDEX TABLES
a) Table 1: Fibre Optic Capacity
Admin Guest Combined Admin Guest Combined Admin Guest Combined Admin Guest Combined
TABLE 1: closet closet closet closet closet closet closet closet closet closet closet closet
City Hotel with Non-IP City Hotel with IP PABX Hotel/Resort with Hotel/Resort with
Fibre Optic Riser
PABX Distributed Non-IP Distributed IP PABX
Capacity
PABX
Administration voice 2 2 2 2
Administration IP voice 2 2 2 2
Administration data 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Administration wireless
2 see guest 2 see guest 2 see guest 2 see guest
voice/data
Guest voice see see
see admin see admin
admin admin
Guest IP voice 2 see admin 2 see admin
Guest HSIA data 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Guest digital Pay per
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
view
Guest/public space
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
wireless voice/data
Spare 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
TOTAL 6 8 10 8 10 12 8 8 12 10 10 14
Meeting space telecom
closet single mode
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
voice/data/video
services
Meeting space telecom
closet multi-mode
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
voice/data/video
services
Spare single mode 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
TOTAL 14 0 14 14 0 14 14 0 14 14 0 14
MEP 32 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
IP TV (admin fibre
required only if guest IP 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 2 4 2 2 4
TV provided)
Security - IP camera
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
based
1. Where a closet is combined, in some cases the same fibre can carry both admin and guest and so the fibre count is not
double
2. Wireless voice/data is always a common physical network so in a combined closet the same fibre will be used for both admin
and guest
3. IP voice will always be the same network so in a combined closet the same fibre will be used for both admin and guest.
4. All projects: Where the computer room and PABX room are separate a 12 strand/core mixed mode cable (8 strand/core
multi-mode, 4 core single mode) shall be run between the two rooms
b) Table 2: Voice and Data Requirements by Area

i) IMPORTANT NOTES:
Minimum requirements for each functional area are found in the table below.
Not all areas may be designed into all hotels.
Additional positions or locations may also be needed depending upon the size or type of
the hotel and the actual hotel design brief (e.g. marina or ski concierge).
This table is NOT to be used to size a telephone switch or network or determine how much
equipment should be budgeted. This table provides general direction for the voice/data
cabling detailed design development and equipment requirements for each area typically
The telephone switch configuration, network design and systems budget must be prepared
based on the design brief and project drawings for the specific project. The equipment
listed is indicative only and may change for specific projects.
ii) Non-network equipment (e.g. printer connected directly to a PC) is not listed here.
iii) Wireless phone users are included in the list below by department even if they do not have a
wiring connection.
iv) CAT 6 cabling locations for wireless access points are not listed below as they are project specific
and the number per department or location can vary greatly depending on construction material
and space adjacencies. They are still required and must be incorporated into the structured
cabling design for the hotel project.
v) This table does not consider voice or data drops that may be required for third party space in
a mixed-use building such as a hotel with office and condo component. Those areas must be
considered on a project-by-project basis.
vi) Unless otherwise stated in the table voice/data connections, telephone requirements and data
MEP 33 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
vii) All voice and data locations where POS equipment is found, including kitchen areas are covered
in TABLE 2, POS locations. TABLE 2 includes all voice, data and POS and non-POS equipment
for these areas.
Table 2: Voice and Data Requirements by Area

Average Voice/Data Telephone Requirement Data Requirement
Hotel Functional area number of Connections per per position per position
Positions position
Accounting
16 button Digital/IP set and

Director of Finance 1 4-plex Wireless phone and cordless Laptop and printer
headset
Assistant Director of Finance 1 4-plex PC and printer
Wireless phone and headset
Clerks 4 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC; shared printer
Credit Manager 1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC; shared printer
Payroll Manager 1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC and printer
Income Audit 1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC; shared printer
Day Audit 2 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC; shared printer
General Cashier 1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC; shared printer

Secretary 1 4-plex PC and printer
headset
Single voice wall
Staff Cash out Desk 1 Analog wall phone
mounted
Time clock in department 1 Single Data Time clock

Director of Information
1 4-plex Wireless phone and cordless PC; shared printer
Technology
headset
Assistant Director of 8 button Digital/IP set and
1 4-plex PC; shared printer
Information Technology Wireless phone
Single voice rack Modem
Computer room servers/
12 mounted; 4 per data
interface PCs
rack
MEP 34 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
One only 16 button digital/IP

4 4-plex As required by project
sets
8 button digital/IP set wall
1 Single voice
mounted
PABX room (if separate from
1 Single voice 16 button digital/IP set
Computer room)
Single voice direct Direct telephone for emergency
1
outside line not through switch
1 4-plex None, jacks only
MATV head end room 1 Single voice 8 button digital/IP set
1 4-plex None, jacks only
Administration

Conference Coordinators 2 4-plex PC; shared printer
Wireless phone

Catering Sales Managers 2 4-plex PC; shared printer

Director of Conference
Services/Catering Mgr
headset
Director of Food and
Beverage
headset

Assistant Director of F&B 1 4-plex PC; shared printer

Director of Marketing 1 4-plex Wireless phone and cordless PC; shared printer
headset
Director of Sales 1 4-plex Wireless phone and cordless PC; shared printer
headset
Two only 16 button Digital/IP
set and One only Wireless One only PC; shared
General Manager 2 4-plex
phone and One only cordless printer
headset
MEP 35 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
Reception for Executive 16 button Digital/IP set and

Offices Wireless phone and headset

Resident Manager/Executive
Assistant Mgr
headset
Sales System Operator 1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC; shared printer

Sales Managers 3 4-plex PC; shared printer

Director of Public Relations/
Public Relations Manager
headset
Secretaries (Exec. Office, 16 button Digital/IP set and
Sales, F&B, Catering) headset
1
Single voice
Mail/copy room 2 Fax
1 Duplex voice/data Network fax/copier Network fax/copier
Front Office
Valet Parking Office/ Parking

1 4-plex 8 button digital/IP set PC and printer
Manager
Valet Parkers waiting room/
1 Single voice Analog wall set
Drivers waiting room
Doorman stand 1 4-plex 16 button digital/IP set Laptop
Luggage holding 1 Single voice Analog wall set
Bellmans desk 1 4-plex 16 button digital/IP set PC
Bell staff wireless phone
Concierge Desk (2 position Two only PCs and

3 Single data
desk) one only printer
Electronic lock
1 Single data
encoder
MEP 36 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
3 Single voice cordless headset per staff
member (not telephone set)
1 Single voice Credit card authorization
Concierge Workroom 1 4-plex 16 button Digital/IP set PC and printer
Reception/Cashiering (3 Three only PCs and

6 Single data
position desk) three only printer
Electronic lock
3 Single data
encoder
3 Single voice 16 button Digital/IP set
3 Single voice Credit card authorization
Work area behind Reception 1 4-plex 16 button Digital/IP set PC and printer

Rooms Division Manager 1 4-plex Wireless phone and cordless PC; shared printer
headset
16 button digital/IP set and

Front Office Manager 1 4-plex wireless phone and cordless PC; shared printer
headset
headset
CORE (Reservations and Telephone operators)
16 button Digital/IP ACD set

Sales Agents 4 4-plex and cordless headset per staff PC; shared printer
member (not per telephone set)
16 button Digital/IP ACD set
Director of Revenue Mgmt 1 4-plex PC
and cordless headset
Client Information Specialist
1 4-plex 16 button Digital/IP ACD set PC and printer
(Guest Historian)
CIS/CRS interface 1 4-plex 16 button Digital/IP ACD set PC and printer
MEP 37 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
General use 1 4-plex Fax Printer
Time clock in department 1 Single data Time clock
Operator console if standard

operators setup OR 16 button
Operators 3 4-plex digital/IP ACD set if CORE; in PC
either case headset per staff
member (not per telephone set)
Telecom manager/supervisor 16 button Digital/IP set and
1 4-plex PC
(only in large hotels) operator console and headset
1
Work counter
Call accounting 1 4-plex Modem PC and printer
Voicemail mgmt PC PC
System admin PC 1 4-plex PC
ACD display board 1 Duplex voice/data ACD display board PC
Engineering

Director of Engineering 1 4-plex wireless phone and cordless PC and printer
headset
Chief Engineer 1 4-plex PC; shared printer
wireless phone
Assistant Chief Engineer 1 4-plex PC; shared printer
wireless phone
Shift Engineers Wireless phone
Building Management System 1 4-plex 16 button Digital/IP set PC and printer
16 button Digital/IP set; fax and

headset
Workshops: Carpentry,
Upholstery, Paint
To be determined by
General Maintenance Area 2 4-plex To be determined by project
project
MEP 38 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position

1
Mechanical/Electrical/
Project Single voice at entrance
Plumbing rooms (Plant Analog wall set
dependent to each room.
rooms)
Elevator/lift related
Project
Elevator machine rooms Single voice Analog wall set
dependent
Project Analog wall set in elevator
Guest Elevators Single voice
dependent enclosure
Project
Single data LCD monitor
dependent
Project
Service Elevators Single voice Analog wall set in enclosure
dependent
Food and Beverage

(other than locations where POS equipment is installed)
8 button Digital/IP set and wire-

Banquet Manager 1 4-plex PC and printer
less phone
Head Houseman 1 4-plex
less phone
Chefs Office 1 4-plex PC and printer
less phone
Pastry Chefs Office 1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC; shared printer
Specialty Restaurant Chefs

1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC; shared printer
Office
Restaurant Outlet Managers

3 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC and printer
(if separate offices)
F&B Preparation areas:
MEP 39 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
Meat/Fish/Vegetable prep 3 Single voice Analog wall set
Garde Manger 1 Single voice Analog wall set
Banquet Kitchen 1 Single voice Analog wall set
Time clock for meeting

1 Single data Time clock
space/banquet kitchen
One 8 button digital/IP Set and
Restaurant Maitre D stand
1 4-plex one cordless phone for guest Laptop
(per restaurant)
use
See POS section below for all other telephone and data points for Food and Beverage locations
Meeting Space AV niches and related

(See Part 1 of this document and Four Seasons Design Details for explanations of these niches and how they are wired)
2 Section Ballroom AV niches
AV1-F 2 4-plex None; jacks only None; jacks only
6-plex voice only (note:

Telecommunications
None; jacks only None; jacks only
Closet termination is
different)
6 strand mixed mode
Fibre optic (terminated None; jacks only None; jacks only
SC)

6 strand mixed mode
SC)
AV2 2 4-plex None; jacks only None; jacks only
FB1 2 4-plex None; jacks only None; jacks only
MEP 40 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
Single voice in control

CN 2 Analog wall set
niche
3 Section Ballroom AV niches
6-plex voice only (note:

Telecommunications
None; jacks only None; jacks only
Closet termination is
different)
6 strand mixed mode

SC)
6 strand mixed mode

SC)

niche
Large meeting rooms
6 strand mixed mode

SC)
MEP 41 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position

niche
Small meeting rooms

niche
Boardrooms

niche
Ballroom Pre function space
(divisible in 2)

niche
Meeting room Pre function
space

niche
Public Corridors outside
meeting rooms
MEP 42 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
GR (at each meeting room

1 4-plex None; jacks only None; jacks only
entrance)
1 per meeting room/ballroom
House phone allowance for section plus one per group
meeting space guest use registration. Provide (50/50)
digital/IP and analog set mix.
Service corridors behind
meeting rooms
Meeting room service pantries 1 Single voice Analog wall set
Loading Dock
AVL 1 4-plex None; jacks only None; jacks only

6 strand mixed mode
1 Fibre optic (terminated None; jacks only None; jacks only
SC)
AV control room 1 Single voice 8 button digital/IP set
1 4-plex None; jacks only None; jacks only
Housekeeping, Laundry and Valet Laundry
Clerks in housekeeping
general area

Director of Housekeeping 1 4-plex PC and printer
headset
Assistant Director of
Housekeeping
Laundry Manager 1 4-plex 16 button Digital/IP set PC and printer
PC or POS (see POS

Valet 1 4-plex 16 button Digital/IP set
section)
Housekeeping closets not
located adjacent to service 1 Single voice Analog wall set
elevator landings
2 only at op-
Laundry posite ends Single voice Analog wall set
of room
MEP 43 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
Uniform issue 1 Single voice 8 button Digital/IP set
Human Resources

Director of HR 1 4-plex PC and printer
wireless phone and headset
HR Manager or Assistant 16 button Digital/IP set and
Director of HR wireless phone
Training Manager 1 4-plex PC; shared printer
wireless phone
Benefits Manager 1 4-plex 16 button Digital/IP set PC and printer

headset
Training Room 2 4-plex None; jacks only None; jacks only
PC and shared
Language Training 3 4-plex Analog desk set
printer
Library 1 4-plex 8 button digital/IP set
Staff Cafeteria, Locker rooms
Cooking line 1 Single voice Analog wall set
Seating area 2 Single voice Analog wall set
Single voice direct

2 Pay telephone
outside line
Time clock one at entrance
and one at exit
Cyber caf 2 Duplex voice/data To be determined by project PC
Male Lockers 1 Single voice Analog wall set
MEP 44 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
Single voice direct

1 Pay telephone
outside line
Female Lockers 1 Single voice Analog wall set
Single voice direct

1 Pay telephone
outside line
Time clock at entrance to 2 (one male
each locker room (not all and one Single data Time clock
projects require this) female)
Purchasing, Receiving Storerooms, Loading Dock
Dry Stores 1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC and printer
Purchasing Office

Director of purchasing 1 4-plex PC and printer
wireless phone
Clerks/buyers 2 4-plex PC and printer
headset
General 1 4-plex Fax and/or network fax/copier Network printer/copier
Receiving 1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC and printer
1 Intercom line Intercom to loading dock door
Loading dock 1 Single voice Analog wall set
1 Single voice Pay telephone
1 Intercom line Intercom outside door
Security

Director of Security 1 4-plex PC and printer
less phone and headset
Security Office 2 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC and printer
MEP 45 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
1 only Intercom line Intercom to staff entrance
Guest door locking

1 only 4-plex None; jacks only
PC and/or encoder
Back of house access
control computer
1
Security Officers Wireless phone
Staff entrance 1 Intercom line Intercom outside door
Time clock at staff entrance 1 Single data Time clock
Security clock at staff

entrance
Spa, Fitness, Pool Deck (excluding F&B areas), Other Recreation
Reception (2 staff positions) 2 Single voice 8 button Digital/IP set
1 Single voice Credit Card Authorization
Two only PC and

3 Single data
one only printer
Guest waiting area 1 Single voice Analog desk set

Manager 1 4-plex PC and printer
less phone
Consultation room/Fitness
1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC and printer
assessment
Treatment rooms 8 Single voice Analog desk set
Staff prep room 1 4-plex 8 button digital/IP set PC and printer
PC for Internet
Young Adult Centre 3 Single data
games
House phone 1 Single Voice Analog wall set
MEP 46 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
Fitness room 1 Single voice Analog wall set
1 Single voice Analog wall set for emergencies
Aerobics/Yoga/
1 Single voice Analog wall set for emergencies
spinning or other fitness room
PC for Internet
Kids for all Seasons 2 Single data
games
House phone 1 Single Voice Analog wall set
Manager Desk 1 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set PC and printer
Pool deck
Project Single voice per 2

Chaise lounges None; jack only
specific lounges
Data jack for guest
Project
Guest Cabanas Duplex voice/data Analog desk set high speed internet
specific
access
Service Cabanas See POS section
Analog wall set for emergencies

Pool area 1 Single voice
(weatherproof)
1 Single voice Analog wall set for guest use
Analog wall set for emergencies

Childrens pool area 1 Single voice
(weatherproof)
1 Single voice Analog wall set for guest use
Tennis pavilion 1 Single voice Analog wall set (weatherproof)
Golf facilities
Reception (2 staff positions) 2 Single voice 8 button Digital/IP set
1 Single voice Credit Card Authorization
Two only PC and

3 Single data
one only printer
MEP 47 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Positions position
Golf Club manager office 1 4-plex 16 button digital/IP set PC; shared printer
Golf Club Pro Office 1 4-plex 8 button digital/IP set PC and printer
16 button digital/IP set and

Golf club secretary 1 4-plex PC and printer
headset
Fax
Food & Beverage See POS section
Parking Garage/Security Gates

1 at each
Exit stairs on each floor of Analog wall phone
stair on each Single voice
parking garage (weatherproof if outdoor)
floor.
Parking cashier booth at
See POS section
garage exit
Security gate to property
1 4-plex 8 button digital/IP set PC and printer
(typical of some resorts)
c) Table 3: Point of Sale Requirements by Area

i) IMPORTANT NOTES:
Minimum number of point of sale terminals and printers for the food and beverage system
are noted in the table below. The average counts are based on the typical seat numbers
noted.
Not all areas may be designed into all hotels.
Additional positions or locations may be needed depending upon the size or type of the hotel
and the actual hotel design brief (e.g. beach services or hotel operated retail outlets).
This table is NOT to be used to size a telephone switch or network or determine how much
equipment should be budgeted. This table provides general direction for the voice/data
cabling detailed design development and equipment requirements for each area typically
The telephone switch configuration, network design and systems budget must be prepared
based on the design brief and project drawings for the specific project. The equipment
listed is indicative only and may change for specific projects.
MEP 48 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Table 3: Point of Sale (POS) Requirements by Area
Average number of Voice/Data Telephone Data Requirement per
Hotel Functional area Positions Connections Requirement position
per position per position
Miscellaneous
Room charge Posting printer

when interface fails (location 1 Order printer per
1 single data Order printer
varies by property: Operators hotel
or Front Office cash desk)
Restaurants
All Day Restaurant Service

1 POS workstation per
Stand - may be located in Credit card
25-35 seats; 3 for a 4-plex Terminal + Cheque printer
kitchen; must be out of guest authorization
standard restaurant
view
Specialty Restaurant Service
Stands (if more than one
restaurant; includes golf club Credit card
35-40 seats; 3 for a 4-plex Terminal + Cheque printer
restaurants) - may be located authorization
standard restaurant
in kitchen; must be out of
guest view
Kitchens
(Per kitchen other than Banquet Kitchen see Part 1; includes golf club F&B kitchens)
Kitchen telephones 2 Single voice Analog wall set
1 Order printer per hot

Hot Kitchen Pick-up Single data Order printer
pickup location
1 Order printer at main Order printer used as
Single data
hot pickup line expediter printer
1 Order printer per cold
Cold Kitchen Pick-up Single data Order printer
pickup location
Pastry/Dessert Pick-up (if 1 Order printer per
Single data Order printer
separate from cold kitchen) dessert pickup
Bakery (usually one only 1 Order printer per

Single data Order printer
located in main kitchen) bakery
Time clock in department
(kitchen area for each
1 per kitchen Single data Time clock
restaurant and near meeting
space)
Service Bars
1 Order printer per

Service Bar Single data Order printer
service bar
1 Telephone per
Single voice Analog wall set
service bar
MEP 49 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Room Service (also called Villa Dining in Resorts)
2 POS workstation per 16 button Digital/IP

Room Service Cashier 4-plex Terminal + Cheque printer
hotel set with headset
8 button Digital/IP set
Room Service Manager 1 4-plex PC and printer
with headset
1 Order printer per
Setup area Single Data Order printer
department
Single data (in
Telephone Operators (in Use existing
addition to data 1 Terminal shared between
some resorts ONLY project 1 operators phones/
already used for two operator stations
specific) consoles
Hotel PCs)
Bar (each bar or lounge bar in hotel; includes golf club bars)
Bartender 1 POS workstation per

(Equipment must be out of standard bar; if longer Terminal + Cheque printer
4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set
sight of guest, i.e. below bar than 10-12 stools, 2 and 1 Order printer
level) POS workstations
Credit card
authorization
1 cordless phone for

1 Single voice
guest use
Service Stand 1 POS workstation per
Credit card
(One could be located in 40-50 seats; 2 for a 4-plex Terminal + Cheque printer
authorization
pantry) standard bar
Pantry 1 Single voice Analog wall set
1 Single Data Order printer
Lobby Lounge/Tea Lounge (each lounge in hotel without a bar)
Service Stand 1 POS workstation per

(One could be located in 40-50 seats; 2 for a
pantry) standard lounge
Pantry 1 Single voice Analog wall set
Pool Bar/Restaurants
Bartender 1 POS workstation per

(Equipment must be out of standard bar; if longer Terminal + Cheque printer
4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set
sight of guest, i.e. below bar than 10-12 stools, 2 and 1 Order printer
level) POS workstations
MEP 50 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Credit card
authorization
Cordless phone for

1 Single voice
guest use
1 POS workstation
Service Stand
per 40-50 seats; 2 Credit card
(One could be located in 4-plex Terminal + Cheque printer
for a standard pool authorization
pantry)
bar/restaurant
Kitchen Pantry (if large
restaurant, equip as with
standard kitchen described
previously)
Pool Deck and/or Beach Area

Service cabanas cabana; 2 per typical 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set Terminal + Cheque printer
pool deck
Credit card
authorization
Cordless phone for
2 Single voice
guest use
Beach services
1 POS workstation 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set Terminal + Cheque printer
Credit card
authorization
Cordless phone for
2 Single voice
guest use
Beauty Salon (if run by Four Seasons)
Booking/Cash desk 1 POS workstation 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set Terminal + Cheque printer
Credit card
authorization
Cordless phone for
(if salon is large) Single voice
guest
Sundry shop (if run by Four Seasons)
Cash desk 1 POS workstation 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set Terminal + Cheque printer
Credit card
authorization
MEP 51 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Golf facilities

Pro Shop 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set Terminal + Cheque printer
cash desk
Credit card
authorization
Halfway house 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set Terminal + Cheque printer
cash desk
Credit card
authorization
Parking Cashier
Valet parking cashier at

1 POS workstation 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set Terminal + Cheque printer
Porte cochere
Credit card
authorization
At garage parking exit 1 POS workstation 4-plex 8 button Digital/IP set Terminal + Cheque printer
Credit card
authorization
d) Table 4: Voice and Data Requirements by Guestroom

Important Notes:
i) Minimum/Typical requirements for each functional area are found in the table below.
hotel and the actual hotel design brief (e.g. condos for rent, beach villas).
equipment should be budgeted. This is to provide general direction in doing the detailed design
development for the voice/data cabling and equipment requirements only for each area typically
MEP 52 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
vi) This table does not consider voice or data drops that may be required for third party space in a
mixed-use building such as house phones for condos that Four Seasons is managing. Those
areas must be considered on a project-by-project basis.
vii) Unless otherwise stated in the table voice/data connections, telephone requirements and data
viii) Cabling and configuration
Each cable in the guest room is a CAT 6 cable home run to the Telecommunications closet
for guest rooms.
All Cables are terminated RJ-45 at all locations.
NOTE: if IP Television is installed in the hotel, provide TWO (2) Cat 6 cables at each TV location in guest
rooms.
Standard Guestroom Cabling and Configuration
i) NOTE: if IP Television is installed in the hotel, provide TWO (2) Cat 6 cables at each TV location
in guest rooms. The same 2 voice lines appear on each telephone (bed, desk, bathroom WC)
see Part 1 for how they are connected in the Telecommunications closet.
ii) The fax/modem jack is the 3rd line in the guest room and has a completely separate extension
number.
iii) The Wireless access point in the ceiling at the FCU is typically required every 3 rooms in order to
provide 100% guest room floor coverage for a high-rise hotel. In resorts where the guest rooms
may be independent villas one per villa may be required.
Four Seasons Executive Suite Cabling and Configuration

Same as standard guest room except:
i) One additional RJ-45 data jack for the living room TV (total 2 TV data points in the room)
One Bedroom Suite Cabling and Configuration

Same as standard guest room except:
i) Additional RJ-45 data jack for the living room TV (total 2 TV data points in the room)
ii) Additional RJ-45 voice jack for telephone in powder room off living room.
iii) The same 2 voice lines are on this set as the other sets in the room.
Two Bedroom Suite Cabling and Configuration

Master bedroom/living room same as 1 bedroom suite except:
i) Additional RJ-45 voice jack for living room seating area

ii) Additional RJ-45 voice jack for dining room
iii) Additional RJ-45 voice jack for pantry
The pantry voice jack is independent of the other telephone lines in the suite.
MEP 53 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
iv) 2nd bedroom (if a separately saleable key) same as standard guest room.
Telephone lines in 2nd bedroom are completely separate from the Master bedroom/living
room.
v) If 2nd bedroom is not separately saleable, room would typically have only:
vi) 2 line phone at bed
Telephone lines are still separate from those of the Master bedroom/living room.
vii) Data connection at TV for digital pay per view.
Presidential/Royal Suite Cabling and Configuration
i) Master bedroom/living room same as 2-bedroom suite.

ii) Add Study/media room with the following connections:
RJ-45 voice jack for 2-line phone.
RJ-45 data jack for desk high speed internet access
RJ-45 data jack for digital pay per view/video on demand.
iii) Add Security office/desk if required with the following connections:
RJ-45 voice jack for 2-line telephone (One of these lines is a separate line from the main
lines in the suite. The other is the primary line in the suite so that security can answer on
behalf of the suite).
RJ-45 data jack for high-speed Internet access.
iv) Add maids quarters if required with the following connections:

RJ-45 voice jack for 1 line telephone.
This line is completely independent of the other lines in the suite.
v) Second, third, fourth, etc. bedroom (if separately saleable keys) same as standard guest room.
Telephone lines in each of these bedrooms are completely separate from the Master
bedroom/living room.
Any of these bedrooms that are not separately saleable would typically have only: 2 line
phone at bed and data connection at TV for digital pay per view.
vi) Presidential and Royal Suites are customized for each property. The actual design and cabling
vii) Presidential and Royal Suites are customized for each property. The actual design and cabling
MEP 54 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
Table 4: Voice and Data Requirements by Guestroom
Voice/Data Telephone
Room Location Data Requirement
Connections Requirement
Standard Room
2 line analog desk

Bedroom Baseboard at Bed Single voice
phone
Baseboard behind TV or
Digital pay per view/video on
credenza Single data
demand connection
2 line analog
Below desk Duplex voice
cordless
Fax/modem jack
High speed internet connec-

Above desk Single data
tion for guest laptop
2 line analog wall
Bathroom Wall in Bathroom WC Single voice
phone
Ceiling near FCU or in
resorts in hall closet
Entrance Hall (1 point per 2-3 rooms Single data Wireless access point
depending on building
construction)
Four Seasons Suites
2 line analog desk

Bedroom Baseboard at Bed Single voice
phone
demand connection
2 line analog wall
Bathroom Wall in Bathroom WC Single voice
phone
2 line analog
Living room Below desk Duplex voice
cordless
Fax/modem jack

demand connection
construction)
MEP 55 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
1 Bedroom suites
2 line analog desk

Master Bedroom Baseboard at Bed Single voice
phone
demand connection
2 line analog wall
Master Bathroom Wall in Bathroom WC Single voice
phone
2 line analog
Living Room Below desk Duplex voice
cordless
Fax/modem jack

demand connection
2 line analog wall
Powder room Wall Single voice
phone
construction)
2 Bedroom Suites
2 line analog desk

phone
demand connection
2 line analog wall
phone
2 line analog
cordless
Fax/modem jack

demand connection
Baseboard or floor at seat- 2 line analog desk
Single voice
ing area phone
Dining Room Baseboard Single voice None, jack only
MEP 56 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
1 line analog wall

Pantry Wall Single voice
phone
2 line analog wall
phone
construction)
2 line analog desk
2nd Bedroom Baseboard at Bed Single voice
phone
demand connection
2 line analog
cordless
Fax/modem jack

2 line analog wall
2nd Bathroom Wall in Bathroom WC Single voice
phone
Entrance Hall for 2nd resorts in hall closet
Bedroom (1 point per 2-3 rooms Single data Wireless access point
construction)
Presidential/Royal Suites
2 line analog desk

phone
demand connection
2 line analog wall
phone
2 line analog
cordless
Fax/modem jack

demand connection
Baseboard or floor at seat- 2 line analog desk
Single voice
ing area phone
Dining Room Baseboard Single voice None, jack only
MEP 57 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS R
1 line analog wall

Pantry or full kitchen Wall Single voice
phone
2 line analog wall
phone
2 line analog desk
Study/Media room Baseboard or floor at desk Single voice
phone
Baseboard or floor at
Single voice Fax/modem
credenza behind desk
demand connection
construction)
2 line analog desk High speed internet connec-
Security desk/office Baseboard or floor at desk Duplex voice/data
phone tion for guest laptop
1 line analog desk
Maids quarters Baseboard at bed Single voice
phone
2nd, 3rd, 4th, etc. 2 line analog desk
Baseboard at Bed Single voice
Bedroom phone
demand connection
2 line analog
cordless
Fax/modem jack

2 line analog wall
2nd Bathroom Wall in Bathroom WC Single voice
phone
Entrance Hall for 2nd resorts in hall closet
Bedroom (1 point per 2-3 rooms Single data Wireless access point
construction)
MEP 58 / 58
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION
S SYSTEM
1 General .................................................................................................... 1
2 Scope of MATV System ................................................................ 1
3 Coordination with Other Systems ....................................... 2
4 Cabling (All Entertainment TV Systems) ..................... 2

a) Cabling Design Requirements
b) Conduit
c) Backbone Cabling - MATV System
d) Backbone Cabling - PPV System
e) Horizontal Cabling - General
f) Horiziontal Cabling - Guestrooms
g) Horizontal Cabling - Front of House + Back of House
5 Signal Outlet Locations .............................................................. 4

6 Incoming Services ............................................................................ 5
a) General
b) Cable - Underground
c) Satellite
d) Antenna Systems
7 MATV Head End + Network Components ..................... 8

a) General
b) In Hotel Channels
c) Channel Line Up
8 Television Sets + Related Equipment .............................. 10
9 IP Television .......................................................................................... 10
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS S
1 GENERAL
i) The Master Antenna Television (MATV) System shall be capable of providing quality standard
and high definition television signals on plasma/LCD televisions at all back of house, front of
house and guestroom signal outlets as required by Four Seasons on the specific project.
ii) The MATV System must be designed and installed to be fully compatible with the signal suppliers
performance and technical requirements.
iii) See Electrical Low Voltage Standards on voice & data cabling for specific requirements related
to all category 6 cabling referenced in this section.
iv) The MATV system shall include only the capital costs for required equipment and cabling for the
MATV network and all such equipment and cabling shall be owned by the Property at the end
of the installation. Only the signal suppliers receiving equipment (e.g. Satellite dishes) can be
leased with Four Seasons review and approval.
v) Consultant to research and provide list of available television service options for the project for
review by Four Seasons Hotels to enable the detailed specification to include the necessary
equipment to support the desired mix of content. This is particularly important where content
is delivered by satellite and multiple dishes are required to provide access to the required
content.
vi) Content/programming (television services) shall not be included in the scope of work of the
MATV contractor; however, the MATV contractor must provide a system sized and configured
to support the amount and type of content/programming required by the property as outlined in
these standards and as described in the design brief for the specific project.
vii) No entity except the Four Seasons hotel management team acting for the owner shall sign any
contracts for delivery of television services.
viii) Access to the signal suppliers on property head end once installed shall be controlled and
governed by hotel management policy and procedures. The suppliers head end must be used
to service only the Four Seasons hotel and/or other entities in the same project owned or
managed by the owner of the Four Seasons hotel. If the supplier desires to use the head end to
service other customers the supplier must obtain written consent and permission from both Four
Seasons and the hotel owner and the supplier may be required to pay rent for space required to
support these other customers.
2 SCOPE OF MATV SYSTEM
i) The MATV System infrastructure shall include all components necessary to provide a functioning
end to end system, including but not limited to: all required RF amplifiers, splitters, tap offs, jack
outlets, head end modulators, combiners, satellite dishes (if not provided by television service
supplier), connections to service supplier (cable, satellite or both), etc.
ii) The MATV System is only one component of the in-hotel entertainment system and shall be
designed to be compatible with other systems such as Pay Per View (PPV)/Video on Demand
(VOD); fitness center cardio equipment incorporating televisions; all purchased television sets
and related equipment for broadcasting the television services; etc.
MEP 1 / 10
2007 MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS S
iii) The MATV System shall include the cabling infrastructure requirements for all locations where
television service may be delivered including but not limited to guest rooms, residential locations,
front of house, spa, fitness, meeting space, back of house, and food and beverage outlets.
3 COORDINATION WITH OTHER SYSTEMS
i) The MATV system design must include or coordinate with (if designed by another party) the
structured cabling CAT 6 infrastructure to support digital Pay per view systems that will be used
in the guest rooms in conjunction with the free to guest TV service from the MATV network.
ii) The MATV cabling design must be coordinated with the designs and requirements of the interior
designer, the electrical consultant, the structured cabling consultant (if different) and the AV
consultant where both MATV and AV are delivering service to the same location, e.g. suite
in-room entertainment systems, meeting space AV niches.
iii) The MATV contractor, if different from the structured cabling contractor, must coordinate their jack
installations with the structured cabling contractor, the AV contractor, the electrical contractor,
and the interior designer.
4 CABLING (All Entertainment TV Systems)
a) Cabling Design Requirements

i) The Design must identify where and how services are delivered into the property. I.e. Satellite
farm or underground cable. See Section XXX for further details.
ii) Schematic design including riser and horizontal feeds to each typical jack location in the
property showing all conduit requirements, wiring closets (including equipment mounting and
power requirements), signal distribution rooms, network taps and splitters, combiners, etc. in
the design.
iii) A Coordinated detailed design showing each TV jack location shall be provided.
iv) A separate network segment for guest rooms from all other jack locations is required. This is as
a result of some television services that are only licensed for in-room presentation.
v) Design layout of the MATV head end room, satellite head end and intermediate wiring closets
including anticipated racking, cabling and power requirements for each room is required. Include
mounting requirements.
vi) The design must provide performance specifications for all components of the network to support
HD and standard definition television service delivery on plasma/LCD televisions.
vii) The design shall calculate signal strength at each jack location to demonstrate the capability of
the network to support HD picture delivery on plasma/LCD televisions based on the required
performance specifications.
viii) Where cabling is not run in conduit, it must be plenum rated if run in return air spaces.
ix) Where cabling is run outdoors, outdoors rated cabling (armoured, waterproof, etc.) must be
specified.
MEP 2 / 10
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS S
b) Conduit
i) The incoming service conduit requirements shall be coordinated with the local cable television
supplier and satellite system provider to ensure that conduits of sufficient number and size are
provided from the source of signal to system head end rooms and to rooms where interconnected
systems such as PPV and interactive TV systems can be integrated.
ii) The design of the on-property MATV cabling shall indicate all required conduit sizes and
specifications for bend radii, pull boxes, lengths, etc.
c) Backbone Cabling - MATV System

i) Where backbone cabling is coax, it shall be specified to 1 Ghz bandwidth using cable size/type/
specification appropriate to distance and environment required for the installation, RG 11U, .500
hardline, outdoor, plenum, etc.
ii) Where system design requirements dictate the use of fibre optic cabling due to lengths of runs
and bandwidth requirements, then fibre optic cabling shall consist of dedicated 2 core/strand of
single mode or multi-mode fibre (if permitted) to support MATV signal only.
iii) Design and contract must include all encoding and decoding equipment between the coax
MATV cabling from the wiring closet to the jack end and the fibre backbone. Encoding/decoding
equipment shall permit 1 Ghz bandwidth delivery to the TV jack location.
d) Backbone Cabling - PPV System

i) Since the PPV System is an IP based Ethernet system, 2 core/strand of dedicated and
independent fibre (multi-mode or if required by distance, single mode), separate from the fibre
used for the MATV free to guest TV delivery, are required to all guestroom telecommunications
closets. The closets requiring this cabling must be provided to the structured cabling consultant
for incorporation in their design.
e) Horizontal Cabling - General

i) Coax television jacks in public space and hotel guest rooms may be tapped off a common
network segment as long as the signal strength at each jack, including the last one in the
segment, abides by the signal strength requirements of HD delivery on plasma/LCD TVs (-10 to
0 db North American measure OR 72-75 db European measure).
ii) Coax television delivery to residential units must be designed as follows:
Jacks within one occupancy unit may be tapped off the same network segment.
Each saleable unit must have a completely separate coax segment back to the MATV
head end in order that each residential owner be able to order their own cable/satellite TV
services and/or mix of channels.
iii) The non-guestroom cabling must be on a physically separate network segment from the
guestrooms network.
iv) Horizontal cabling shall be RG 6/U specified to 1 Ghz bandwidth using cable size/type/specification
appropriate to distance and environment required for the installation, outdoor, plenum, etc.
MEP 3 / 10
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS S
f) Horizontal Cabling - Guestrooms
i) At each television in the guestroom, the following shall be provided:
1 GHz coaxial cable to support the MATV signal.
Category 6 cable to support PPV and future IP Televisions delivery (See Four Seasons
MEP Low Voltage Standards on voice & data cabling for specific requirements for CAT 6
installations)
ii) A combined faceplate can be used for both the coax jack and the Cat 6 jack.
g) Horizontal Cabling - Front of House and Back of House

i) At each television located in the front and back of house, the following shall be provided:
1 GHz coaxial cable to support the MATV signal.
Category 6 cable to support future IP TV requirements (See Electrical Low Voltage
Standards on voice & data cabling for specific requirements for CAT 6 installations)
5 SIGNAL OUTLET LOCATIONS
i) The following locations shall be provided television connections as described in the Horizontal
Cabling section of the standards described above. The quantity in each location will be project
specific:
All guest bedrooms, living rooms, offices / studies, bathrooms.
All public area bars and entertainment rooms. Located per Interior Designer requirements.
Secured storage room in Hotel Maintenance Area for testing and servicing of televisions.
Over TV repair workbench in maintenance area.
Employee dining room and employee lounge.
Ballroom, ballroom foyer and meeting rooms.
Audio-visual control room.
Staff training room.
Staff boardrooms.
Exercise rooms. Located at each Cardio Machine & at wall in weight area.
Beach and Pool Cabanas.
Retail Outlets.
Spa Waiting Rooms and locker rooms.
ii) Incoming televisions services in the meeting room facilities is fully coordinated with all other
audio, visual, power, voice and data requirements. Each service is located in consolidated niches
located in each room. See Section XXX for the quantity and location of audio-visual niches.
MEP 4 / 10
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS S
6 INCOMING SERVICES
a) General
i) The MATV system shall consist of underground incoming television services (cable TV) and/or
satellite based systems.
ii) This service is typically described as the Free To Guest signal, meaning the channels that
are available on all Hotel televisions. Some premium channels available in guest rooms have
restrictions and cannot be shown in public spaces (Example: HBO).
iii) The preferred service delivery methods are cable television or satellite television. An antenna-
based system should only be used where high quality cable TV and/or satellite cannot be
delivered. An antenna system may be used to supplement cable TV or satellite delivery (e.g.
local channels, high definition off air channels).
iv) Where signal source is UHF it must be converted to VHF before distribution.
v) Whichever systems are installed they must be compatible with all other MATV system equipment
including the pay-per-view system and all necessary interconnections provided.
b) Cable - Underground
i) A cable television service should be selected over satellite delivery only where:
High quality cable television with a wide variety of local and international channels is
available
Suppliers are experienced in the hotel market place
The cable television delivery is at a better cost to the project than satellite.
ii) The cable TV head end (demarcation point) should be located in the MATV head end room of
the hotel wherever possible. The MATV designer must determine from the cable TV provider
what their requirements are for:
Conduit sizes and quantities.
Who is responsible for installing conduit?
Cable specification of cabling from service provider demarcation point to head end room if
demarcation is not in head end room and project must provide the cabling.
Room size, power, air conditioning and any other infrastructure requirements of the
cable TV provider for their demarcation room especially where the demarcation must be
incorporated in the hotel buildings.
iii) If the demarcation point must be located at the perimeter of the property, the design must show
how the signal is delivered from the property perimeter and connected to the providers signal.
Responsibilities for the installation of conduit and cabling should be explained.
iv) Satellite or off air channels may be provided to supplement services from the cable television
provider. The MATV network designer must take that into consideration all equipment necessary
to interconnect these supplementary services.
MEP 5 / 10
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS S
c) Satellite
i) Television (TV) and movie signal systems from satellites with earth station reception dishes
should be used wherever excellent reception and coverage is available and a cable television
service with sufficient channels at acceptable quality and cost is not available.
ii) The consultant is responsible to design a system that includes all equipment and installation
requirements including but not limited to:
Satellite Dish(es)
Foundation Pads, holding down bolts, etc.
Additional roof waterproofing
Structural requirements
Cabling, conduit and power requirements.
iii) Space and infrastructure (pad, power, structural, etc.) should be allocated for an additional
satellite dish to be installed at a later date by the hotel to fulfill customer requests. This should
be provided even if all current free to guest television is provided by cable services.
Provide 4 coaxial backbone cables and 4 Category 6 cables to the provisional satellite dish
location to support future satellite dish platform foundation from the Television Systems
Head End Room. In addition, provisional power feeds are required for the same.
iv) Satellite dish specifications:
Corrosion resistant, suitable for climate installed (e.g. marine quality if near the ocean) and
for moderate industrial environments.
Variable alignment, receive-only, prime-focus, parabolic type.
Mounting configuration and finish: Integral type with epoxy-powder coating finish
Minimum coverage: Declination-corrected polar mount, for reception at project location of
transmissions, from any satellite in the area.
Operating Frequency: suitable to receive all channels from satellites available in the area.
Survival wind velocity: 160 Km/hr, minimum
Feed horn: Dual C and K (u) bands, dual-polarization type.
v) Antennas:
Steerable-satellite earth station antenna: Programmable motorized variable alignment
through entire satellite coverage range.
Fixed-satellite earth station antenna: manually align (azimuth-elevation mount)
Low-noise block converter C band: weatherproof, with integral protection from surge
voltages and input frequency of 3.7 to 4.2 GHz.
Low-noise block converter K (u) band: weatherproof, with integral protection from surge
voltages and input frequency range suitable for signals specified to be received.
vi) Antenna support structures:
Prefabricated, hot-dip galvanized steel units
MEP 6 / 10
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS S
Strength of structure and attachments: adequate to withstand 160 Km/hr winds while
supporting installed antennas.
vii) Satellite receiver specifications for steerable-satellite earth station antennas:
C and K (u) band ready.
Automatic, programmable antenna positioning control and receiver tuning for a minimum
of 40 channels, with manual override/fine tuning.
Intermediate frequency bandwidth individually adjustable per channel in increments from
17 to 36 Mhz.
Stereo audio reception
Manual and automatic programmable channel selection
Programmable timer for unattended system operation
Digital indication of antenna position, channel selection and signal strength
Baseband video and stereo audio signal outputs
Suitable for 483 mm (19) electronic equipment rack mounting.
viii) Satellite receiver specifications for fixed-satellite earth station antennas:
C and K (u) band ready.

Front panel channel selection control
Intermediate frequency bandwidth individually adjustable per channel in increments from
17 to 36 MHz.
Digital indication of signal strength
Baseband video and stereo audio signal outputs, plus a minimum of two outputs for use
with descramblers or decoders.
Suitable for 483 mm (19) electronic equipment rack mounting.
d) Antenna Systems
i) An antenna system shall only be provided wherever excellent reception and station selection
is guaranteed or where it is the only method for receiving certain channels (e.g. local, high
definition).
ii) Where an antenna is provided it shall be as unobtrusive as possible.
iii) Antenna specification:
Antennas shall be weatherproof single channel or broadband type, constructed of high-
strength anodized aluminum and rated to withstand a 160 Km/hr wind, minimum.
Directional, with double director array and anti ghost reflector system, offering a gain of 13
db or higher.
Dedicated antennas are to be provided for each of band III, VHF and UHF.
Provide adequate number to cover all local channels, without need to rotate antennas.
Provide weather-sealed connection for coaxial fitting to antennas.
MEP 7 / 10
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS S
iv) Where radio service is provided, a separate omni-directional antenna must be installed, with 2
db minimum gain.
7 MATV HEAD END AND NETWORK COMPONENTS
a) General
i) The MATV System Head End shall be located in the Main Systems Room. Adequate space,
power, ventilation and air conditioning shall be designed in coordination with the architect,
mechanical, electrical and plumbing consultants.
ii) The MATV Head End shall be capable of distributing the incoming televisions services from
whichever sources or combination of sources are selected: cable television, satellite or antenna.
Cabling and conduit from the source demarcation points is required.
iii) As noted above the Cable TV or Satellite providers terminal equipment will be located in the
Main Systems room wherever possible. Sufficient space must be allocated when this room is
designed for that equipment.
iv) Include the following where necessary to complete the end to end functioning system from
source (cable television, satellite or antenna) to TV set:
Modulators (must be agile modulators to enable hotel to change source for a given
channel)
Demodulators
Processors
Descramblers
Decoders
Converters
v) Preamplifiers should be coaxial-down-lead-broadband or single-channel type, inherently
protected against lightning and voltage surges and enclosed in weatherproof housings Use
antenna cable for power supply from external source.
vi) Head end equipment should include filters, processors, broadband and single channel amplifiers
combining networks, power supplies, and other equipment as require to provide specified
performance. House all units in standard 483 mm (19) electronic equipment racks. MATV
system contractor to provide all necessary racks to house their equipment.
vii) Signal power splitters and isolation taps must have metal-enclosed directional couplers with
brass connector parts. Where installed in signal circuits used to supply cable-powered amplifiers,
power throughput capacity shall exceed load by 25% minimum.
viii) Where required to isolate interference or to exclude certain channels from certain televisions
because of licensing or at the request of Four Seasons, provide necessary signal traps (packaged
filters tuned to interference frequencies).
ix) Provide fixed attenuators to balance signal levels.
x) Provide terminating resistors where necessary to terminate spare splitter ports or to provide
terminations at the end of coaxial runs that do not have TVs permanently installed. Units should
be rated 0.5 W and matched for coaxial impedance.
xi) All outlets shall be flush, female F-type with metallic parts of anodized brass, beryllium copper
or phosphor bronze.
MEP 8 / 10
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS S
Wall plates: match materials and finish of power outlets in the same space.
Attenuation: less than 0.1 dB
Voltage standing wave ratio: less than 1.1.5 to 1.
b) In Hotel Channels
i) The source and distribution of In Hotel channels shall be located at the MATV Head End.
ii) The number of In Hotel channels will depend on a number of variables and are explained in the
section on Channel Line Up below.
iii) DVD players shall provide the source of In Hotel channels. The DVD player is zone-free and
allows DVDs from around the world to play easily. This includes but is not limited to PAL, NTSC,
PAL SECAM. The DVD player should be High Definition Compatible (can play content on HD
TVs not that it is an HD DVD player). The DVD player must be able to read DVD+R and DVD-R,
as well as other standard DVD formats and Microsoft Windows video formats (MPEG 4, Quick
Time etc).
c) Channel Line Up
i) The MATV Head End shall be designed and constructed to support the required In Hotel channels
plus the incoming channels from the local and/or satellite provider.
ii) A chart is provided below that details the total number of channels typically provided at all
televisions in the hotel. The number and type of incoming channels available from the cable or
satellite provider shall meet the below minimum requirements.
Region City Hotels Resort Hotels
Americas, UK and Italy 5 In Hotel + 50 Incoming 5 In Hotel + 50 Incoming
+ 5 spare + 5 spare
Europe Other 5 In Hotel + 30 Incoming 5 In Hotel + 30 Incoming
+ 5 spare + 5 spare
Middle East & Asia Pacific 5 In Hotel + 30 Incoming 5 In Hotel + 15 Incoming
+ 5 spare + 5 spare
iii) These requirements are considered a minimum and shall be increased to provide at least as
many and preferably more channels than the local hotel market and competition.
iv) Regardless if the cable or satellite provider can deliver the above minimum incoming channel
requirements, the TV Head End shall be designed and installed to support the above.
v) The channel selection will typically include a combination of local language news channels,
international and finance news channels, business news, childrens programming, local sports,
international sports, and local / regional / national network programming.
vi) The incoming channels may consist of a series of digital and high definition channels. It will be
the responsibility of Four Seasons to ensure that the hotel broadcasts only those channels for
which it is legally and contractually allowed to present.
vii) Consultant to research and provide list of available television service options for the project for
MEP 9 / 10
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS S
review by Four Seasons Hotels to enable the detailed specification to include the necessary
equipment to support the desired mix of content. This is particularly important where content
is delivered by satellite and multiple dishes are required to provide access to the required
content.
viii) The installer must configure the MATV Head End to sequence the channel lineup as required by
Four Seasons. Typically, the following sequence is used:
In Hotel Channels
Incoming Channels (Local, News, Sports, Specialty)
Spare Channels
ix) As noted in the beginning of this document, no entity except the Four Seasons hotel management
team acting for the owner shall sign any contracts for delivery of television services.
8 TELEVISION SETS AND RELATED EQUIPMENT
i) The MATV system consultant and contractor shall not be responsible for the selection of
television sets, DVD players, stereos, or other equipment or the pay per view system for the
hotel unless specifically contracted to do so by ownership. If so contracted, Four Seasons will
provide specifications and approved manufacturers/suppliers of equipment and systems for
incorporation in specifications by the consultant or contractor. No end user equipment shall be
specified by the consultant or procured by the contractor without prior approval by Four Seasons
Hotels and Resorts.
9 IP TELEVISION
i) In anticipation of the industry move to digital delivery of television signals and the increasing
demand by customers for high definition TVs, provision should be made for later installation of
IP television signal delivery over CAT 6 cabling. Consequently, CAT 6 cables should be run from
the nearest Telecommunications closet to each TV location in the project in addition to the MATV
coax cable.
ii) If the owner and consultant recommend installation of an IP TV service for the opening of the
project, the MATV coax cabling will not be required but the consultant must design for and the
contractor must provide, the active network equipment for IP television service.
iii) The requirements for an IP Television head end will be specified on a project-by-project
basis. Allow for two (2) 483 mm (19) racks in the Computer room or MATV head end room to
accommodate the necessary network equipment for the IP Television delivery.
MEP 10 / 10
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
T AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS
1 Introduction ........................................................................................... 1
a) Organization of Standards
i) Systems + Equipment Requirements
ii) AV Considerations by Property Area / Location
iii) Digital Signage
iv) Installation, Training + Maintenance
v) Index Tables
b) Coordination + Reference
2 General Requirements ................................................................... 2
Introduction
3 Systems + Equipment Requirements ..............................
3
Central AV Control Room

3
a) Operational Requirements
b) Technical Requirements
i) Digital Signal Processor
ii) Audio Amplifier
iii) Video Switcher
iv) Video Scaler
v) Control Processor
vi) Hearing Assistance
vii) Equipment Rack
Audio
5
a) Standard Background Music System
b) Enhanced Background Music System
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
c) Under Water Music Speaker System
d) Wireless Exercise Audio System
Video
6 Systems + Equipment Requirements .............................
8
a) Projector + Lift - Motorized / Recessed
b) Projector - Built In Exposed
c) Projector - Portable
d) Plasma / LCD Televisions / Displays
e) Projector Screen - Motorized / Recessed
f) Projector Screen - Built In Exposed
g) Projector Screen - Portable
h) Orientation Unit
Local Built-In Sources

11
b) DVD Player
c) Combined CD / MP3 Player
d) VCR
e) Wired Microphones
f) Wireless Microphones
g) MP3 Player + Docking Station
Control
12
a) Wireless Touch Screen
b) Touch Screen Interface
c) Portable Wired Touch Screen
d) Volume Source Controls
e) Manual Switching
Connectivity - Niche Components

15
a) Control (Jack Only) - Audio Visual
b) Control (Jack Only) - Lighting
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
c) Audio - Line Inputs
d) Audio - Line Outputs
e) Audio - Microphone Inputs
f) Video - Component Input
g) Video - Component Output
h) Video - VGA Input (Laptop)
i) Video - VGA Input (Laptop)
j) Video - Composite Input
k) Video - Composite Output
l) Video - S Video Input
m) Video - S Video Output
n) Video - CATV / MATV
o) Power
p) Show Power
q) Portable Cable Management
r) Data + Voice
Miscellaneous
17
a) Video Conferencing
b) Interpretation
Portable
18
a) General
b) Microphones
c) Projectors
d) Loudspeakers
e) Audio Mixers
f) Lecterns
g) Presentation Systems
h) LCD or Plasma TVs
i) AV Carts
j) Intercom Hardware
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction
12 AV Considerations by Property Area ..............................
20
Audio Visual Control Room

13 AV Considerations ............................................................................
21
Meeting Spaces
21
a) Introduction
b) Ballrooms Over 680 m2 (7000 ft2)
c) Ballrooms 280m2 (3000 ft2) to 680 m2 (7000 ft2)
d) Ballroom Pre-Function
e) Meeting Rooms - All Sizes
f) Meeting Room Pre-Function
g) Boardrooms
h) Outdoor Function Area - Any Size
i) Outdoor Pre-Function Space
Food + Beverage Outlets

24
a) Introductions
b) Restaurant - All Day
c) Restaurant - Specialty
d) Lobby Tea Lounge
e) Lobby Bar
f) Bars
g) Pool Bar + Grill
h) Club Lounge (Executive Club Floor)
Public Areas
26
b) Outdoor Circulation
c) Lobby (Hotels + Resorts)
d) Lobby (Residential)
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
e) Lobby (Residence Clubs)
f) Washrooms
g) Porte Cochere
h) Corridors (Public Spaces)
i) Corridors (Guestrooms)
j) Elevator / Lift Vestibules
k) Elevators / Lifts
l) Sundries Shop / Retail
m) Third Party Retail
Back of House
17 AV Considerations ..........................................................................
28
b) Human Resources Training Room
c) Staff Cafeteria
d) Loading Dock / Media Access
e) Corridors (Back of House)
f) Service Elevators / Lifts + Vestibules (Back of House)
Recreation
29
b) Pool Deck + Pool
c) Fitness Centre
d) Yoga Room / Aerobics Room
e) Pool Cabanas
f) Kids for All Seasons
g) Teen Centre / Young Adults for all Seasons
Spa
31
b) Reception
c) Circulation / Corridors
d) Change Rooms + Lockers
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
e) Heat Experiences (Steam, Sauna, Plunge Pools etc)
f) Waiting Rooms
g) Relaxation Rooms
h) Treatment Rooms
i) Specialty Treatment Rooms
j) Outdoor Treatment Rooms
k) Consultation Office
l) Juice Bar
m) Indoor or Outdoor Pool at Spa
Miscellaneous Areas
32
21 Digital Signage .................................................................................... 33

a) Meeting in Progress
b) Event Signage + Control
22 Training, Installation + Maintenance ................................. 33
Index Tables
23 AV Systems: Quantity, Type + Location .........................
34
Table 1: Systems + Equipment Requirements by

Property Area / Location
Table 2: AV Niche Requirements at Meeting Space

F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
1 INTRODUCTION
a) Organization of Standards
The Audio Visual (AV) Design Standards for Four Seasons Hotel & Resorts are organized into categories.
i) System and Equipment Requirements (Sections 3 to 11)

Details the systems, components, and equipment operational and performance
requirements
AV Considerations by Property Area / Location (Section 12 to 20)
Describes the purpose and function of each area/room of a Four Seasons hotel or resort
as it relates to AV systems.
iii) Digital Signage (Section 21)
Details the digital signage requirements for meeting space.
iv) Installation, Training and Maintenance (Section 22)
Details Four Seasons standard installation, training and maintenance requirements.
v) Index Tables (Section 23)
Combines and identifies through index charts Four Seasons system and equipment
requirements by area including the quantity, type and location of AV niches by Hotel Area.
b) Coordination and References

i) The following sections of the standards should be referenced, as the AV installations must be
fully coordinated with the interior design and with other technologies such as voice/data and the
fire alarm system:
Architectural sections of the Design Standards for Meeting Space, Food & Beverage, Spa,
Offices, Lobby and Reception etc.
MEP Section R for Structured Cabling - Voice and Data
Four Seasons Design Details for Meeting space.
MEP Section N for Fire Alarm System and annunciation.
Guestroom Audio Visual Systems and Equipment Standards are not addressed here. Please see the
MEP Structured Cabling Voice and Data and MEP MATV Design Standards for cabling for the guest
rooms. All guest room AV equipment requirements will be determined on a project-by-project basis
with the Interior designer, AV consultant and Four Seasons.
MEP 1 / 36
2007 AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
The following must be considered and included in the design of Audio Visual Systems for a Four Seasons
Hotel or Resort:
i) All equipment must be:

Highly reliable and durable with a high level of video and sound performance.
Recognized as brand leaders for the functions for which they are proposed.
Provided from the original equipment manufacturer with applicable warranties.
The current production model and not discontinued or recalled by the manufacturer.
The system design must be state of the art with up to date technology and follow industry best practices
taking into consideration industry trends.
The design must adhere to Four Seasons operational requirements.
The system installed should be user friendly, especially where operated by Hotel staff or guests.
Audio Visual equipment shall be supplied and installed only by manufacturer-authorized dealers through
legal supply channels. Likewise, all equipment must be locally serviced and supported.
The system is designed in coordination with all other applicable consultants including but not limited to:
Interior Designer,
Architect,
Electrical,
Low Voltage (voice, data & TV),
Restaurant,
Telecommunications.
vii) The following are examples of coordination with other disciplines that must take place:
AV Niche content requires coordination with Electrical contractor, structured cabling
contractor for Power, Voice, Data, TV, Lighting and dimming.
AV niche and Jack Locations & Elevations require coordination with Interior Designer and
Architect.
AV control rooms require coordination with Mechanical / Electrical Contractor Heat / Power
Load / Reliability
Projectors, screens, speakers require coordination with Interior Designer Reflected Ceiling
Plans
AV control system managing/controlling lighting/dimming control system
MEP 2 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
AV control system audio override by the fire alarm system
viii) The AV Consultant/Contractor shall prepare detailed design/installation drawings and submit
to Electrical Consultant for coordination. The submission shall include all documentation as
required to identify full system design intent, system components, and power requirements as
specified.
ix) The Electrical scope of work shall include the provisions of the power and telecommunications
system components, the provisions of required conduits, boxes, etc., to ensure a full operational
AV system to the Standards and to specified requirements.
INTRODUCTION
3
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
i) The System and Equipment Requirements Sections 3 to 11 detail the operational and technical
requirements of the system, equipment and related components.
ii) These sections do not identify what areas require this equipment. The Index tables in Section
23 provide this information.
iii) Eight categories are used to identify systems and equipment requirements:
Central AV Control Room Systems and Equipment
Audio
Video
Local Built-in Systems & Equipment
Control
Connectivity
Miscellaneous
Portable Equipment
CENTRAL AV CONTROL ROOM

4
i) The primary purpose of the Central AV Control Room is to offer a central location where AV
professionals can operate and manage the Meeting Room facilities through the connectivity
and controls that exist in each space. For example, each meeting room should have audio and
video outputs that are brought back to the main AV room, so that content can be redistributed,
live, to other rooms.
ii) The Central AV Control Room will house all processing and amplification equipment related
to the AV systems for the Meeting Room facilities, as well as the head end equipment for the
Background Music System (BGM) and Enhanced Background Music System (EBGM).
MEP 3 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
iii) The general equipment will consist of digital signal processors, mixers, switchers, amplifiers,
control processors, and other related equipment that does not require immediate access by
unauthorized Hotel staff or guests.
b) Technical Requirements
i) Digital Signal Processor (DSP)
All audio processing, including microphone pre-amplification, audio dynamics, routing/
combining and loudspeaker equalization will be accomplished via a dedicated DSP
system.
In addition to signal management, various connections to other systems through DSP
control ports are made so that external control can occur as required. For example, such a
connection to the emergency EVAC system would be used to shut down the BGM/EBGM
system in the event of fire.
The DSP system shall be sized to accommodate all inputs and outputs, with a minimum of
four spare inputs and outputs for future use. The DSP system shall have ample processing
power to accommodate the various functional requirements of the sound system.
The DSP system shall be programmable with open architecture (non-fixed flow) software.
This allows full flexibility to accommodate the specific needs of the hotel/resort.
To provide preset capability, a small control device with programmable soft keys and an
LCD screen shall be mounted to a panel in the equipment rack. The panel will permit a user
to initiate system presets without having to use a computer. In addition, a utility screen will
permit an operator to mute various loudspeaker systems.
Audio Amplifier
Professional audio quality power amplifiers are required to feed the various loudspeaker
systems. The amplifiers shall be sized at 1.5 times the calculated loudspeaker load
(including loss through loudspeaker wire and transformers).
Amplifiers shall include current limit protection, thermal limit protection and DC-fault load
protection.
Amplifiers used for constant-voltage applications (70V and/or 100V) shall have internal
transformers. External 70V/100V transformers are not acceptable.
iii) Video Switcher
Video switchers are required to route video input signals to appropriate video displays/
projectors. Each video signal type (composite video, S-Video, component video, RGBHV,
etc) requires a separate and independent switcher.
Switchers shall be sized to accommodate all inputs and outputs, with a minimum of four
spare inputs and outputs for future use.
Switchers shall have control ports to allow an external control system to control switching
functions. In addition, a local front panel is required for manual override.
Bandwidth of the switchers must be at least two times the bandwidth of the original video
signal, and no more than 0.25 dB of loss is allowed within the bandwidth range.
Seamless switching is required, so that transitions between synchronous video sources
occur smoothly.
MEP 4 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
iv) Video Scaler
In certain cases, scalers are required to convert video signals from one format to another.
For example, a standard definition composite video signal may need to be converted to
RGBHV or computer-video signals.
Scaler output must be compatible with the video displays native resolution.
Scalers shall have picture controls for brightness, contrast, color, tint, detail, and horizontal
and vertical positioning and sizing
Scalers shall have control ports to allow an external control system to control scaling
functions.
In addition, a local front panel is required for manual override.
v) Control Processor
All AV control is done through a master control system processor. All other control
devices, such as touch panels, are considered slave devices and communicate with other
AV components through the master processor using a common bus with bi-directional
communication.
The master processor must be sized with appropriate ports (RS232, contact closure, IP,
etc) to control all AV components.
A minimum of 4MB of flash onboard memory is required. In addition, the processor shall
have expandable memory ports for external memory devices.
vi) Hearing Assistance
Provide a hearing assistance system in each facility, as required by local building code and
Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). System design must adhere to AHJ and building code
requirements.
vii) Equipment Rack
Standard EIA RS-310-C equipment racks are required to house the various AV components.
The racks must be of professional quality, all steel welded construction, baked enamel
finish with front and rear equipment-mounting rails.
Racks shall be sized to accommodate all equipment, with a minimum of 25% open space
for future equipment.
Racks must be properly ventilated, and fans should be provided if necessary to maintain
acceptable temperature within the rack.
AUDIO
5
a) Standard Background Music System

Operational Requirements
i) A minimum of four sources is required and all are located in the Central AV Control Room. These
sources are routed to the various loudspeaker zones through the DSP (described above).
MEP 5 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
ii) Wherever BGM is provided, separate zoning is provided to divide functional spaces. For each
zone, separate volume and source control is also required.
iii) Zones that are in reasonable proximity to one another within the same acoustic space share the
same source.
iv) The BGM is centrally controlled with local override. Exceptions are allowed where the property
is spread out and separated local systems are more affordable. For example: The Spa at a
resort can have a centralized system that manages locally in the Spa building and is separate
from the main building.
v) The BGM is not the fire alarm annunciation system. The annunciation system and speakers are
separate and designed and located in coordination with local code.
vi) The BGM is interfaced to the fire alarm annunciation system and will be muted during alarms
and announcements (see DSP described above).
vii) Indoor BGM speakers are ceiling mounted and located or programmed to provide even sound
distribution.
viii) Ambient noise sensing microphones should be provided in wall or ceiling to enable dynamic
adjustment of the background music without operator intervention where this is practical.
ix) Where the BGM is provided outdoors, the ID and/or Landscape Architect responsible for the
design is consulted for speaker locations and aesthetic considerations.
x) Where the BGM is amplified through underwater speakers, the source should be the same at
what is played on the surrounding pool deck areas.
xi) Wireless loudspeakers are not acceptable.
Technical Requirements
xi) Music Sources
Music source receivers shall have balanced audio line level signals to connect to the DSP
system (described above). For receivers that do not have balanced outputs, unbalanced-
to-balanced audio transformers must be provided.
Receivers shall be mounted within the equipment rack in the Central AV Control Room.
xii) Indoor Loudspeakers
All indoor loudspeakers must be flush-mounted into the ceiling. Loudspeakers shall be
complete with back can, constant-voltage transformer with multiple taps, and discrete,
unobtrusive grill cover.
Loudspeakers shall be distributed within a space to provide even coverage, with +/-5dB of
variance within the area of coverage.
Nominal BGM levels shall be 75 dBA, with 10dB of dynamic headroom. Nominal frequency
response shall be 80Hz to 12kHz.
xiii) Outdoor Loudspeakers
All outdoor loudspeakers shall be surface-mounted to a wall or soffit, as coordinated with
the Architect. Loudspeakers, including enclosure, transducers and mounting hardware,
must be weather resistant to avoid corrosion.
MEP 6 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
Loudspeakers shall be distributed to provide even coverage, with +/- 8dB of variance
within the area of coverage. In addition, loudspeakers shall be selected and located so as
to minimize intrusion to areas outside of the property line.
b) Enhanced Background Music System (EBGM)

i) All requirements of the Standard Background Music System described above apply to the
enhanced system.
ii) Enhanced background music is achieved through improved speakers and is required in areas
of the Hotel or Resort where music is a central part of the experience rather than an accent, for
example, a restaurant or bar.
iii) Enhanced background music is designed to offer better sound quality and blend and adapt with
the acoustics of the space.
iv) Loudspeakers
All loudspeakers for the enhanced system shall be of 2-way design, which consists of a
separate tweeter and woofer. This may be accomplished using a coaxial driver or separate
tweeter/woofer within the same enclosure. One-way full range transducers are not
acceptable.
Loudspeakers shall be distributed within a space to provide even coverage, with +/-3dB of
variance within the area of coverage.
Nominal BGM levels shall be 85 dBA, with 10dB of dynamic headroom. Nominal frequency
response shall be 50Hz to 18kHz.
c) Under Water Speaker System

i) The Underwater Speaker System should share the same source as the pool deck or the BGM
source where it is located.
For permanent in-way installation in a pool, the underwater loudspeaker must be mounted in a metal
forming shell, the front of which is enclosed by a captive metal screen that is bonded to and
secured to the forming shell that ensures a low-resistance contact. This is a legal requirement.
Plastic niches and grilles are not acceptable.
In addition, the underwater loudspeaker must be powered by an amplifier having a grounded power
cord, UL Commercial Sound label, Class 2 wiring label, and transformer isolated Speaker Output
not exceeding UW30 speakers 30 watt 8 ohm rating (15.49 volts rms).
d) Wireless Exercise Audio System

i) Typically deployed at the Fitness Centre, the wireless exercise audio system allows for the
wireless distribution of TV audio signals to wireless headsets.
MEP 7 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
ii) The guest is able to roam the fitness center using wireless receivers and headsets. The receiver
allows the guest to select any audio signal of any TV channel available on the equipment.
iii) The transmitter takes a TVs audio signal and transmits it on an approved frequency, as directed
by local codes and AHJ.
iv) The transmitter shall be mounted in a concealed location, but providing sufficient signal strength
making the headset/receiver devices work inside the room.
v) Receivers must be tunable to any of the frequencies being used by the wireless exercise audio
transmitter. Receivers shall be manufactured of durable ABS plastic.
vi) The headsets shall be complete with replaceable ear cushions for hygienic purposes.
VIDEO
6
a) Projector and Lift - Motorized / Recessed

i) When not in use, projectors & lifts are fully concealed from the guests view. This is achieved
through motorized lifts, motorized access panels, or however the projector is mounted. When
not in use, the lift is raised and recessed in the ceiling with a cover that is finished to match the
existing ceiling.
ii) The motorized projector lift must be near silent when ascending or descending. It should not
disturb the guest or presentations in progress.
iii) The location of the projector and lift is to be coordinated with the appropriate consultants.
iv) The source of the projector and screen is controlled through the touch screen and manual
controls located in Control Niches.
v) Where possible, the use of scissor lifts is avoided because they are unsightly.
vi) The projector is connected to the central AV system and allows multiple sources to display
content. The number, type and location of source inputs are identified in the tables in Section
23 of this document..
vii) Projector
Projector shall have appropriate inputs to accommodate the various video signals being
used with the facility, unless a separate scaler (described above) is used to convert video
signals to the projectors native resolution.
Native resolution of the projector shall conform to current standards. At the time of this
writing, current standard is XGA (1024 x 768) resolution.
The lumen output of the projector is determined by the size of the projection screen viewing
area. For example, large ballrooms will require projectors of high output (>5000 ANSI
lumens), where small meeting rooms require less output (approx. 2500 ANSI lumens).
Projectors shall have control ports to allow an external control system to control projector
functions. In addition, a wireless IR remote is required for manual override.
MEP 8 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
vii) Lift
The projector lift shall be sized to accommodate the projector size.
The lift shall allow enough travel to bring the projector from rest height to operation height,
and further to maintenance height, which is typically four (4) feet above the floor.
The lift shall have a well-designed cable management system to discretely hide cable.
The lift shall have a control port to allow an external control system to control lift travel.
Programmable STOP settings are required to set operation and maintenance heights.
b) Projector - Built In Exposed

i) This type of installation is only acceptable in the back of house.
ii) The projector is connected to an RGB or Component connection at the floor or desk that allows
multiple sources to display content.
iii) Projector requirements are same as above.
iv) Proper ventilation must be carefully considered during design of the projector housing. Provide
appropriate space and air movement as determined by the projector manufacturer.
c) Projector - Portable
i) Please see section on Portable Equipment.
d) Plasma / LCD Televisions / Displays

i) Installed in boardrooms and small meetings room only.
ii) To determine size, the following calculation is used: The height of the screen is no less than four
times the distance from the furthest viewer.
iii) The source of the content is controlled through the in room AV touch screen control unit.
iv) The television is connected to the central AV system and allows multiple sources to display
content including sources from within the room, e.g. laptops. The number, type and location of
source inputs are identified in the tables located in Section 23 of this document..
v) The TV has built-in speakers.
vi) Television shall have appropriate inputs to accommodate the various video signals being used
with the facility, unless a separate scaler (described above) is used to convert video signals
to the televisions native resolution. In addition, the television shall have expandable ports for
future inputs.
vii) Native resolution of the television shall conform to current standards. At the time of this writing,
current standard is XGA (1024 x 768) resolution.
MEP 9 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
viii) Television shall have control ports to allow an external control system to control television
functions. In addition, a wireless IR remote is required for manual override.
e) Projection Screen - Motorized / Recessed

i) When not in use, the screen is fully concealed from the guests view, recessed in the ceiling with
a cover that is finished to match the existing ceiling.
ii) The location of the screen is to be coordinated with the appropriate consultants.
iii) The screen is controlled through the touch screen and manual controls located in Control
Niches.
iv) The projection screen system shall be complete as two pieces case and screen assembly.
v) The case may be mounted within a recessed ceiling space or flush-mounted at the ceiling.
vi) Housing is symmetrical to allow for left or right-hand motor location and for viewing surface to
unroll from the back or front of the roller.
vii) The screen assembly includes the screen, roller, motor and brackets to mount the assembly
within the case. Screen viewing surface is matte white with black backing to avoid projected
image passing through the screen. Screen shall include tab tensioning for even lateral tension
and flat surface.
f) Projection Screen - Built In Exposed

i) This type of installation is only acceptable in the back of house.
ii) A wall-mounted switch near the entrance to the room controls the screen.
iii) The projection screen system shall be complete as two pieces case and screen assembly.
iv) The screen assembly includes the screen, roller, motor and brackets to mount the assembly
within the case. Screen viewing surface is matte white with black backing to avoid projected
image passing through the screen. Screen shall include tab tensioning for even lateral tension
and flat surface.
g) Projection Screen - Portable

h) Orientation Unit
i) See Architectural Design Standards for Orientation Unit Requirements.
ii) Where space restrictions exist, the orientation unit may hold within it Plasma / LCD screens.
Location, layout and requirements should be coordinated with the Interior Design consultant.
MEP 10 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
LOCAL BUILT-IN SOURCES
7
i) Local sources are additional sources from those provided at the Central AV Control Room.
ii) Local sources are located inside the room where they can be easily accessible but concealed
from the guests view.
iii) Local sources should be easy to use and residential / non-industrial in nature.
iv) Where the room is divisible, the local source equipment shall be provided in each segment.
b) DVD Player
i) To provide the ability to play DVDs without having the need to access the central AV control
room.
ii) The DVD player should be connected to the rooms speaker and audio system.
iii) The DVD player is zone-free and allows DVDs from around the world to play easily in a variety
of formats. This includes but is not limited to PAL, NTSC, PAL SECAM.
iv) The DVD player should be High Definition Television Compatible, meaning the DVD player
can play standard DVDs on High Definition Televisions, not that the DVD player can play HD
recorded content.
v) The DVD player must be able to read DVD+R and DVD-R, as well as other standard DVD
formats.
vi) Control of the DVD player is done through the front panel or the manufacturer-supplied IR
remote.
c) Combined CD / MP3 Player

i) To provide the ability to play CDs or MP3 content without the need to access the central AV
control room.
ii) The combined player can play CDs and has an audio line-in connection located on the front of
the device for easy access.
iii) It is not necessary that the CD player and MP3 player be one device, rather, that the user has
the ability to select either a CD source or MP3 source.
iv) The CD/MP3 player must be able to read CD-R/RW formats.
v) The CD/MP3 player should have balanced audio outputs. For players that do not have balanced
outputs, unbalanced-to-balanced audio transformers must be provided.
vi) Control of the CD/MP3 player is done through the front panel or the manufacturer-supplied IR
remote.
MEP 11 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
d) VCR
i) To provide the ability to play VHS Video Cassettes content without the need to access the
central AV control room.
ii) Recording functionality is not required and the only purpose of the equipment should be to play
pre-recorded cassettes.
iii) The VCR must be able to read standard VHS cassettes.
iv) Control of the VCR is done through the front panel or the manufacturer-supplied IR remote.
e) Wired Microphones
f) Wireless Microphones
g) MP3 Player and Docking Station

i) To provide portable music content with noise canceling headphones.
ii) Speakers are not required as the purpose of the docking station is to provide a charge and stand
to display the device.
iii) Typically utilized at the Spa relaxation rooms
iv) MP3 player shall have a minimum of 4GB of internal memory.
v) Control of the MP3 player is done on the front panel of the player.
CONTROL
8
a) Wireless Touch Screen

i) To provide easy to use control of multiple systems through a unified device.
ii) The touch screen is programmed to control the following:
Dimming control that allows for adjustment of different dimming levels.
Projection screen and projector controls lower and raise the drop down projection screen
and projector.
Background music control that allows for the adjustment of volume and source selection
MEP 12 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
Various password protected interfaces to other systems such as microphones, central
sources, etc.
Drapery window control that controls the opening and closing of various drapes.
iii) The touch screen should be large and easily viewable by the user.
iv) The touch screen should be locked in a docking station when not in use and released and
turned on by a protected password. Separate manual switches will be provided for basic controls
(dimming, projection) in the event the touch screen system fails.
v) The touch screen should normally be concealed from guests view in the Control Niche.
vi) The touch screen shall have an active matrix color LCD with a resistive membrane overlay.
vii) Internal microprocessor and memory (minimum 8MB with plug-in capability for additional
memory) shall allow the touch screen to operate without excessive processing burden to the
master control processor.
viii) The touch screen shall have two-way communication with the master control processor, so that
the processor can give active feedback to the touch screen indicating that a requested process/
subroutine (such as play DVD) is occurring. One-way communication is not acceptable.
ix) Wireless transmission shall not interrupt other wireless devices, such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth.
Programing Requirements
x) All touch screens consist of various graphical displays that will vary depending on the room or
area it is used for.
xi) Varying levels of access are required depending on the user. Accordingly, the interface will need
to be configured by room with different privileges.
xii) Touch screen programming must be done in consultation with the AV consultant and Four Seasons
hotel management to ensure that the format and functionality meets the hotel requirements and
is easy to use.
b) Portable Wired Touch Screen

i) All wireless touch screen requirements are applicable for the wired device. The exception being
that the wired touch panel will have a retractable cord that limits the movement of the device to
the distance of the cord.
ii) The wired touch screen is used only in smaller spaces where the cost of a wireless touch screen
is not justifiable.
iii) All wireless touch screen requirements are applicable for the wired device.
c) Fixed Wired Touch Screen

i) All wireless touch screen requirements are applicable for the wired device. The exception being
that the fixed touch panel is fixed to the wall and not removable.
MEP 13 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
ii) The fixed touch screen is used only in very small spaces and limited control of AV settings are
required..
iii) All wireless touch screen requirements are applicable for the fixed device.
d) Volume Source Controls

i) Dedicated volume source controls (as opposed to such controls on touch screens) are used
when no other systems need to be interfaced and the space is not multi-function. Volume source
controls should not be used if other systems such as lighting need to be controlled.
ii) The control panel should be concealed from guests view and located in a back of house space
that is adjacent to the space it controls.
iii) The volume/source control panel consists either a set of pushbuttons or an LCD with navigation
wheel.
iv) Where pushbuttons are used, the buttons must be clearly engraved with appropriate detail.
v) Stick-on labels are not acceptable. Each button must have an LED providing feedback regarding
operation.
vi) Where an LCD with navigation wheel is used, the LCD shall be large enough to be readable
at normal height. The navigation wheel shall be used to scroll between sources, as well as to
adjust volume. Additional function buttons are used to select values.
vii) All control panels are individually addressable by the master control processor over the control
systems bus.
e) Manual Switching
i) To provide manual override to switch lights, control projector lifts and screens, and adjust
volume.
ii) The switches should be easy to use and intuitive. Switches are used because touch screen
training access cannot be provided to all staff and guests and to act as a backup in the event
the control system fails.
iii) For lighting, buttons with pre-set lighting levels should be provided such as 33%, 66%, 100% and
off. Dedicated lighting switches and required functionality are typically designed in consultation
with the lighting consultant.
iv) The switches are concealed from guests view and should be located in the Control Niche or in
adjacent back of house spaces.
v) Switch requirements are dependent on the manufacturers specifications. In general, all switches
shall be professionally constructed and durable, supplied from the same manufacturer as the
controlled product. Custom home-built switches are not acceptable.
vi) Where the switch faceplates are visible they should be of the same manufacturer and design as
MEP
the other electrical and low voltage plates in the same space.
14 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
CONNECTIVITY - NICHE COMPONENTS
9
a) Control (Jack Only) - Audio Visual

i) A control jack is provided where a portable touch screen can be plugged in and various aspects
of the AV system can be accessed and controlled.
ii) The plug is compatible with the AV system control touch screen that is specified for the facility.
b) Control (Jack Only) - Lighting

i) A jack is provided where a portable lighting control panel can be plugged in to program or adjust
aspects of the lighting / dimming system.
ii) The plug is compatible with the lighting system control panel that is specified for the facility.
c) Audio - Line Inputs

i) Standard audio line inputs are provided allowing the user to plug in any device that has an audio
output.
ii) Four inputs are typically provided and located on the same plate as the line output.
iii) For balanced inputs, TRS (tip-ring-sleeve) jacks shall be used. For unbalanced inputs, RCA
jacks shall be used.
d) Audio - Line Outputs

i) Standard audio line inputs are provided allowing the user to plug in any device that will accept
the signal.
ii) Four outputs are typically provided and located on the same plate as the line input.
iii) All line outputs from the DSP shall be balanced and are terminated with 3-pin XLR male jacks.
e) Audio - Microphone Inputs

i) Standard microphone jack outlets are provided allowing the user to plug in microphones.
ii) Four jacks (quad-plex) are typically provided and located on the same plate.
iii) All microphone inputs shall use 3-pin XLR female jacks.
f) Video - Component Input

i) Component video input connectors Y/Pb/Pr, RCA format to match typical consumer equipment,
are required for video input allowing the user to plug in any device that has the similar output.
ii) Both the Component input and output plugs are located on the same plate.
MEP 15 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
g) Video - Component Output
i) Component video output connectors Y/Pb/Pr, RCA format to match typical consumer equipment,
are required for video output allowing the user to plug in any device that will accept the signal.
ii) Both the Component input and output plugs are located on the same plate.
h) Video - VGA Input (Laptop)

i) A standard VGA connector consisting of a 15-pin HD female connector shall be installed for
video input allowing the user to plug in any device that has the similar output. Typically this is
a laptop. If the distance from the connector to the central AV control room switcher is over 200
feet, an amplifier should be used to compensate for line loss.
ii) Both the VGA input and output plugs are located on the same plate.
i) Video - VGA Output (Laptop)

i) A standard VGA connector consisting of a 15-pin HD female connector shall be installed for
video output allowing the user to plug in any device that will accept the signal. If the distance
from the connector to the central AV control room switcher is over 200 feet, an amplifier should
be used to compensate for line loss.
ii) Both the VGA input and output plugs are located on the same plate.
j) Video - Composite Input

i) A standard composite video connector, RCA format to match typical consumer equipment
(typically yellow), is required for video input allowing the user to plug in any device that has the
similar output.
ii) Both the Composite input and output plugs are located on the same plate.
k) Video - Composite Output

i) A standard composite video connector, RCA format to match typical consumer equipment
(typically yellow), is required for video output allowing the user to plug in any device that can
accept the signal.
ii) Both the Composite input and output plugs are located on the same plate.
l) Video - S Video Input

i) A standard S-Video plug, 4-pin mini-DIN jack to match typical consumer equipment, is required
for video input allowing the user to plug in any device that has the similar output.
ii) Both the S Video input and output plugs are located on the same plate.
m) Video - S Video Output

i) A standard S-Video plug, 4-pin mini-DIN jack to match typical consumer equipment, is required
for video output allowing the user to plug in any device that can accept the signal.
ii) Both the S Video input and output plugs are located on the same plate.
MEP 16 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
n) Video - CATV / MATV
i) These connections allow the user access to the MATV network. See TV Systems Standards for
details. Typically the signal received at the public spaces is a separate network segment from
that of the Guestrooms.
ii) The CATV/MATV signal must be High Definition ready.
iii) CATV/MATV connector shall be F connector to match typical consumer equipment.
o) Power
i) Standard power plugs are required at various other locations and inside niches. In conjunction
with Voice Data Standards, see the tables provided in Section 23 for a listing of these
requirements.
p) Show Power
i) For stage applications, a minimum 200A three-phase company switch is required for portable
systems (lighting, rigging, sound, video). The company switch shall include cam connectors for
circuit A, circuit B, circuit C, neutral 1, neutral 2, and ground.
ii) The company switch should be located as close to the stage as possible. If required, cable
passes should be provided through walls.
iii) The local electrical authority having jurisdiction must approve all company switches.
q) Portable Cable Management

i) Cable passes should be provided to allow cable to pass without having to hold open doors or
obstruct exits. Cable passes should facilitate cable to go from the company switch to stage
location(s) to central AV control room.
ii) Typical cable pass through walls is 8 diameter. To minimize impact to interior design, the
cable pass may have doors that match wall finish. Acoustic requirements must be taken into
consideration when specifying portable cable management cable passes.
r) Data and Voice

i) Various quantities of fibre and copper are required at various locations and niches inside the
meeting spaces. In conjunction with Four Seasons MEP Standards Section R - Structured Cabling
- Voice Data, see Table 2 in Section 23 of this document for listing of these requirements.
MISCELLANEOUS
10
a) Video Conferencing
i) One small boardroom or meeting room in each hotel with significant meeting space and corporate
business will be outfitted with permanent video conferencing facilities for guest use.
ii) Business hotels with less than three meeting rooms may have a portable video conferencing
system specified for guest use. Each project will be evaluated individually.
MEP 17 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
iii) Resort properties do not need to provide such capability unless they do significant incentive/
meeting business. Portable equipment connected to the internet may be sufficient for such
properties. The AV consultant is to advise.
iv) Permanent video conferencing facilities will include dual plasma/LCD TVs on one wall with a
centre video camera, built-in microphones, and speakers for video conferencing capability over
and above the standard speakers for background music, if required by the space. An ISDN/BRI
connection will be provided in the room for connection of broadband video conferencing service.
If required by the project a permanent document camera shall be installed above the boardroom
table.
v) Portable equipment shall consist of a trolley containing a plasma/LCD TV with side speakers,
portable video conferencing camera and control system, and table microphones for connection
to the system. The system shall be capable of connecting to other video conferencing services
through the CAT 6 data Internet connections provided in any meeting room. ISDN connections
shall not be required. A portable document camera shall be provided if required by the project.
b) Interpretation
i) Where the market requires provision for simultaneous translation, infrastructure for infrared
simultaneous interpretation systems is to be incorporated within all function room areas.
Purchase of components should only be implemented on a modular basis based on the AV
consultant recommendations.
The installation is includes necessary conduit and cabling to allow for operation of individual (and/or
combined) rooms and essential system routing and control components throughout. Electrical outlets
are to be provided at high level for the installation of the infrared transmitter units on a temporary
basis, as required for events.
Individual simultaneous interpreter consoles or delegate control consoles are to be able to connect to
various AV panels within throughout the meeting space. This equipment shall include the connections
to the panels for reception by the translators of the meeting content, headsets for the translators,
microphones connected to a multi-channel broadcast/amplification system that participants can listen
to on wireless headsets by selecting the appropriate channel. The number of languages able to be
translated at any one time will be determined by project.
In some limited cases permanent translation facilities may be required. These shall be designed in
cooperation with the owner, architect, interior designer and Four Seasons Hotels.
PORTABLE
11
a) General
i) In order to maximize flexibility and availability of the AV facilities throughout the Hotel, the
ii) AV niches contain input/output connectors that permit use of a large variety of AV/Presentation/
effect lighting facilities. In order to minimize cost a common pool of portable AV equipment will be
MEP 18 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
kept at the property for use as needed. In projects where an outside AV contractor can provide
quality, daily on-site equipment and services to hotel clients, much of the portable equipment
may not be purchased. This needs to be evaluated on a project-by-project basis. Where such
contractors acceptable to Four Seasons do not exist the items below must be provided as part
of the AV installation.
iii) Appropriate cases will be provided to store the equipment safely until needed.
b) Microphones
i) Sufficient portable microphones and stands shall be provided based on recommendations by the
AV consultant taking into consideration the expected business mix and the size of the meeting
space. Vocal, boundary, table mounted, and musical instrument usage types will be provided.
Both wired and wireless microphones will be provided. Wireless microphones will connect to RF
receivers located in each ballroom section and large meeting room.
c) Projectors
i) Portable video projectors shall be provided for use in small meeting rooms. The projectors shall
have multiple connections including S-video, laptop XGA and MATV connections.
d) Loudspeakers
i) Portable loudspeakers and stands shall be provided where required for use by clients requiring
specific audio presentation such as live music. Loudspeaker types to be selected based on
project requirements but may be a mix of vocal, voice lift, lectern, sound reinforcement or
foldback (for performances).
e) Audio Mixers
i) A selection of audio mixers (24+ channel; 16+ channel; 8 channel; powered; stand alone; rack
mountable) shall be provided as required by the project.
f) Lecterns
i) A selection of lecterns for meeting space shall be provided (table mounted; stand alone; formal;
informal; powered with full control facilities).
g) Presentation Systems
i) A selection of presentation systems (Overhead Projectors; visualizer/document cameras; Laser
pointers; Copy boards; Digital slide presenters /compact flash readers; PC-TV scan converters)
shall be provided as required by the project and as recommended by the AV consultant.
h) LCD or Plasma TVs

i) At least two 40-42 LCD or plasma TVs shall be provided for portable use in meeting rooms.
MEP 19 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
i) AV Carts
i) A number of portable equipment racks (AV carts) with heavy-duty rubberized steel castors are
to be provided. The AV consultant on the specific project will determine the quantity and specific
mix of equipment for each. There are two sizes of carts:
ii) Type 1 (a larger cart) would be used, for example, to allow connection of a professional mixing
desk (with a variety of effects units) for a large entertainment event with the mixed line output
routed via the AV panel to the rooms ceiling or reinforcement loudspeakers. These type of carts
contain combinations of the following components:
One (dual channel, dual diversity) radio microphone system;
One carousel type multi compact disc player;
One DAT / MD player/recorder;
One 16 channel live style mixer;
One multiple audio effects unit;
Two sets cable microphones;
There should also be lockable storage drawers for various small pieces of equipment such
as microphones and leads.
iii) Type 2 (a smaller cart) contains pre-configured audio, video or other AV presentation equipment
that can be used for various types of events (e.g. conferences, simultaneous translation desks
etc,). Each rack contains the respective Audio (or other related) mixing system that may be
connected to any of the AV connection panels in order for the signal to be relayed through
the loudspeakers within that zone (or any other, as may be required). The racks are to be
equipped with cloth clips for attachment of decorative trims suitable for appropriate concealment
in function rooms.
iv) The purpose of the carts is to increase the versatility of any of the AV connection panels.
j) Intercom Hardware
i) A limited amount of portable intercom hardware is to be included within the system initially to
allow routing of cabled and wireless headsets with microphones to be connected via the AV
panels throughout the meeting space. For larger events, additional hardware may be purchased
as required.
INTRODUCTION
12
AV CONSIDERATIONS BY PROPERTY AREA / LOCATIONS
i) AV Considerations by Property Area are provided in Sections 12 to 20 and explain the purpose
of AV for the varies areas of the property.
ii) Guestrooms are not included in these sections. Guest room requirements are determined on a
project-by-project basis in coordination with the interior designer.
MEP 20 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
iii) This section does not identify the systems and equipment required in each space. Index tables
are provided in Section 23 of this document that will detail this information. The Index tables
must be read in conjunction with this section in order to gain a full understanding of what is
required at each property location.
iv) Locations and areas that require Audio Visual Systems are combined into the following
categories:
Audio Visual Control Room
Meeting Spaces
Food & Beverage Outlets
Public Areas & Circulation
Back of House
Recreation
Spa
Miscellaneous
AUDIOVISUAL CONTROL ROOM

13
AV CONSIDERATIONS
i) Provide an Audio/Visual control room (AV room) within the vicinity of the Ballroom and Meeting
room area.
ii) The room will house all AV central equipment as described in the Equipment and Systems
Resquirements - Section 4 of this document and should be sized appropriately. Coordination
with electrical, voice, data and TV requirements to and from this room is required.
MEETING SPACES
14
AV CONSIDERATIONS
a) Introduction
i) Meeting facilities at Four Seasons are diverse depending on the size, type and location of the
property.
ii) A list of room types are provided below including a brief statement noting the typical purpose
and function of the room as it relates to AV systems.
iii) The tables in Section 23 these standards identify the exact quantity and type of the equipment
needed at each space and the quantity, type and location of the AV niches required at these
spaces.
b) Ballrooms - Over 680 m2 (7000 ft2)

i) Contact Four Seasons for special requirements if the Ballroom is larger than 836 m2 (9000 ft2)
ii) The room is usually divisible in two and sometimes three or more partitions.
MEP 21 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
iii) All components of the AV system for the room shall be divisible when partitioned (e.g. separate
audio zones in each) and combined when used as a whole.
iv) In most cases there is no fixed stage. Hang points for lighting trusses and AV requirements are
installed to support the maximum flexibility in space use and meeting/dining orientation.
v) Additional empty conduit provisions adjacent to hang points coordinated to support loudspeaker
clusters and lighting instruments as well as miscellaneous drapery and decorative elements
shall be provided.
vi) When not divided, the room shall have two possible orientations assuming two possible locations
for a head table: one on the long axis of the room and the other on the shorter axis.
vii) Stage Power, projectors, screens, specialized niches, and other specific provisions shall be
provided wherever the orientations and coordinated head tables are located.
viii) Niches are provided at all perimeter walls. Floor boxes are placed strategically. See the tables
provided in Section 23 for a listing of these requirements.
ix) Digital signage is provided for each segment of the ballroom.
x) Interpretation facilities may be required depending on the geographic region and operational
intent for the Ballroom. Frequently, properties in the Middle East require interpretation facilities
and soundproof rooms necessary to implement interpretation services.
c) Ballrooms - 280 m2 (3000 ft2) to 680 m2 (7000 ft2)

i) Same as above except:
ii) Only one Orientation may be required if the room is square and the short and long axis of the
room are similar.
d) Ballroom Pre-Function
i) The room is often divisible in two or three partitions.
ii) All components of the AV system for the room shall be divisible when partitioned (e.g. separate
audio zones in each) and combined when used as a whole.
iii) Niches are provided at all perimeter walls to support registration and live performances such as
a jazz band. See the tables IN Section 23 of this document for detailed requirements.
iv) Digital signage is provided for each segment of the pre-function.
e) Meeting Rooms - All Sizes

i) Same as the Ballroom except:
Stage power and coordinated hang points are not required.
Only one Orientation is required if the room is square and the short and long axis of the
room are similar.
Niches are provided on front and back walls and on the side walls for larger rooms.
Floor boxes are placed strategically, typically only one or two in the centre of the room. See
the tables in Section 23 of thus document for detailed requirements.
MEP 22 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
i) For meeting rooms that can be divided, all components of the AV system for the room shall be
divisible when partitioned (e.g. separate audio zones in each) and combined when used as a
whole.
ii) Digital signage is provided for each segment of divisible meeting space.
f) Meeting Room Pre-Function

i) Where a meeting room is large enough to warrant a pre-function space, the same requirements
as the Ballroom pre-function space shall be provided.
ii) Where the meeting room pre-function is only a corridor off a public space, minimal requirements
to support registration tables and digital signage is required.
g) Boardrooms
i) Boardrooms are similar to meeting rooms except they are not multi-function and are set up with
fixed FF&E. Accordingly, the AV system, equipment and related niches are fewer in relation
given the specific nature and function of the room.
ii) Video Conferencing shall be provided in one boardroom located in the Propertys Function /
Meeting space area or in the business centre. Lighting, speaker and microphone locations shall
be designed in coordination with the requirements of the Video Conferencing system.
iii) Boardrooms or meeting rooms in the Business Centre are to be treated as separate zones for
AV purposes from the general circulation/guest use areas of the Business Centre.
iv) Digital signage is provided for boardrooms that are part of meeting space but may not be provided
for boardrooms in the business centre.
v) In Meeting Space Area of Property - Over 8 Persons
The typical set up is the same as for a small meeting room.
Drop down projectors and screens are installed as standard.
vi) In Meeting Space Area of Property - Under 8 Persons
Flat Screen LCD or Plasma televisions are an acceptable alternative to a drop down
projector and screen. The furthest viewer must have a clear view of the screen.
vii) At Business Centre - Over 8 Persons
Requirements are the same as Boardrooms in Function space area.
viii) At Business Centra - Under 8 Persons
Requirements are the same as Boardrooms in Function space area.

ix) At Executive Offices Over 8 Persons
Requirements are the same as Boardrooms over 6 persons if guests will use the room.
Otherwise treat as back of house space for AV purposes.
ix) At Executive Offices Under 8 Persons
Requirements are the same as Boardrooms under 6 persons if guests will use the room.
Otherwise treat as back of house space for AV purposes.
MEP 23 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
h) Outdoor Function Area - Any Size
i) Video connectivity is limited compared to indoor spaces. The primary requirements are for audio,
voice and data services.
ii) Location for the required local AV equipment shall be coordinated with the Architect and
Landscape architect and shall be accessible from and in close proximity to the Outdoor function
space. The AV rack should be locked in a cabinet that is accessible only by Property staff.
iii) Outdoor speakers shall be selected and located in coordination with the architect and landscape
architect.
i) Outdoor Pre-Function Space

i) Outdoor Pre-Function Spaces are frequently used for guest registration and shall be provided
the necessary voice and data connectivity.
ii) Video and audio connectivity is limited compared to indoor spaces.
FOOD AND BEVERAGE OUTLETS

15
AV CONSIDERATIONS
a) Introduction
i) The Four Seasons Hotels & Resorts Design Brief and Food and Beverage Concept documents
for the property will describe the outlets concept and any special operational criteria that may
impact AV systems.
ii) Each outlet requires an enhanced background music system.
iii) The background music system speakers at each outlet shall be zoned. The number of zones will
be determined by the size, shape and function of each space. For example, the buffet area of
the all day dinning should be considered a different zone than the adjacent seating area.
iv) Where the zones are divisible by a sound barrier (door, long corridor etc.), and the spaces could
be considered separate, separate volume and source controls are required.
v) Where the zones are not divisible by a sound barrier and sound transfer into other zones is a
possibility, separate volume control but playing the same source is required.
vi) All F&B outlets require the flexibility to allow the manager to play their own content. This is done
through an accessible CD player with an MP3 player input source.
b) Restaurant All Day:

i) This is the Hotel / Resorts casual dining experience open for breakfast lunch and dinner.
ii) For Resort properties or where the All Day Dining Restaurant is the only restaurant, the system
shall be capable of supporting a live act replacing the background music sources. This requires
that local inputs are located where it is likely a small band would perform.
c) Restaurant Specialty
i) This is the Hotel / Resort specialty dining experience typically open for dinner and sometimes
lunch.
MEP 24 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
ii) In Resort properties, the system shall be capable of supporting a live act replacing the background
music sources. This requires that local inputs are located where it is likely a small band would
perform. Four Seasons shall be consulted should this not be identified in the design.
iii) It is possible that the restaurant is used for meeting or catering functions. In cases such as this,
portable equipment will be provided to support any client requirements.
d) Lobby Tea Lounge

i) Where the Lobby Tea lounge is the only F&B outlet at the property acting as a casual bar and is
open late, the system shall be capable of supporting a live act replacing the background music
sources. This requires that local inputs are located where it is likely a small band would perform.
Four Seasons shall be consulted should this not be identified in the design.
ii) The Lobby Tea Lounge will often have a live pianist. It is assumed that the piano will self-amplify
and no supporting AV system or speakers are required.
e) Lobby Bar
i) Requirements are the same as Lobby Tea Lounge.
f) Bars
i) The main Hotel / Resort Bar AV system shall be capable of supporting a live act. This requires
that local inputs are located where it is likely a small band would perform. Four Seasons shall
be consulted should this not be identified in the design.
ii) The Bar shall have TV services available at the bar, whether or not televisions are provided. This
is done so that televisions can be installed where demand requires it (e.g. World Cup).
iii) The TV source does not need to be connected to the outlets AV systems. Where and when the
television source is used, the background music source shall be muted and portable equipment
will be used to show picture and audio.
iv) In some cases a secondary bar may be designed as a sports or games venue with integrated
TV as part of the design. Special AV requirements may be necessary and should be discussed
with Four Seasons before the design is finalized.
g) Pool Bar and Grill

i) The AV system for the Pool Bar & Grill shall be integrated and share the same source as the
background music for the pool deck.
ii) Outdoor speakers shall be selected and located in coordination with the architect and landscape
architect.
iii) The Hotel / Resort Bar AV system shall be capable to support a live act. This requires that
local inputs are located where it is likely a small band would perform. Four Seasons shall be
consulted should this not be identified in the design.
iv) If designed as such by the interior designer, the bar and restaurant components may be separate
and require two separate zones for volume control purposes.
MEP 25 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
h) Club Lounge (Executive Club Floor)
i) Lounge
The Club Lounge requires only the background music system.
TV sources shall be provided, inclusive of a large screen plasma or LCD television, but the
TV audio does not need to play through the background music system.
Meeting Rooms:
See Business Centre Boardroom Requirements.
PUBLIC AREAS
16
AV CONSIDERATIONS
i) All indoor public areas should be on the background music system. Each separate area shall be
separately zoned for volume but all will play the same source (see any exceptions noted below).
Volume control may be handled for several zones from one control provided it is located near
all areas being controlled.
ii) Washrooms may be controlled from the central background music rack.
b) Outdoor Circulation
i) No AV Systems are required at Outdoor Circulation areas; however, any covered walkways
between main buildings such as a trellis covered walkway between a main reception building and
a specialty restaurant building may have background music installed. Requirements are to be
reviewed on a project-by-project basis. Control of volume would be from the central background
music rack.
c) Lobby (Hotel and Resorts)

i) The lobby does not have any special AV requirements beyond provision of background music;
however, the location of adjacent F&B outlets should be taken into consideration to ensure
that different sources (i.e. lobby and restaurant) do not interfere with each other. A quiet space
(without speakers) should be provided for sound separation where necessary.
ii) Given the fluctuation in volume that can occur as result of varying occupancy levels, it is
preferred that the space contain ambient noise sensing microphones that can automatically
adjust the sound depending on occupancy and noise levels. It is also important that the Front
Office personnel have convenient access to the control panel to select source and volume.
iii) The controls for the lobby volume and source can be shared with other adjacent spaces. The
control panel shall be configured to allow the user to easily change volume and source (if
applicable) for these spaces.
MEP 26 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
d) Lobby (Residential)
i) Requirements are the same as Hotel / Resort Lobby.
e) Lobby (Residence Clubs)

i) Requirements are the same as Hotel / Resort Lobby.
f) Washrooms
i) All public washrooms shall have background music playing the same source as the adjacent
space. In the case of washrooms accessible from within the restaurant or bar the music should
be of that space rather than the public lobby. If the washrooms are accessed from the lobby
even if they are adjacent to the restaurant entrance, they should play the music from the lobby.
ii) Separate volume controls are required for each washroom but control can be done from the
central background music facility. Ambient noise sensing microphones should be used where
possible to automatically adjust music volume.
g) Porte Cochere
i) The Porte Cochere shall have background music, typically, the same source as the lobby, with
separate volume control.
ii) The volume control should be managed from a nearby area, e.g. reception desk, luggage
storage, etc.
h) Corridors (Public Spaces)

i) All public area corridors shall have background music.
ii) Careful consideration of the location of adjacent spaces that might play different sources should
be taken into consideration.
iii) The volume and source control can be shared with other adjacent spaces or managed centrally
from the background music system.
i) Corridors (Guest floors)

i) The guest floor corridors shall be silent and have no AV systems installed.
j) Elevator/Lift Vestibules
i) For guest elevator/lift vestibules located on public floors, including vestibules from parking garages
to guest elevators, the system shall be the same as that installed in the related corridors.
ii) For guest elevator/lift vestibules located on guest floors, no AV system shall be installed.
k) Elevators/Lifts
i) Digital signage is required near guest elevators serving the meeting space on the floor where
the meeting space is located to inform guests as to where their function is found. We do not put
digital signage in the hotel lobby to indicated meetings for privacy reasons. See the separate
standard on Digital Signage.
MEP 27 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
ii) The elevators do not require additional AV systems or connectivity to the Hotel/Resort Background
Music system.
l) Sundries Shop / Retail

i) The Sundries shop and any other Hotel operated retail shall have background music as well as
the ability to play local sources such as MP3 players. Each shop is a separate zone with local
source and volume control.
m) Third Party Retail
i) There are no hotel supported AV requirements in these spaces other than the beauty salon where
background music may be provided from the spa system. See comments on Spa below.
BACK OF HOUSE
17
AV CONSIDERATIONS
i) The majority of back of house areas will not have background music or AV systems. The
exceptions and clarifications are noted below.
b) Human Resources Training Room

i) The Training Room shall have the ability to:
Display content from a laptop on a screen large enough for all participants to see.
Play DVD or videotapes on a screen and built in speakers suitable for all participants to
see and hear.
The Training room does not have to be connected to the central AV system.
The training room can have an exposed projector fixed to the ceiling given it is back of house space
and for staff use only. The projector screen shall be mechanical so that it can be raised when not in
use.
A plasma or LCD TV can be considered in place of a ceiling projector and screen provided the TV is
large enough for the space but projectors are preferred as they offer the largest possible picture that
is crucial in training seminars. The viewing distance limits of 4 times screen height must be adhered
to if plasmas or LCDs are used.
The Training room shall have a TV outlet / source but it does not need to be connected to the Training
Rooms AV System.
c) Staff Cafeteria
i) The Staff Cafeteria shall have TVs that are connected to the Propertys MATV head end. These
TVs can be standard definition CRT TVs.
ii) If the cafeteria is large (seats over 80 staff at once) ceiling speakers connected to a local amplifier
with input source and microphone source for playing local music and doing staff announcements
must be provided. These speakers can be the same as those used for the fire alarm system, as
the sound quality does not have to be as high as for guest space.
MEP 28 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
iii) The staff cafeteria does not require connectivity to the Hotel/Resort Background Music system.
d) Loading Dock / Media Access

i) The loading dock shall have fibre, voice and data connectivity to the main ballroom. The fibre
is available for such instances where local media need to connect a broadcast truck or other
requirements.
ii) In city centre, urban towers, the routing of cables from a broadcast truck through the building
to the main ballroom must be considered. Where the cables pass through a fire door that is to
remain closed at all times, cabling conduit should be provided.
e) Corridors (Back of House)

i) Back of house corridors shall not have background music but will have speakers for the fire
alarm system.
f) Service Elevators/Lifts and Vestibules (Back of House)

i) These areas should not have background music. Where fire alarm speakers are required they
should be provided.
RECREATION
18
AV CONSIDERATIONS
i) In resort locations where pool areas, spas, fitness facilities may be some distance from the main
hotel buildings, separate local sound systems may be provided as a cost saving measure.
ii) Requirements for Golf clubhouse operations, Ski concierge, dive centres, and other specialized
recreational facilities should use the general guidelines in this document for similar spaces (e.g.
lobbies, changing rooms, etc.). The AV consultant should discuss special requirements with
Four Seasons and coordinate as necessary with the Interior Designer.
b) Pool Deck and Pool

i) The Pool Deck shall have a background music system with local source selection capabilities,
similar to any Food and Beverage Outlet.
ii) Underwater music speakers shall be connected to the pool deck system and play the same
content.
iii) Where the Pool Deck is adjacent to the Pool Bar and Grill, both system shall share the same
system with appropriate zoning and volume control.
iv) Outdoor speakers shall be selected and located in coordination with the architect and landscape
architect.
c) Fitness Centre
i) The fitness centre shall utilize a wireless exercise audio system. The wireless exercise audio
system allows for the wireless distribution of TV audio signals to wireless headsets.
MEP 29 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
ii) The exercise equipment shall be equipped with built in televisions.
iii) Wall mounted flat panel televisions are required at the weights area of the fitness centre.
iv) The Fitness Centre shall have built in speakers playing content from a local source such as a
CD player and MP3 audio input. The sources should be located in an adjacent back of house
space that is accessed only by Hotel/Resort staff.
v) Where an exercise/aerobics classroom is not provided, the Fitness Centre shall be capable
of hosting a fitness class where a wireless microphone and music can be played over built-in
speakers. A local AV rack should be provided to support this.
vi) The Fitness AV system does not need to connect to the Hotel/Resort central system.
d) Yoga Room / Aerobics Room

i) The room shall be capable of hosting a fitness class where a wireless microphone and music
can be played over built-in speakers. A local AV rack should be provided to support this.
ii) Similar to the Fitness Room, built in speakers playing content from a local source such as a
CD player and MP3 audio input is required. The sources should be located in the AV rack as
described above.
iii) The AV rack should be locked in a cabinet that is accessible only by Property staff.
e) Pool Cabanas
i) All cabana locations shall have TV connectivity to the Property MATV head end.
ii) Where specified by Four Seasons, plasma televisions with local DVD player and surround sound
are required.
f) Kids For All Seasons

i) Space permitting, the Kids for All Seasons shall be provided the following:
Home Theatre TV system with surround sound, DVD, CD etc.
Gaming connectivity (Sony Playstation, Nintendo Wii, etc).
iPod (MP3) docking stations
i) Typically this equipment is located in an alcove of the general space.
g) Teen Centre / Young Adults for All Seasons

i) Teens are a discriminating customer as it relates to technology specified in their space. Accordingly,
it is critical that the most up to date AV systems and related equipment be specified.
ii) Space permitting, the Teen Centre/Young Adults area shall be provided the following:
Home Theatre TV system with surround sound, DVD, CD etc.
Gaming connectivity (Sony Playstation, Nintendo Wii etc).
iPod (MP3) docking stations
i) Typically the TV system is located in a separate room from the gaming systems.
MEP 30 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
SPA
19
AV CONSIDERATIONS
i) The Spa shall be provided a background music system. The system can be connected to the
Hotel / Resort central system or provided as an independent system from the rest of the Hotel.
ii) In instances when the Interior Designer or Spa Consultant show AV systems that are not included
below (For example: Television at the change rooms), Four Seasons shall be contacted to
confirm any special AV requirements for this special circumstance.
b) Reception
i) Only background music shall be provided. No other AV systems are required. Separate volume
and source controls are required at the reception desk.
c) Circulation / Corridors
i) Speakers should be provided in the corridors to the locker rooms.
ii) There should be no speakers in the corridors to the treatment rooms or in the corridors outside
the treatment rooms so as not to intrude on the treatments.
d) Change rooms and Lockers

i) Typically only background music shall be provided. No other AV systems are required. Separate
volume and source controls are required that are accessible only by Property Staff.
e) Heat Experiences (Steam, Sauna, Plunge Pool etc)

i) There shall be no audiovisual systems provided and the area shall be a quiet experience.
f) Waiting Rooms
i) Background music shall be provided. Separate volume and source controls are required that are
accessible only by Property Staff.
ii) It is possible that the consultant recommends a TV at the waiting rooms. If so, the volume shall
connect to the Background Music System Speakers for override. A local DVD player to show
specialized Spa content shall also be provided.
g) Relaxation Rooms
i) The area shall be a quiet experience. Local MP3 players with headphones shall be provided for
each seat. Power for charging the MP3 players shall be coordinated.
ii) The headsets shall be complete with replaceable ear cushions for hygienic purposes.
MEP 31 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
h) Treatment Rooms
i) A local CD player with MP3 input source is required. The location of the device must be coordinated
with the AV consultant and the Interior Designer. The device should be easily accessible but
concealed from guests view.
i) Specialty Treatments Rooms

i) Same as treatment room.
ii) Depending on the size and purpose of the room, additional AV requirements may be required.
j) Outdoor Treatment Rooms

i) Background music shall be provided with access to a local source. Separate volume and source
controls are required. Careful consideration must be given to how the sound may affect other
adjacent outdoor areas and treatment rooms.
ii) A local CD player with MP3 input source is required. The location of the device must be coordinated
with the AV consultant and the Interior Designer. The device should be easily accessible but
concealed from guests view.
k) Consultation Office
i) There shall be no audiovisual systems provided and the area shall be a quiet experience.
l) Juice Bar
i) If this is located in the waiting area, provide the same background music source as that space.
If located in the relaxation area, do not provide background music.
m) Indoor or Outdoor Pool at Spa

i) The Pool Deck shall have a background music system with local source selection capabilities,
similar to the Food and Beverage Outlet.
ii) Underwater music speakers shall be connected to the pool deck system and play the same
content.
iii) Where the Pool Deck is adjacent to the Spa juice bar or F&B outlet, both systems shall share
the same system with appropriate zoning and volume control.
iv) Outdoor speakers shall be selected and located in coordination with the architect and landscape
architect.
MISCELLANEOUS
20
AV CONSIDERATIONS
a) Parking
i) There are no AV requirements in this space.
MEP 32 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
21 DIGITAL SIGNAGE
a) Meeting in Progress
i) The central control system is required to control illuminated Meeting in Progress (MIP) or
Similarly worded signage, which are to be located at back of house access to the function /
meeting rooms.
b) Event Signage and Control

i) Front of House event display screens (vertically mounted plasma or LCD screens) are to be
flush mounted into walls near the entrance of each relevant function or meeting room.
ii) The Front of House signage is to be linked to the AV Control room to allow for remote download
of hotel or client logo, event scheduling information and other related information for display to
guests.
iii) Information displayed for the Front of House event displays may comprise data, video, graphics
or a combination of all three and may run on a stored flash RAM card locally within the Plasma
/ LCD or be fed in real time.
iv) The central system managing the information displays shall have an interface to the hotel Sales
& Catering system (currently Newmarket Internationals Delphi) to retrieve current and future
function information for display.
v) Each ballroom pre-function, ballroom section, meeting room pre-function, meeting room section
and boardroom in the property meeting space shall have an event sign mounted at the entrance
to the space coordinated with the Interior design.
vi) A general sign indicating direction for meeting rooms and meeting events shall be located at the
entrance to the meeting space from the meeting space elevator/lift lobby and/or grand staircase.
Such signage will not be located in the main hotel lobby.
22 TRAINING, INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE
i) Label all controls with permanent, engraved legends generically indicating function.
ii) Label all circuits with the same designation along entire circuit, regardless of parallel or
intermediate termination. Provide engraved designations for all wall-mounted or rack-mounted
circuit terminations.
iii) Provide splice free cables for all cable under 300 m (1000 ft) in length. Document the splicing
of all cables over this distance.
iv) As-Built Documents including single-diagrams, floor plans, reflected ceiling plans and schematic
wiring diagrams which include all devices, circuit numbers, cabling, etc. are to be prepared by
the Contractor prior to acceptance of systems.
v) End user Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all systems are to be prepared by the
Contractor for use by the Operator prior to scheduling training sessions for the Operator.
MEP 33 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS T
vi) The manufacturer service manual for each piece of equipment will be included in a separate
volume for engineering reference.
vii) The Installing Contractor and Consultant will conduct a training session of not less than eight
(8) hours after systems are ready for acceptance including As-Built Documentation as well as
Operation and Maintenance Manuals (in no case less than thirty (30) days prior to opening).
viii) Provide a list of recommended portable equipment to the Operator no less than one hundred
twenty (120) days prior to opening for consideration and approval by owner and Four Seasons.
Unless otherwise advised, AV consultant and contractor to include portable equipment in their
scope of work.
ix) One full year of warranty after system acceptance or manufacturers warranty (whichever is
longer) for each piece of equipment is to be provided as part of specification and contractors
scope of work.
x) Where the property is located remotely or where it is difficult to import product, the consultant
must provide a list of spare parts to be included in contractor proposals and the contractor must
include these spares in their contract price.
INDEX TABLES
23
AV SYSTEMS: QUANTITY, TYPE AND LOCATION
i) See Attached Tables for standard types and quantities for typical AV equipment installations by
location in Four Seasons projects.
ii) The tables are as follows:
Table 1 describes by property area the audio and video systems, equipment and services
delivered to for all Hotel and Report spaces.
Table 2 describes the types and quantities of AV niches found in meeting space.
i) See the Four Seasons Structured Cabling Voice & Data Standards for a detailed explanation of
the quantity, type, location and installation requirements of all voice and data jacks in these AV
Niches.
ii) As noted previously, the niches and their contents need to be fully coordinated between the
consultants responsible for voice, data, power, TV and audiovisual systems.
MEP 34 / 36
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS
35 / 36
Property Area / Locations (See Sections 12 to 20 for details)
T
Boardrooms (Executive Offices Under 8 persons)
Boardrooms (Business Centre Under 8 Persons)

Boardrooms (Executive Offices Over 8 persons)
Boardrooms (Meeting Rooms Under 8 persons)
Boardrooms (Business Centre Over 8 Persons)

Boardrooms (Meeting Rooms Over 8 persons)
Teen Centre / Young Adults for All Seasons

I-06 Meeting Rooms greater than 1000 ft
I-07 Meeting Rooms less than 1000 ft
TABLE 1:
- Pre Function (Meeting Rooms)
I-04 Ballroom (3000 to 7000 sq.ft.)
I-03 Ballroom (Over 7000 sq.ft)
Systems and Equipment Requirements

Club Lounge (Executive Floor)
Loading Dock (or other space)

Outdoor Function Areas
Specialty Treatment Rooms

I-05 Ballroom Pre Function
by Property Area / Location
Outdoor Treatment Rooms

Outdoor Pre Function
Corridors (Public Space)

Corridors (Guestfloors)
Restaurant (Specialty)
Heat Experience Area

Kids for All Seasons
Restaurant (All Day)
Outdoor Circulation
Elevator Vestibules
Elevator Vestibules
Consultation Office
Lobby Tea Lounge
HR Training Room
Treatment Rooms
Pool Deck & Pool
Third Party Retail
Relaxation Room
Pool Bar & Grill
Waiting Rooms
Sundries Shop
Fitness Centre
Porte Cochere
Staff Cafeteria
Changerooms
Washrooms
Yoga Room
Circulation
Lobby Bar
Reception
Corridors
Elevators
Elevators
Aerobics
Cabanas
Lockers
Parking
Lobby
.
.
.
I-08
I-09
I-08
I-09
I-08
I-09
Bar
Arch Section Drwg Ref:

-
-
Meeting Spaces Food & Beverage Public Areas Back of House Recreation Spa Misc
Section 14 Section 15 Section 16 Section 17 Section 18 Section 19
Systems and Equipment Requirements (See Sections 3 to 11 for details)
Audio
Section 5
Standard Background Music (BGM) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Enhanced Background Mucis (EBGM) X X X X X X X
Under Water Speakers X
Wireless Audio System X X
Video
Section 6
Projector & Lift
Motorized / Recessed X X X X X X X
Projector
Built In Exposed X
Projector
Portable X X
Plasma
LCD Television X X X X X X X X X
Projector Screen
Motorized / Recessed X X X X X X X
Projector Screen
Built InExposed X
Projector Screen
Portable X X
Orientation Unit X X X X X X X X
Local "Built-in"Sources
Section 7
DVD Player X X X X X X
Combined CD / MP3 Player X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
VCR X X X X
Wired Microphones X X X X X X O
Wireless Microphones X X X X X X X
MP3 Player & Docking Station X X X X X X
Control
Section 8
Wireless Touch screen X X X X X X O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
DESIGN STANDARDS
Portable Wired Touch screen X X

Fixed Wired Touch Screen X X X X X X X X
Volume Source Controls X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Manual Switching X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Connectivity - Niches
Section 9
Control (Jack Only)
Audio Visual X X X X X X
Lighting X X X X X X X X X X X X
Audio
Line Inputs X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X
F OUR SEASONS
Line Outputs
Microphone X X X X X X X X X X X X
Video
Component Input/Output X X X X
VGA (Laptop) Input/Output X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Composite Input/Output X X X X X X X X X X X X X
S Video Input/Output
CATV / MATV X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Power
X Required
Power X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
O Optional
200 amp / Show Power X X X
Portable Cable Management
Conduit X X
Voice & Data
Cat 6 - Data X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
mm Fibre X X X
sm Fibre X X X
25 pair X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
2007
MEP
Cat 6 - Voice
Miscellaneous
Section 10
Video Conferencing X X O O
Interpretation X
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
AV Niches
T
Group
Control Niches AV Niches Floor Boxes Registration
Niches
TABLE 2:
CN with wireless touch
CN with portable wired
CN with fixed wired

AV Niche Requirements for
Meeting Space
touch screen
touch screen
screen
AV1-F
AV2-F
AVL
AV1
AV2
AV3
AV4
FB1
FB2
FB3
GR
Meeting Spaces Drwg
Section 14 Ref
Ballroom (Over 7000 sq.ft) Drwg: I-03 I-03 3 3 2 3 4 6
Ballroom (3000 to 7000 sq.ft.) Drwg: I-04 I-04 2 2 2 2 2 6
Ballroom Pre Function divisible in two (2) I-05 2 2 2
Ballroom Pre Function divisible in three (3) - 3 2 3
Public corridor outside Pre-function - 1 4 2
Meeting Rooms greater than 1000 ft I-06 1 1 1 1 1
Meeting Rooms less than 1000 ft I-07 1 1 1 1
Pre Function (Meeting Rooms) - 1 1
Boardrooms (Meeting Rooms Over 8 Persons) I-08 1 1 1 1
Boardrooms (Meeting Rooms Under 8 Persons) I-09 1 1
Boardrooms (Executive Offices Over 8 Persons) I-08 1 1 1
Boardrooms (Executive Offices Under 8 Persons) I-09 1 1
Boardrooms (Business Centre Over 8 Persons) I-08 1 1 1
Boardrooms (Business Centre Under 6 Persons) I-09 1 1
Outdoor Pre Function - 2 2
Outdoor Function Areas - 2 2
Loading Dock/building exterior - 1
Niche Components - Connectivity
Section 9
Control Equipment
Wireless Touch screen 1
Portable Wired Touch screen 1
Volume Source Controls 1 1
Dimming control 1 1
Projection Screen control 1 1
Projector/lift control 1 1
Control (Jack Only)
Audio Visual connection for touch screen 1 1
Connection fordimming control 1 1
DMX 512 control jack for show lights 1 1 1 1 1 1
Power
120 v 20 A - each on separate circuit 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2
120/208 single phase, 3 W 30 A NEMA 14-30R outlet 1 1 1 1
200 amp / Show Power 1 1
750 mm (3") empty sleeve to adjacent 200 amp camlock show power 1 1
Voice & Data
Multi-mode (mm) fibre - SC connectors 4 4 4
Single mode (sm) fibre - SC connectors 2 2 2
Cat 6 - data 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2
Cat 6 - Voice 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2
25 pair Cat 6 - voice terminated on 6 plex RJ-45 faceplate 1 1
Audio
Line Inputs 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1
Line Outputs 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 1
Microphone 4 4 4 4 4 2
Video
CATV / MATV 1 1 1 1 1 1
Component Input/Output 1 1 1 1 1
VGA (Laptop) Input/Output 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Composite Input/Output 1 1 1 1 1 1
S Video Input/Output
Notes:
1. Power noted is North American; provide equivalent power for location where property is located
2. 200 amp show power is located behind ballroom spaces in service corridor; connections to room are through 750 mm (3") empty sleeve. 200 amp
power connection is not located in AV niche itself.
3. Quantities are quantities of connections not of faceplates. If connections all fit on one faceplate then one faceplate may be used.
e.g. 2 units of 120 v 20 a is 2 duplex 120 v outlets in North America (as power comes standard as duplex in North America) but 2 units of 220 v 13 a
circuits (single gang, in Europe)
e.g. 4 microphone jacks are 4 single microphone jacks on one faceplate.

4. Connections of a type (power, voice/data/audio/video should be kept together for ease of installation.
5. Power connections should be left most in jack with a gap or with fibre optic connections to the immediate right to reduce/eliminate the opportunity for
electrical interference with low voltage connections (voice, data, audio, video)
6. Quantity of outdoor AV niches are for estimate purposes only and actual requirements witll be project-by-project.
MEP 36 / 36
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
U SECURITY SYSTEM
1 General Design Concept ................................. ...... ............... 1
a) General
2 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) .............. ........ ............ 1

a) General
b) Locations
c) Cabling
d) Digital Video Recorder
e) Monitoring Equipment
f) Remote CCTV System Access
g) Installation
h) Installer Qualifications
i) Spare Parts + Documentation
j) Training + Commissioning
k) Warranty
3 Door Monitoring System ....................... . ............... .............. 6

a) General
b) Locations
c) Installer Qualifications
d) Spare Parts
e) Training + Commissioning
f) Warranty
4 VIP + Help Assistance System ........ ............................. 8

a) General
b) VIP Notification
c) Help / Assistance
d) Safe Deposit Box
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
e) Sauna + Steam Rooms
5 Electronic Door Locking System ............... ...... .............. 9

a) General
b) Card Readers + Locations
c) Key Card Encoders + Locations
6 Automated Key Control System ................ .......................... 12

a) General
7 Photo ID System ..................................... ........................................... 12

a) General
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
1 GENERAL DESIGN CONCEPT
a) General
i) This is the second of two Security sections in the FSHR Design Standards. The purpose of each
section is described below:
Section One (Architectural): Identifies the principal areas of each project to be evaluated
for security requirements and the resulting architectural, layout and physical considerations
that must be incorporated into the design.
Section Two (MEP): Identifies the technical infrastructure and equipment requirements and
locations of the various required security systems. This is the section provided below.
ii) Four Seasons Security Systems are typically comprised of the following:
Closed Circuit Television Security Systems
VIP & Assistance Push buttons
Electronic Door Locking System / Card Access System
Door Alarms
Staff Photo ID System
iii) All security systems will be integrated and compatible with other hotel systems. For example,
door alarms are integrated with staff wireless communication devices; CCTV cameras are
equipped with motion detectors that when activated, start the recording process etc.
iv) This document shall be read in conjunction with the detailed information provided in other
sections of the Standards:
Architectural Section W - Security, identifies the areas to be covered by security systems.
Architectural Section S - Offices, details the standard requirements for security offices.
Architectural Section Q - Door Hardware, identifies what doors and locks are required
throughout the property.
v) Where the Hotel is part of a mixed-use facility, special attention must be given to ensure that
appropriate areas are locked off and secured and the security systems are coordinated with third
party systems. As the situation will depend by property and region, FSH should be consulted
prior to the development of design to confirm requirements.
2 CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV)
a) General
i) The CCTV system will be designed in coordination with the hotels door monitoring and security
system to for a complete and fully integrated system. The system will be comprised of, but not
limited to, the following components:
Remote control cameras with pan/tilt/zoom capability including lens, housings, motor
operators, and mounting devices
Fixed lens colour pinhole cameras or small surface mounted cameras
MEP 1 / 12
2007 SECURITY SYSTEMS
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
Passive Infrared Sensors
Remote Intercom System
Colour monitors with mounting devices
Signal conditioning equipment for rack mounting
Remote camera motion control system
Recording devices
Back-up devices (e.g. DVD recorder)
System wiring
Interfaces to Door Alarm System and Radio/Paging or WiFi telephony for alarm
notification.
ii) All CCTV monitors, cameras, controllers and recording devices will be powered from the hotel
UPS. The security consultant or systems installer shall coordinate all requirements for power of
the CCTV system components with the electrical consultant.
iii) The surveillance system shall utilize digital video transmission to allow a digitized video
transmission over standard Ethernet hardware. Video encoding, streaming and decoding shall
not be greater then 0.5 second.
iv) IP CCTV technology with PoE (Power over Ethernet) provides both power and signal on the
same cable and may be considered. The switches that power the cameras will need to be on a
UPS circuit.
b) Locations
CCTV cameras shall be provided in each of the following areas:
i) Entrance and Egress:
Staff entrance(s)
Any unsecured and unattended entrances or exits.
Main lobby entrance
Porte cochere
Entry driveway/gatehouse(s) (Resorts)
ii) Public Areas:
Reception desk
Concierge desk and luggage Room
Guest elevators and public areas floor elevator lobbies
Guest safe deposit box room (staff side)
Parking garage
ATM machine
Vitrines
MEP 2 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
iii) Back of House:
Staff cashout room and cashiers office
Truck dock/receiving area
Entrance doors to food and beverage stores
Main Systems Room(s)
AV Control Room
Roof Access
iv) All public area cameras must be discreet and concealed from the guests view as much as
possible. Small, surface mounted cameras may be considered by only after review and approval
by FSHR.
v) All cameras located at reception and concierge must be installed at a height that will capture the
face of the client / guest.
vi) Cameras at the back of house shall be located in vandal proof housings.
vii) Where the cameras main purpose is to monitor entry and egress traffic, the camera should
be integrated with a door switch that when activated, will instruct the camera to pan, tilt, zoom
(PTZ) (if necessary) and record. In remote areas such as this, the camera does not need to be
recording at all times.
viii) In low traffic areas where the cameras only purpose is to monitor possible traffic, the camera
should have a motion detector that when activated, will instruct the camera to PTZ (if necessary)
and record.
ix) Intercoms are to be provided either separately linked to security or integrated with camera
housing at selected locations. They provide two way communication with camera location and
security office (or telephone operators).
x) Dummy cameras are not acceptable and should never be used.
xi) Outdoor cameras shall be housed in vandal proof, weatherproof, corrosion resistant housing
with heater/blower and sun shield, and lenses shall be provided with variable focal iris. Some
PTZ may be required.
xii) The locations of the ceiling mounted security cameras must be coordinated with the Reflected
Ceiling Plans.
xiii) Ceiling mounted cameras are installed with mounting brackets and trimming rings that are
finished / painted to match the ceiling.
xiv) For external cameras, sealant for the cabling with approved fire resistant materials and
waterproofing materials is required.
xv) Camera image quality depends on function: observation (monitor general activity); recognition
(monitor and recognize activity detail); and identification (identify person/license plate/event
details).
c) Cabling
i) Horizontal Structure Cabling System shall be provided by a horizontal cabling system trade
contractor(s). The Security Consultant shall liaise with the electrical / low voltage contractor to
confirm the exact number and location of data ports for the surveillance system.
MEP 3 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
ii) CAT 6 UTP shall be used as transmission media for CCTV video signals, pan/tilt/zoom control
signals, 24 V AC power distribution. See FSHR Data Cabling Standards for exact requirements
(MEP Section R - Structured Cabling Voice and Data).
d) Digital Video Recorder

i) The digital video recorders (DVR) or network video recorders (NVR) shall be provided with
sufficient storage capacity to record the onsite cameras for 30 days at 15 frames per second,
based on the CCTV system being in operation 24 hours per day, seven days per week and
recording activated during any activity in field of view of the cameras.
ii) Equipment is required to allow the immediate review of footage, as well as produce outputs of
the footage on standard media formats (DVD, AVI, VHS). This is typically installed at the Hotels
Security Office.
e) Monitoring Equipment
i) The security & CCTV System will be controlled and monitored from the Security Control
Room (Security Office). See Section S (Offices) of the Architectural Standards for additional
requirements related physical layout and features of the Security Office.
ii) 17 to 20 Flat Panel (LCD or Plasma) monitors are required at the main security console. Applicable
keyboards, joystick or control boards should be provided. The monitors should be coordinated
with the desk and installed in custom locations or on poles with specialized mounts.
1 - for holding on any selected camera
1 - for replaying from digital video recorder
iii) The Security Consultant will lay out the security office and identify the number of monitors
required. The monitors must be located where they are easily viewable and the guard who is at
the security desk can maintain a line of sight to the window to the Employee Entrance Corridor.
Typically, the following calculation are used to determine the number of monitors required:
1 - for every 4 CCTV cameras connected to sequential switcher for automatic switching
and with quad view screen feature. This rule assumes for 17 to 20 Flat Panel (LCD or
Plasma) monitors.
Larger Flat Panel monitors that can show more cameras are acceptable but the viewing
size of the cameras within the split screen must maintain the size it would achieve on a 17
or 20 monitor.
f) Remote CCTV System Access

i) PC interface software is required at various computers on property allowing remote access to
the CCTV system. Approximately 5 licenses are required for a standard Hotel or Resort. Where
the building is part of a mixed-use facility or has extensive public areas and back of house,
additional licenses may be required. These locations are identified below:
Telecommunications / Hotel Operator Room
Front Desk / Reception Workroom
Front Desk / Reception
MEP 4 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
General Managers Office
Hotel Managers Office
g) Installation
i) All head end (DVR, security monitoring, switching equipment) shall be located in the security
office or a technical room accessible from within the security offices.
ii) The consultant shall specify all equipment, materials and accessories required to make the
systems complete and of professional quality, including any miscellaneous items necessary for
proper orientation, but not specifically mentioned. Specify all labour and supervision to check
out, adjust and calibrate the total system.
iii) The installer shall verify all site conditioned prior to installation and coordinate work with the
installer of the Door Monitoring System.
iv) All hardware, screws, bolts, nuts, components and accessory fittings shall be of a type designed,
intended or appropriate for the use, and compliment the items with which they are used, and
shall have corrosion protection suitable for the environment in which they are installed.
v) The installed must take precautions, as are necessary to guard against electromagnetic and
electro-static hum; to supply adequate ventilation; to install the equipment as to provide maximum
safety to the operator.
h) Installer Qualifications
i) The installer shall be an authorized representative of the Security System manufacturer for both
installation and maintenance of the system required.
ii) The system installer shall have an office, with 24 hour phone contact for emergency service,
staffer with factory trained engineers and technicians fully qualified of providing instructions,
routine maintenance and emergency callback service on all system components.
i) Spare Parts and Documentation

i) Provide one complete set of fuses and indicator lights as required.
ii) Provide any special tools required for operation and maintenance of the system and all its
components.
iii) Provide one complete set of spare parts & equipment as recommended by the manufacturer
based on the as installed system. As a minimum one spare lens of each type, 1 spare driver
operator, 1 spare pinhole camera is required.
iv) Provide three sets of O&M manuals and as-built single line diagrams with schedule of all
equipment, controlled points, software instructions, and original program software.
v) A complete list of all furnished equipment, with manufacturers model numbers, broken down by
system indicating installed location.
vi) Manufacturers operating instructions and service manuals for all furnished equipment including
spare parts list and supplier contacts.
vii) Revised schematics with wire numbers and all relevant details.
viii) Revised architectural drawings showing all device locations, cabling and circuitry.
MEP 5 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
ix) Results of tests values and final settings.
x) A complete I/O matrix of all in coordination with the door monitoring system.
j) Training and Commissioning

i) Included under this section is the aiming and testing of the complete CCTV system and the
interface to the Door Monitoring System. Each system installer should pre-commission the CCTV
and Door Monitoring Systems individually and then jointly to verify that the system functions in
a fully integrated and coordinated fashion.
ii) Prior to final installation of the CCTV cameras, the contractor shall verify the specified lens
size is correct for the final building design/construction. Confirm the proper field of view for
each location. Install cameras at approximate locations shown on the approved drawings. Field
adjustments shall be made as required to provide or improve the field of view of the area to be
monitored. Coordinate these adjustments with FSHR.
iii) The system should operate completely quiet, void of any noises, interference and distortions.
iv) Align and adjust all video cameras and synchronize all switchers, pan, tilt and zoom to provide
smooth, glitch free operation to optimize the images at the display monitor.
v) If the need for additional adjustment becomes evident during demonstration and testing, the
work shall be continued until the installation operates properly. If final acceptance is delayed
because of defective equipment, the installer shall pay for all additional time and expense during
any extensions of the acceptance period.
vi) Perform 16 hours of on site training. Specific training shall be provided for operator management
of the system in selecting and routing camera displays, recording and playback of events, alarm
management etc. Conduct re-training as necessary at the end of the warranty period at no
additional cost.
k) Warranty
i) Provide a full 1-year parts and labour warranty with emergency service available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
ii) Provide one preventative maintenance service and inspection prior to the end of the 1-year
warranty period.
iii) The warranty period shall commence with the soft opening of the Hotel, upon acceptance of the
system by FSHR.
3 DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
a) General
i) The door monitoring system shall monitor all electrically controlled hardware (online locks) and
control other devices as indicated. The system shall be fully integrated and coordinated with the
CCTV system.
ii) Door monitoring is required throughout the property to monitor unattended doors, especially all
doors that exit the building.
iii) All door alarms should register at the security office and the telephone operators room. The
alarms should be silent.
MEP 6 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
iv) When activated, the alarm should also broadcast a notification message to staff wireless
handheld devices as pre-determined by FSHR.
v) The door position switch shall be mortised on the strike side, at the head of the door and shall
be concealed.
vi) The door alarm functions shall be programmable so as to define the time of day alarming functions
and toggle associated cameras. Coordinate all final requirements with the CCTV system with
input from FSHR.
vii) Provide a PC based security system with all associated software for monitoring all door alarms.
Graphic annunciation panels are also required and should be placed at the Security Office.
viii) All head end equipment shall also be located in the Security Office or in a technical room
accessible from within the Security Office.
ix) The Door Alarm system shall allow for operator interface functions through the PC including
but not limited to changing alarm functions, setting overrides, alarm display, acknowledging,
resetting and operator logging.
b) Locations
i) The following locations typically require a door alarm:
All exterior exit doors
Parking garage, pedestrian entrances/exits (enclosed garage only)
F&B storage rooms
Stairwells
General Cashier
All emergency exits via emergency escape stairs
All project specific doors as required by FSHR.
Wherever there is an online locking device (see other section).
c) Installer Qualifications
i) The installer shall be an authorized representative of the Security System manufacturer for both
installation and maintenance of the system required.
ii) The system installer shall have an office, with 24 hour phone contact for emergency service,
staffer with factory trained engineers and technicians fully qualified of providing instructions,
routine maintenance and emergency callback service on all system components.
d) Spare Parts
i) Provide one complete set of fuses and indicator lights.
ii) Provide any special tools required for operation and maintenance of the system and all its
components.
iii) Provide 10% Spare I/O modules.
iv) Provide complete system management and operations documentation.
v) Provide complete as-built drawings showing locations and addresses of all door contacts.
MEP 7 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
e) Training and Commissioning
i) Included under this section is the aiming and testing of the complete Door Monitoring System
and the interface to the CCTV System. Each system installer should pre-commission the CCTV
and Door Monitoring Systems individually and then jointly to verify that the system functions in
a fully integrated and coordinated fashion.
ii) Pretest all systems functions, operations and protective features.
iii) Adjust to ensure operation complies with requirements
iv) Continue testing until all deficiencies are corrected and record all operating and test results.
Provide a complete matrix of all I/O functions and interface to CCTV system. Demonstrate the
functionality and proper operation of the system to the satisfaction of FSHR.
v) Perform 8 hours of on site training. Conduct re-training as necessary at the end of the warranty
period at no additional cost.
f) Warranty
i) Provide a full 1-year parts and labour warranty with emergency service available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
ii) Provide one preventative maintenance service and inspection prior to the end of the 1-year
warranty period.
iii) The warranty period shall commence with the soft opening of the Hotel, upon acceptance of the
system by FSHR.
4 VIP AND HELP ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
a) General
i) The Security Consultant in coordination with the Electrical Consultant must specify a VIP and
Help Assistance System as specified herein.
ii) The system is comprised of push buttons that signal lights, buzzers and alarms at various other
locations throughout the property.
iii) All push buttons, lights and buzzers should show on related plans and elevations of the necessary
consultants where applicable. For example, the interior design and electrical elevation of the
Reception Desk must detail the location of the push buttons and lights as required below.
iv) All buttons and lights shall be labeled as to source.
b) VIP Notification
i) VIP arrival system consisting of push button at each front desk workstation and each doormans
stand that signals a blue flashing light at General Managers administrative assistants workstation.
(Number of push buttons varies depending on length of desk and number of workstations). If
possible, the signal should be repeated at the Hotel Managers office.
MEP 8 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
c) Help/Assistance
i) Assistance request buttons at each front desk registration location and at the front desk cashier
location (if separate) that signal a blue flashing light in the front office managers office and also
in the front office workroom. If the front desk is not within view of the concierge desk, also put a
concealed blue flashing light at the concierge desk.
ii) Doormans Assistance request buttons at each doormans stand that signal a light annunciation
at the concierge desk and in the concierge workroom.
iii) Concierge Assistance system with button at concierge desk that signals a buzzer in the concierge
workroom. If the concierge desk is not within view of the front desk, also put a concealed blue
flashing light at the front desk.
d) Safe Deposit Box

i) Push button inside guest safe deposit box viewing room with a buzzer to registration desk to
communicate to staff that the guest is ready to return the safe deposit box. The buzzer must
appropriately notify staff, but not disturb other guests who are in the vicinity of the front desk.
ii) Electric strike controlled from front desk. One push button at front registration desk. Guest
always has free egress out of room via electric strike. If a button is required inside the room for
the guest to release the electric strike this must be included. There should also be a deadbolt
on the inside of the guest safe deposit box room to enable the guest to lock the door and
prevent entry while they are inside regardless of whether the electric strike release at the desk
is pressed or not.
e) Sauna and Steam Rooms

i) All Sauna and Steam Rooms require a push button inside at a height reachable by a prone
person. Each push button will signal red lights (one per push button) and a common alarm buzzer
in Spa & Fitness Facility Reception Desk. If the alarm is not responded to within 30 seconds,
the systems should send a signal to another set of flashing lights in the telephone operators
room and hotel/resort reception desk. There are no buzzers at the telephone operators room
or reception desk.
5 ELECTRONIC DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM
a) General
i) Four Seasons prefers to have one integrated door / card access system. The system should be
a mix of online (hardwired) and offline (battery operated) components that are managed from a
central location, typically the security office.
ii) If two systems are being considered that split the online and offline systems (typically the back
of house online and the front of house/guest use offline), the guest system must be used for
all doors that are in the public areas and guest floors.
iii) The door locking system (as it relates to the guest access locations) must be compatible and
integrated with the Four Seasons Standard PMS (Property Management System). Contact
FSHR for the latest version that is installed.
MEP 9 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
iv) The following are standard requirements that should be included in the contract for the door
hardware system:
Server and software (to be located in computer room)
If the server is not provided by the locking system supplier, it must be Included in FF&E
systems budget
Installation of entire system including locks, loading of software, installation and testing of
PMS interface
On-site training in use of system, including provision of manuals.
Warranty on equipment and software.
Lock interrogators (one for engineering, one for security, one spare)
Where possible, the staff attendance system should be compatible with the type of cards
used for the access system.
v) Please also refer to Architectural Section Q - Door Hardware of the Four Seasons Design &
Construction Standards.
vi) The PC server and on-line locking head end shall be located in the Security Office.
b) Card Readers and Locations

i) Three card-reading technologies are acceptable to Four Seasons:
RFID technology (Radio Frequency Identification), also called proximity.
Magnetic technology (card swipe)
Smart card technology (smart chip on card)
ii) The following hardwired card readers controlling electric strikes and/or magnetic locks are
required. All are on the Boack of House locking system:
Staff entry with remote release from security office.
Access door(s) from the loading dock into the back-of-house service corridor.
Access door(s) from underground parking garage into back-of-house corridor if frequently
used by employees.
Access door(s) to valet cashiers room if the room has direct access to the exterior.
Access door(s) from fire stairs to hotel floors in mixed-use buildings.
Telephone operators room
Security office and security managers office
Service elevators
Computer room
PABX Room
MATV Room (if separate from computer room)
All food and beverage storerooms
MEP 10 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
Operating supplies storerooms
AV storage and AV control rooms
iii) The following areas require card readers that can be either online (hardwired) or offline (battery
operated). All are on the guest access locking system:
Guest rooms, including corridor doors connecting two or more rooms into a suite
Maids closets and service landings / buildings
Spa & Fitness Facilities
Public/Guest elevators
Garage entry and egress
If applicable, access from residences to the Hotel and vice versa
If applicable, Residence club units, including corridor doors connecting two or more rooms
into a suite
If applicable, Condo hotel units, including corridor doors connecting two or more rooms
into a suite
Meeting room and ballroom doors. Both front and back of house access
c) Key Card Encoders and Locations

i) All key card encoders should be hardwired back to the central Security System. Controlled user
access at each terminal is required.
ii) The key encoder system should support the following functions:
Making keys that can open multiple doors.
iii) The following key card encoders are required:
1 for each position at the front desk
1 - for every two positions at the concierge desk
1 - for hotel security
1 - for the gatehouse or other property entrance
1 - for remote check-in (if applicable)
1 - for the Club Lounge reception desk (if applicable)
1 - for each Residence Club check-in position (if different from hotel front desk)
1 - for each Condo Hotel check-in position (if different from hotel front desk)
1 - for spare
iv) If system does not support all key encoding functions including making suite keys (those that
can open multiple doors in a suite) with the PMS client PC software, then an administration
terminal from the door lock supplier is required for each of the following areas:
Near front desk
Near Residence Club front desk (if different from hotel front desk)
MEP 11 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS U
Near condo hotel front desk (if different from hotel front desk)
Near club lounge reception desk (if applicable)
Gatehouse
Security office
6 AUTOMATED KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
a) General
i) The Security Consultant shall specify or coordinate with the Door Hardware Consultant, the
selection of an Electronic Key Control System.
ii) Contact FSHR for an up to date list of approved manufacturers and configurations.
iii) The Electronic key control system will be located on the wall of the Staff Entrance Corridor or
vestibule opposite the Hotels main security office.
iv) The automated system is used to manage the inventory and distribution of all keys to staff for
all doors on the property.
v) For space consideration, the Electronic Key Control System Cabinet is typically 23 3/4 / 60.5
cm wide by 27 / 69 cm high and three are provided side by side. Typically, a 2 gap is allowed
between each cabinet.
vi) Accordingly, wall space for approximately 75.25 / 190 cm wide by 27 / 69 cm high is required.
Power and one data connection are required. The unit is approximately 4 to 5 deep.
vii) Sizes and dimension should be confirmed by FSHR for each property as it may vary depending
on final system configuration and manufacturer.
7 PHOTO ID SYSTEM
a) General
i) Provide a complete Photo ID System that is compatible with the specified Security System.
Include all hardware and software required to print photographs on access cards that are
compatible with the Back of House and Guestroom Door Locking System. 1000 blank cards are
required.
MEP 12 / 12
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PORTABLE RADIOS
V + PAGING EQUIPMENT
1 General Requirements ................................................................ 1
2 Portable Radios ............................................................................... 1
3 Base Station/Repeater for Portable Radios ............. 2
4 Pagers .................................................................................................... 2
5 Paging Base Stations ................................................................. 3
6 Programming ...................................................................................... 3
7 Installation, Training + Licensing ....................................... 3
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS V
1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
This section describes the requirements of the portable radios and paging equipment. The equipment shall
comprise of local available to property portable radios, repeaters, base stations and pagers.
i) Portable radios and paging equipment shall be provided for the exclusive communications use of
the staff. Due to various geographic conditions of the worldwide property sites, different models
of equipment are required to accommodate the various frequencies used in the specific areas.
The Electrical Consultant in coordination with the local supplier of the equipment shall determine
the exact equipment model, frequency requirements and power requirements to best meet the
requirements for each project site. The equipment models listed in this Standard are provided
for general performance and quality standards.
ii) The equipment specified herein are of model numbers or series available at time of preparing
these Standards. The eventual model to be provided for each property must be the latest model
with similar features available from the manufacturer at time of substantial completion of the
project.
iii) Alternate, equivalent products may be used subject to approval by FSHR.
iv) The radio and pager supplier shall provide a written guarantee that the units will have clear
reception throughout the project. If they do not, the supplier will replace the installation with ones
that give the approved reception, at no extra cost to property Owner.
v) The supplier shall provide a full parts and labour warranty for 12 months for all components after
system acceptance, except for radios which shall have a 2 year warranty.
2 PORTABLE RADIOS
i) Portable radios shall be hand held two way mobile radios either very high frequency (VHF) with
5 watts power output or ultra high frequency (UHF) with a 4 watts power output. The radios shall
be minimum ten channel types and channels shall be dedicated to departments as approved
by FSHR.
ii) The portable radios shall be equivalent to Motorola model No. HT1250-LS with following
features:
16 channel capacity;
12.5/25 KHz switchable channel spacing;
lithium ion rechargeable batteries to provide up to 11 hours of operating time;
battery gauge;
emergency button;
switchable power levels;
two years parts and labour warranty.
ii) Accessories for the portable radios shall include:

chargers (a mix of single and multi-unit chargers permitting charging of all radios at one
time) with one spare of each type
MEP 1/3
2007 PORTABLE RADIOS + PAGING EQUIPMENT
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS V
leather carrying cases with belt clip for each unit with ten percent (10%) spares
remote speaker microphones for each unit with ten percent (10%) spares and,
thirty percent (30%) spare batteries.
iii) Resorts shall be provided with quantity of forty (40) portable radios. Hotels shall be provided
with a quantity of thirty (30) portable radios.
3 BASE STATION/REPEATER FOR PORTABLE RADIOS

i) The base station for communications with the portable radios shall be equivalent to the Motorola
model No. GR1225 base station/repeater unit with features as follows:
12.5/25 KHz frequency selection;
VHF/UHF;
programmable power outputs;
omni directional antenna;
tone interface/adapter.
ii) For project applications where transmission of greater than 300m (1000) is required, then the
design should consider the use of the GR1225 as a repeater unit and remote controller with
desk top microphone or tone type telephone set used at desk top. Antenna shall be provided to
best suit site conditions for the respective equipment.
4 PAGERS
i) Portable pagers for the staff shall be tone types with vibrating feature and alphanumeric
displays.
ii) Pagers shall be equivalent to Motorola model Adviser Gold with features as follows:
four line alphanumeric display;
integral alarm clock;
user selectable alerts;
vibrating alert;
rechargeable batteries with charger;
battery gauge;
31 message slots;
leather-case and belt clip;
one year labour and material warranty.
iii) Resorts shall be provided with a quantity of sixty (60) pagers. Hotels shall be provided with a
quantity of forty (40) pagers.
MEP 2/3
F OUR SEASONS
DESIGN STANDARDS V
5 PAGING BASE STATIONS
i) The paging base station shall be equivalent to the Zetron Page Centre with features as
follows:
built-in transceiver (selectable 2 or 4 watt);
built-in display and numeric keypad and with alphanumeric keyboard;
accommodates up to 1000 pagers;
POCSAG 512, 1200 and 2400 baud paging numeric and alphanumeric pagers;
telephone line for access from any touch-tone (DTMF) telephone;
group paging for alerting multiple pagers;
natural (not synthesized) voice prompts for easy telephone access;
8 alarm inputs;
2 data ports supports TAP, Motorolas COMP1 or COMP2 protocols;
mobile origination of pages or telephone calls;
external transmitter interface for higher power applications;
power supply;
antenna as required to best suit site conditions. (Decibel PB633 or Sinclair SRL301NM
omni directional antennae).
ii) Cabling shall be heliax cabling and of type as recommended by the system suppliers.
6 PROGRAMMING
i) The system provided must include appropriate PC based software for trained hotel personnel
to assign pagers to individuals, put the individuals in groups and re-arrange the groups without
vendor involvement.
ii) There must be an interface to the hotel PBX/PABX to permit paging from any telephone set on
the property.
7 INSTALLATION, TRAINING AND LICENSING

i) Include costs of on-site assembly, installation, and testing of all system equipment.
ii) Include costs of training staff on the operation of the systems, including programming, and
maintenance of the equipment.
iii) Include costs for applicable licensing of the equipment with appropriate authorities. The supplier
shall be responsible for arranging for the necessary licensing for the system.
MEP 3/3

MEP + Specialty Systems Design Standards (FOUR SEASONS)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MEP + Specialty Systems Design Standards (FOUR SEASONS)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FOUR SEASONS

2007 MENT/ ARCHITECTURAL/ AR-

The contents of the Four Seasons Design Standards (FS Stan-

B MECHANICAL DESIGN CRITERIA

G INSULATION, SUPPORT + ISOLATION

J EMERGENCY POWER GENERATION

SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL + LIGHTING

1 Design + Construction .............................................................. 1

N FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Cable Standards + Terminations - Riser Cabling -

Cable Standards + Terminations - Table 1: Riser

Cable Standards + Terminations - Patching at

10 Cable Standards + Terminations - Cables ..................... 9

Jack Types - Administration, Public Space, Back of

12 Jack Types - Guestrooms ......................................................... 12

Typical Voice/Data Requirements by Functional

Point of Sale (POS) Requirements by Functional

Voice + Data Requirements for Guestrooms:

25 Locations with Special Cabling Requirements ........... 28

T AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS

5 Audio - Systems + Equipment Requirements .............. 3

8 Control - Systems + Equipment Requirements 12

Miscellaneous - Systems + Equipment

11 Portable - Systems + Equipment Requirements 18

2 Design + Construction Phase .............................................. 2

3 Analysis of Design Alternative ............................................ 5

4 Consultant Responsibilities .................................................. 7

5 Additional Project Requirements ..................................... 8

2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION PHASE

a) Schematic Design Phase

b) Design Development Phase

c) Contract Document Phase

3 ANALYSIS OF DESIGN ALTERNATIVE

a) Engineering Analysis and Modelling

b) Green Building Measures

a) FSHR Design Standards

d) Coordination with Design Team

5 ADDITIONAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

a) Testing and Balancing

xii) Back of House Area

2 Design Criteria ................................................................................. 1

3 Mechanical Systems .................................................................... 5

b) Applicable Codes and Standards

a) Outdoor Design Criteria

b) Interior Design Conditions

COOLING SEASON HEATING SEASON

c) Humid Climate Design

d) Dry Climate Design

b) Guestroom HVAC Systems

c) Building HVAC Systems

d) Mechanical Plant Selection

e) Special HVAC Requirements

f) Duct and Piping Sizing

2 Heating Plant Equipment ......................................................... 3

b) Boiler Sizing Requirements

c) Hot Water (Heating) System

b) Heating Water Pumps

f) Electric Heating Coils

g) Booster Heating Coils

k) Pressure Reducing Stations

m) Steam and Hot Water Piping

2 Cooling Plant Equipment ......................................................... 2

2 COOLING PLANT EQUIPMENT